JP6899193B2 - Pachinko machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

In general, a gaming machine (for example, a ball gaming machine) executes a winning lottery when a gaming ball enters the starting port, and if the lottery is won, a profit such as a winning game that is advantageous to the player. It is designed to generate a state. In the past, illegal nail adjustments were made in many pachinko halls for this type of gaming machine, and the reality was that it fueled the gambling spirit of the players. On the other hand, manufacturers have been developing gaming machines with measures to prevent nail adjustment (see, for example, Patent Document 1), but it is hard to say that they have achieved sufficient results, and in recent years, they have been virtually achieved. There is a trend to completely prohibit nail adjustment, etc., which has been tolerated, and it is necessary to inspect whether the ball ejection performance of the gaming machine deviates from the original performance due to nail adjustment, etc.

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2017-144042

Therefore, it is necessary to provide the gaming machine with a performance display device that displays information on the performance based on the game performance (for example, the base value, etc.) so that the ball ejection performance and the like can be easily grasped. However, since the program capacity of the gaming machine and the control related to the gaming are strictly restricted by law, when the above-mentioned performance display device is provided, the gaming processing including the operation check of the gaming machine is not complicated, and the gaming machine it is important to reduce the control burden.

Therefore, an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of reducing the control load of the gaming machine when the performance display device as described above is provided.

The above object of the present invention is achieved by the following means .
(1) A lottery means for executing a lottery regarding winning based on the establishment of starting conditions, and
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a win, the winning game control means for controlling the winning game and the winning game control means
Information display means capable of displaying predetermined information that is display-controlled based on predetermined display pattern data and calculated based on game performance, and
An information display control means that controls the information display means and
A data table in which a plurality of types of display pattern data that can be displayed on the information display means are stored, and
It is a gaming machine equipped with
A first storage area in which the game information is stored, and
It has a second storage area in which the predetermined information is stored, and has.
The information display control means
After the power is turned on, the confirmation display process for causing the information display means to display a confirmation display for operation confirmation for a predetermined time, and the predetermined information display for displaying the predetermined information on the information display means after executing the confirmation display for a predetermined time. Processing and execution is possible,
During the confirmation display, the abnormality check process of the second storage area can be executed.
In the predetermined information display process, the information display means is displayed and controlled using the display pattern data corresponding to the predetermined information, and in the confirmation display process, the information display means is displayed using the display pattern data corresponding to the confirmation display. Control and
Of the predetermined information display process and the confirmation display process, the display pattern data is configured to be acquired from the data table only in the case of the predetermined information display process .
A gaming machine that features that.

According to the present invention, the control load related to the performance display device can be reduced.

It is a front view which shows the appearance of the gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the structure of the game board and the production button of the game machine. It is a block diagram which shows the control device of the game machine. It is a figure which provides the explanation of the game state transition of the game machine. It is explanatory drawing which provides the explanation of the screen display of the liquid crystal display device which concerns on the game machine. It is explanatory drawing which provides the explanation of the transition of the game state which concerns on the game machine. It is explanatory drawing which provides the explanation of the stop relation of the special symbols 1 and 2 in the simultaneous variation type which concerns on the game machine, and the front-back relation of the display effect of a special symbol. It is a flowchart which shows the first half part of the main processing on the main control side which concerns on the game machine. It is a flowchart which shows the latter half part of the main processing on the main control side which concerns on the game machine. It is a figure which shows the correspondence relationship between the input information of the setting key switch, the RAM clear switch and the door open switch, and the value of the W register, and the correspondence relationship between the input information and the transition process, which concerns on the game machine. It is a flowchart which shows the operation confirmation timer setting process in FIG. 8B. It is a flowchart which shows the initial setting process in FIG. 8A. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st power source abnormality check process (A) in FIG. 8A, and the 2nd power source abnormality check process (B) in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the setting change process in FIG. 8A. It is a flowchart which shows the setting confirmation process in FIG. 8B. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt process of the main control side which concerns on the game machine. It is a flowchart which shows the timer management process in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol management process 1 in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol management process 2 in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the start opening check process in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol variation start processing in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the game state information transmission processing in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the big hit determination process in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit determination process in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the variation pattern creation process in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the process during special symbol change in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the process during change | change of special symbol 1 in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the process during change | change of special symbol 2 in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the first half part of the special symbol confirmation time processing in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the latter half of the processing during the special symbol confirmation time in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the setting abnormality check process in FIG. 17 and FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the performance display monitor processing in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the test firing test signal terminal management process in FIG. 28. It is a flowchart which shows the out-of-area RAM clear check process in FIG. 28. It is a flowchart which shows the operation confirmation process in FIG. 28. It is a flowchart which shows the display data update process in FIG. 28. It is explanatory drawing which provides the explanation of the production in a normal state and a big hit game which concerns on the game machine. It is explanatory drawing which provides the explanation of the production during the big hit game which concerns on the game machine. It is explanatory drawing which provides the explanation of the production at the end of the big hit game and during the small hit game related to the game machine. It is explanatory drawing which provides the explanation of the production in the latent state and the jackpot game which concerns on the game machine. It is explanatory drawing which provides the explanation of the production at the end of a big hit game and in a normal state which concerns on the game machine. It is explanatory drawing which provides the explanation of the production during the big hit game which concerns on the game machine. It is explanatory drawing which provides the explanation of the production in a normal state which concerns on the game machine. It is a time chart of the outer end output signal related to the gaming machine. It is a figure which shows the variation pattern distribution table selection table which concerns on the game machine. It is a figure which shows the jackpot fluctuation pattern distribution table which concerns on the game machine. It is a figure which shows the loss variation pattern distribution table for special figure 1 which concerns on the game machine. It is a figure which shows the loss / small hit variation pattern distribution table for special figure 2 which concerns on the game machine. It is a figure which shows the identification display part LED data table (a), and the decimal value LED data table (b) which concerns on the game machine. It is explanatory drawing which provides the explanation of the display state of the performance indicator during various game periods concerning the game machine.

Hereinafter, preferred embodiments of the gaming machine according to the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. In the embodiment described below, a pachinko gaming machine will be described as an example of the gaming machine according to the present invention.

<1. Outline of configuration: Fig. 1 and Fig. 2>
An outline of the configuration of the pachinko gaming machine according to the embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 and 2. FIG. 1 is a front perspective view showing the appearance of the pachinko gaming machine according to the embodiment of the present invention, and FIG. 2 is a view showing the front side of the gaming board.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1 (hereinafter abbreviated as “gaming machine 1”) is a gaming board in which a frame-shaped front frame 2 is openably attached to the front surface of a wooden outer frame 4 and attached to the back surface of the front frame 2. A game board 3 (see FIG. 2) is mounted in a storage frame (not shown), and a game area 3a formed on the surface of the game board 3 faces the opening of the front frame 2. A glass door 6 supporting transparent glass is provided on the front side of the game area 3a. Further, on the back side of the game board 3, various control boards (see FIG. 3) for controlling the game operation are arranged.

A key cylinder (not shown) for unlocking the door is provided on the front side of the glass door 6, and if a key is inserted into this key cylinder and operated on one side, the locked state of the glass door 6 with respect to the front frame 2 can be obtained. By operating the other side, the locked state of the front frame 2 with respect to the outer frame 4 can be released and the front frame 2 can be opened to the front side.

Below the glass door 6, a front operation panel 7 that is pivotally supported by a hinge (not shown) on the front frame 2 is arranged. The front operation panel 7 is provided with an upper tray unit 8, and the upper tray unit 8 is formed with an upper tray 9 for storing the discharged game balls.

Further, the upper saucer unit 8 has a ball removal button 14 for pulling out the game balls stored in the upper saucer 9 below the game machine 1, and payout of the game balls to the game ball lending device (not shown). A ball lending button 11 for requesting and a card return button 12 for requesting the return of the valuable value medium inserted in the game ball lending device are provided.

Further, the upper tray unit 8 is provided with an effect button 13 (first operating means) and a direction key 75 (second operating means) configured to be operable by the player. The former effect button 13 can be operated (input can be accepted) by turning on the built-in lamp mainly during a predetermined input acceptance period (monitoring period of the effect button), and when the built-in lamp (button LED 13b) is lit (input). When a predetermined operation (pressing, repeated hitting, long pressing, etc.) is performed during the reception period), it is possible to bring about a change in a specific production. The latter direction key 75 has the shape of a cross key as shown in FIG. 2, and includes an up button 75a, a right button 75b, a down button 75c, and a left button 75d as up, down, left, and right direction instruction buttons. By operating these direction instruction buttons, it is possible to display the setting screen related to the game and change and set the volume setting, the light amount setting, the effect mode setting, and the like.

Further, on the right end side of the front operation panel 7, a launch operation handle 15 for operating the launch device 32 (see FIG. 3) is provided.

Further, speakers 46 that exert a sound effect (sound effect) by sound are provided on both sides of the upper part of the front frame 2 and on the upper side of the firing operation handle 15. Further, a plurality of decorative lamps 45 (full-color LED: LED for light effect) that exert a light effect by decorating the light are provided at appropriate positions of the glass door 6. A plurality of full-color LEDs (LEDs for light production) as the decorative lamp 45 are provided around the pachinko gaming machine, that is, around the periphery of the front frame of the glass door 6 in the circumferential direction. Is called.

(Game board: Fig. 2)
Next, the configuration of the game board 3 will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in the figure, a ball guide rail 5 for guiding the launched game ball is annularly mounted on the game board 3 as a board surface partition member, and a substantially circular region surrounded by the ball guide rail 5 is formed on the game board 3. The game area 3a and the four corners are non-game areas.

A liquid crystal display (LCD) 36 is provided in a substantially central portion of the game area 3a. Under the control of the effect control unit 24, which will be described later, the liquid crystal display device 36 independently has a plurality of numbers, characters, symbols, and the like in three (left, middle, and right) display areas (design variation display areas). Various types of decorative symbols (for example, left symbol (corresponding to left display area), middle symbol (corresponding to middle display area), right symbol (corresponding to right display area)) including variable display operation (variable display and stop display). Display the effect as an image.

Further, in the game area 3a, a center decoration 48 (flow path distribution means) is provided so as to surround the display surface of the liquid crystal display device 36 in a long-winding manner. The center decoration 48 protects the display surface of the liquid crystal display device 36 from the surrounding game balls, and is provided along the front side of the game board 3 and is fixed to the game board 3 with the front mounting plate 48a and the center decoration 48. It is integrally provided with an armor frame portion 48b that forms the outer periphery of the liquid crystal display device 36 and surrounds the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 36. A floating area through which the game ball can pass is formed between the upper surface of the center decoration 48 and the ball guide rail 5, and the game ball is guided to the right side of the center decoration 48 as well. The game ball driven into the upper side of the game area 3a by the launching device 32 is distributed to the left and right on the upper side of the armor frame portion 48b according to the launch strength or stroke length of the game ball, and is on the left side of the center decoration body 48. It flows down either the left flow path 3b or the right right flow path 3c.

In addition, the non-game area near the upper right edge (upper right corner) of the game board 3 is a various function display unit, and the 7-segment display (with dots) is used as the middle start port 34 and the right start port 33 (first special symbol). (For), special symbol display device 38a (first special symbol display means) and special symbol display device 38b (second special symbol display means) configured side by side corresponding to the lower right start port 35 (for the second special symbol). Special symbol display means) is provided. In the special symbol display devices 38a and 38b, a special symbol variation display game is executed by the variation display operation of the "special symbol". Then, in the above-mentioned liquid crystal display device 36, the decorative symbol by the image is variablely displayed in synchronization with the variable display of the special symbol by the special symbol display devices 38a and 38b, and together with various notice effects (effect images). , Decorative symbol variation display games are being executed (details of these symbol variation display games will be described later).

Further, in the various function display units, a composite display device (LED display for holding composite display) 38c composed of a 7-segment display (with dots) is arranged next to the special symbol display devices 38a and 38b. There are five types called compound: special symbols 1 and 2, display of the number of balls on hold for normal symbols, and status notification during the operation of the variable time shortening function (during time reduction) and during the high probability state (during high probability). This is because it is a hold / time saving / high-accuracy composite display device (hereinafter, simply referred to as “composite display device”) having a display function.

Further, the various function display units are provided with a normal symbol display device 39a (normal symbol display means) in which a plurality of (two in this embodiment) LEDs are arranged next to the composite display device 38c. In this ordinary symbol display device 39a, the ordinary symbol variation display game is executed by the variation display operation of the ordinary symbol represented by the two LEDs. For example, as a variable display operation, the normal symbol on the LED repeatedly turns on and off in a seesaw manner, and stops with either side lit, so that the success or failure of the normal symbol fluctuation display game can be determined. There is. Further, a right-handed display device 39b using one LED is provided adjacent to the normal symbol display device 39a. The right-handed display device 39b is advantageous for "right-handed" in which the game ball is aimed to pass through the right-hand flow path 3c by the combination of the LED lighting and extinguishing states, or the game ball is left-hand flow path 3b. Notify whether "left-handed" aiming to pass through is advantageous. If the LED is lit, it is notified that it is advantageous to hit right.

A middle start port 34 (first special symbol start port: first start means) is provided below the center decoration 48, and a detection sensor 34a (middle start port) for detecting the passage of a game ball is provided inside the middle start port 34 (first special symbol start port: first start means). Sensor 34a: see FIG. 3) is formed. Below the middle starting port 34, a plurality of general winning openings 43 are arranged in the lower left part of the game board surface (in the case of this embodiment, three on the left side), and inside each of them, a game ball. A general winning opening sensor 43a (see FIG. 3) for detecting the passage of the winning opening sensor 43a is formed.

The middle start port 34, which is the first special symbol start port, is referred to as the first special symbol (hereinafter referred to as “special symbol 1”) in the special symbol display device 38a (first special symbol display device), and in some cases, “special symbol 1”. It is a winning opening for the special symbol 1 related to the starting condition of the variable display operation (abbreviated as FIG. 1), and is a "fixed winning rate type" having no starting opening opening / closing means (means for opening or expanding the starting opening). It is configured as a "winning device". In the case of the present embodiment, a left flow path to the middle start port 34 due to the action of a game ball falling direction changing member (for example, a game nail (not shown), a windmill 44, a center decoration 48, etc.) in the game area 3a. The game ball that has flowed down 3b has a structure that makes it easy to enter (win), whereas the game ball that has flowed down the right flow path 3c has a structure that makes it difficult or impossible to enter. Further, in the case of the present embodiment, similarly to the middle starting port 34, a right starting port 33 for the special symbol 1 described later is provided as a winning opening related to the starting condition of the variable display operation of the special symbol 1.

Further, on the upper side of the middle portion of the right flow path 3c, a combination gate 57 (specific passage area) composed of a passage gate through which the game ball can pass is provided. The fluxgate gate 57 is a passing area for executing a round game when a big hit is made, and a fluxgate sensor 57a (see FIG. 3) for detecting a passing game ball is formed inside the passing region. ..

Similar to the combination gate 57, a normal symbol start port 37 (third starting means) composed of a passing gate is provided below the combination gate 57. The normal symbol start port 37 is a winning opening related to the fluctuation display operation of the normal symbol in the normal symbol display device 39a, and inside the normal symbol start port sensor 37a (see FIG. 3), which detects a passing game ball. Is formed.

Below the normal symbol start port 37, there is a special variable winning device 42 for big hits (first special electric accessory: first big winning means), a normal variable winning device 41 that functions as a so-called electric tulip, and a small hit. The lower special variable winning device 52 (second special electric accessory: second large winning means) and the lower right starting port 35 for the special symbol 2 described later are sequentially positioned downward in this order. It is provided. These five players are arranged in a substantially staggered pattern as a whole, and the normal symbol start port 37 is located on the right side of the game board, followed by the normal variable winning device 41, the upper special variable winning device 42, and the lower right starting port 35. The lower special variation winning device 52 is displaced inward in this order.

The ordinary variable winning device 41 is configured as a winning rate variable winning device in which the winning rate of the game ball at the starting port can be changed by the starting port opening / closing means. In the case of the present embodiment, it exists as a right starting port 33 (first special symbol starting port: second starting means) having a horizontally long opening for two or more game balls and a lid covering the right starting port 33. It is equipped with a movable piece 47 that can be retracted from the game board surface, and when the movable piece 47 is in the forward state protruding from the game board surface, the right starting port 33 is closed (closed state) and is in the backward state on the game board surface. At that time, the right starting port 33 is opened (open state). When the normal variable winning device 41 is in the non-operating state (normal state), the movable piece 47 is in the protruding state and the right starting port 33 is closed (difficult to win or cannot win), but the normal variable winning device When the 41 is in the operating state, the movable piece 47 is retracted, leaves the right starting port 33, and opens the right starting port 33 (easy winning state). As a result, a horizontally long opening of the right starting port 33 appears, and the shape changes so that many game balls are picked up. Inside the right starting port 33, a detection sensor 33a (right starting port sensor 33a: see FIG. 3) for detecting the passage of the game ball is provided, and the picked up game ball is detected by the detection sensor 33a (see FIG. 3).

The right starting port 33 provided in the normal variable winning device 41 is a prize related to the starting condition of the variable display operation of the special symbol 1 in the special symbol display device 38a (first special symbol display device), like the middle starting port 34. It is a mouth, and in the present embodiment, when the movable piece 47 is inactive, it holds a closed state (a winning state in which the right starting port 33 cannot be won).

The operation of the above-mentioned ordinary variable winning device 41 has the same function as the so-called "electric tulip type winning device (abbreviated as electric chew)" in which a pair of left and right movable wing pieces (movable members) are provided on the starting port. .. Therefore, in the present specification, the ordinary variable winning device 41 is also abbreviated as "electric chew" in some cases. The configuration of the ordinary variable winning device 41 is not limited to that of the present embodiment. For example, a winning rate fixed type winning device such as the middle starting port 34 (first starting port), and a winning rate variable winning device (second starting port) in which the winning area is expanded or opened by the starting port opening / closing means. May be configured as a general electric tulip-type winning device provided above and below. In this case, even if the first right starting port is configured as the special drawing 2 (or special drawing 1) and the second right starting opening is configured as the winning opening related to the starting conditions of the variable display operation of the special drawing 1 (or special drawing 2). Alternatively, both of them may be configured as winning openings related to the starting conditions of the variable display operation of the special figure 2 (or the special figure 1). Further, a movable piece having a width equivalent to one game ball may be recessed from the game board so that the movable piece picks up the game ball and guides it to the guide gutter on the back surface of the game board.

Further, the lower right starting port 35 on the downstream side of the ordinary variable winning device 41 is referred to as a second special symbol (hereinafter referred to as "special symbol 2") in the special symbol display device 38b (second special symbol display device), and may be referred to as "special symbol 2". It is a winning opening for the special symbol 2 related to the starting condition of the variable display operation (abbreviated as "special figure 2"), and in this embodiment, it is not an electric chew but the same "winning rate fixed type winning opening" as the middle starting opening 34. It is configured as a "device".

In the right flow path 3c, an upper special variable winning device 42 for a big hit is provided in the middle of the flowing path from the normal symbol start port 37 to the normal variable winning device 41 (electric chew). Further, the special variable winning device 42 includes an upper large winning opening 40 and a recessed open door 42b that covers the upper special winning opening 40, and the upper large winning opening 40 can be opened and closed by the opening door 42b being recessed into the game board surface. In addition, an upper prize opening sensor 42a (see FIG. 3) for detecting a game ball that has entered is formed inside the large winning opening 40. The upper surface of the open door 42b of the upper special variable winning device 42 for big hits is inclined downward to the right, and the game ball on the open door 42b is guided down to the normal variable winning device 41 (electric chew) side. It has become like.

Above the special variable winning device 42, a horizontally long flow path correction plate 37d inclined downward to the left is provided so as to cross the region of the right flow path 3c with the normal symbol start port 37. There is. The flow path correction plate 37d receives the game ball flowing down the right flow path 3c and moves the game ball toward the upper special variation winning device 42 (left direction in FIG. 2). The lower left end of the flow path correction plate 37d is above the upper special variation winning device 42. Therefore, all the game balls are picked up by the flow path correction plate 37d and guided to the upper special variable winning device 42.

Further, below the upper special variable winning device 42, a horizontally long flow guide plate 40d inclined downward to the left is provided between the normal variable winning device 41 and the normal variable winning device 41. The upper right end of the flow guide plate 40d is located near the lower end of the open door 42b of the upper special variation winning device 42, and the direction of the game ball is changed by the guide nail directly below the open door 42b. , It works to pick up a part of it and let it flow down onto the lower special variable winning device 52.

The lower special variable winning device 52 for small hits is configured so that the lower large winning opening 50 can be opened or expanded by the lower large winning opening 50 and the recessed open door 52b that covers the lower large winning opening 50. Inside, a lower grand prize opening sensor 52a (see FIG. 3) for detecting a game ball that has entered the lower grand winning opening 50 is formed.

The process of entering the upper prize opening 40 at the time of a big hit is as follows. The game ball that has passed through the floating region between the upper surface of the center decoration 48 and the ball guide rail 5 flows down the right flow path 3c. All the game balls are picked up by the flow path correction plate 37d and guided on the upper special variable winning device 42. In the case of a big hit, the upper prize opening 40 is open. Therefore, in the case of a big hit, almost all of the game balls win the upper prize opening 40 from the flow path correction plate 37d.

In addition, the process of entering the lower large winning opening 50 at the time of a small hit is as follows. The game ball flows down the right flow path 3c. The game ball is guided in the direction of the upper special variation winning device 42 by the flow path correction plate 51d. The game ball rolls on the open door 42b that closes the upper prize opening 40 and flows down from the lower right corner. Most of the game balls are guided in the direction of the normal variable winning device 41 by a predetermined arrangement of game nails (not shown), and a part of the game balls is guided to the lower large winning opening 50 side on the flow guide plate 40d. The opening time of the right starting port 33 by the movable piece 47 of the normal variable winning device 41 is 3.7 seconds (1.2 seconds opening 3 times + 0.5 seconds opening 2 times) in the probabilistic state and the time saving state. In the normal state and the latent state, it is as short as 0.1 seconds. Therefore, many game balls are guided to the lower prize winning opening 50 side without being picked up during the opening period of the right starting opening 33.

In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, when there is a prize in a winning opening other than the normal symbol start opening 37 among various winning openings provided in the game area 3a, each winning opening is promised. The number of prize balls per winning ball (for example, 4 for the middle starting port 34, 1 for the right starting port 33, 2 for the lower right starting port 35, and 40 for the upper big winning opening 40 (big winning opening for big hit) 15 pieces, 10 pieces for the lower big prize opening 50 (large prize opening for small hits), 6 pieces for the general winning opening 43, 0 pieces for the normal symbol start opening 37 (no prize ball)) is the game ball payout device 19 (Fig. 3) is to be paid out. The game balls that do not win in each of the above winning openings are discharged from the gaming area 3a through the out opening 49. Here, the "winning" is not a structure in which the winning opening takes in the game ball inside, or the winning opening takes in the game ball inside, but a winning opening consisting of a passing gate (for example, a normal symbol start opening 37). ), It means that the game ball passes through the gate, and when the game ball is actually detected by each winning detection switch formed for each winning opening, "winning" is made in the winning opening. Is treated as if it occurred. The game ball related to this winning is also referred to as a "winning ball". If a game ball enters the winning opening, the game ball will be detected by the winning detection switch. Therefore, unless otherwise specified in the present specification, has the game ball been detected by the winning detection switch? Regardless of whether or not, it may be referred to as "winning" including the case where a game ball enters the winning opening.

Further, in the area of the game board, a plurality of movable body accessories are arranged at positions that do not interfere with the flow of the game ball. In this example, the first movable body accessory (clock-shaped accessory) 80 is arranged on the upper right side of the center decoration 48, that is, at a position that does not interfere with the flow of the game ball passing through the right flow path 3c, and diagonally below the right. A second movable accessory (flower-shaped accessory) 90 is arranged on the side. In these, the movable body accessory functions as an effect means, and depending on the operation mode, the movable body effect such as suggesting the degree of expectation of winning the hit is realized.

<2. Control device: Fig. 3>
Next, with reference to FIG. 3, the control device that controls the game operation control of the game machine 1 according to the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 3 is a control block diagram showing an outline of the control device.

The control device of the gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment is referred to as a main control board (main control means) 20 (hereinafter referred to as "main control unit 20") that collectively controls control related to overall gaming operation (game operation control). , The effect control board (effect control means) 24 (hereinafter referred to as "effect control unit 24") that receives the effect control command from the main control unit 20 and controls the execution control (appearance control) of the effect by the effect means. A payout control board (payout control means) 29 that controls the payout of prize balls, and an external power source (not shown) generate and supply necessary power sources (including a backup power source) to each board of the gaming machine. It is mainly composed of a power supply board (power supply control means (not shown)). A liquid crystal display device 36 as an image display device is connected to the effect control unit 24. The power supply route is omitted in FIG.

(2-1. Main control unit 20)
The main control unit 20 is equipped with a microprocessor incorporating a CPU 201 (main control CPU), and is a ROM 202 (main control) that stores various data necessary for game operation control in addition to a control program that describes a game operation control procedure. It is equipped with a ROM) and a RAM 203 (main control RAM) that functions as a work area and a buffer memory, and constitutes a microcomputer (Z80 system equivalent) as a whole.

Although not shown, the main control unit 20 applies interrupt signals to the CTC and CPU, which provide the Z80 system with a periodic interrupt, a pulse output creation function (bit rate generator) with a constant cycle, and a time measurement function. Interrupt controller circuit that exerts interrupt enable / interrupt prohibition function such as timer interrupt, reset circuit that can reset the CPU by detecting system reset signal when power is turned on or shut off, power supply abnormality, etc., control program Watchdog timer (WDT) circuit that monitors the operation abnormality of, out-of-designated area travel prohibition (IAT) circuit that monitors whether the program is executed correctly within the preset address range, and a certain range of hardware It also has a counter circuit for generating random numbers. At least the main control unit (payout control board) 20 and the payout control board 29 start executing necessary backup processing prior to power cutoff by receiving a voltage drop signal received from the power supply board, and before power cutoff. The game operation can be resumed after the power is turned on (backup function). In this gaming machine 1, the stored contents of each RAM can be retained for at least several days.

The counter circuit includes a random number generation circuit that generates a random number and a sampling circuit that samples a random number value at a predetermined timing from the random number generation circuit, and acts as a 16-bit counter as a whole. By sending an instruction to the sampling circuit according to the processing state, the CPU 201 acquires the numerical value indicated by the random number generation circuit as an internal lottery random number value (big hit determination random number (random number size: 65536)). , The random number value is used for the big hit lottery. It should be noted that the random number for the internal lottery is obtained by adding the soft random number value generated by appropriate software processing and the hard random number value in order to prevent the hitting and the like.

The main control unit 20 receives a middle start port sensor 34a for detecting a prize in the middle start port 34, a right start port sensor 33a for detecting a prize in the right start port 33, and a prize in the lower right start port 35. The lower right start port sensor 35a to detect, the normal symbol start port sensor 37a to detect the passage of the game ball to the normal symbol start port 37, and the upper grand prize opening sensor 42a to detect the winning to the upper grand prize opening 40, It is discharged from the gaming machine through the lower grand prize opening sensor 52a that detects the winning of the lower grand winning opening 50, the general winning opening sensor 43a that detects the winning of the general winning opening 43, the out opening 49, and each winning opening. An OUT monitoring switch 49a for detecting a game ball (so-called out ball) is connected, and the main control unit 20 can receive detection signals from these. Based on the detection signals from each sensor, the main control unit 20 grasps which winning opening the game ball has won (winning).

Further, the main control unit 20 includes a combination gate sensor 57a for detecting the passage of a game ball through the combination gate 52, a RAM clear switch 98 for initializing a predetermined area of the RAM 203, and a pachinko game (not shown). Fraud detection sensors (vibration sensor, radio wave sensor, magnetic sensor, etc.) for detecting fraudulent activity against the machine 1 are connected, and the main control unit 20 can receive detection signals from these. The fraud detection sensor is installed in an appropriate position to detect fraudulent activity.

Further, the main control unit 20 includes a normal electric accessory solenoid 41c for controlling the opening and closing of the movable piece 47 of the right starting port 33, and an upper winning opening solenoid 41c for opening and closing the opening door 42b of the upper winning opening 40. The 42c and the lower prize opening solenoid 52c for controlling the opening and closing of the open door 52b of the lower prize opening 50 are connected, and the main control unit 20 can transmit a control signal for controlling these.

Further, the special symbol display device 38a and the special symbol display device 38b are connected to the main control unit 20, and the main control unit 20 can transmit a control signal for displaying and controlling the special symbols 1 and 2. .. Further, a normal symbol display device 39a is connected to the main control unit 20, and a control signal for displaying and controlling the normal symbol can be transmitted.

Further, a composite display device 38c and a round number display device (not shown) are connected to the main control unit 20, and the main control unit 20 can transmit control signals for displaying and controlling various information displayed on the main control unit 20. It has become. Further, a right-handed display device 39b is connected to the main control unit 20, and whether it is advantageous for the main control unit 20 to “right-handed” to aim the game ball so as to pass through the right flow path 3c. It is possible to transmit a control signal for notifying whether "left-handed" aiming to pass through the left-hand flow path 3b is advantageous.

Further, a frame external terminal board 21 is connected to the main control unit 20, and the main control unit 20 receives predetermined game information (for example, hit game start information, winning information to the start port) from the frame external terminal board 21. Signals (outer end signals) including (special symbol fluctuation start information), prize ball number information, specific error information (vibration sensor error, radio wave sensor error, magnetic sensor error, etc.) can be output to the outside of the gaming machine. It has become. The external terminal board 21 for the frame is configured to be connectable to a data counter DT provided outside the gaming machine or the hall computer HC, and the signal (outer end signal) output from the external terminal board 21 for the frame is It is sent to this data counter DT or hall computer HC.

The frame external terminal board 21 is provided with a plurality of channels for external output. The connector corresponding to each channel and the connector on the data counter DT side are connected by a cable. Then, one signal is output from each connector (information terminal) to the outside. The outer end signals output to the outside of the gaming machine through the information terminal of the external terminal board 21 for the frame include, for example, the following signals (1) to (10).

(1) "Special symbol confirmation signal (information terminal 1)" output when the variable display of the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2 is stopped,
(2) "Signal intelligence (information terminal 2)", which is output during a big hit game when the special symbol time saving function described later is in operation.
(3) "Variation shortening signal (information terminal 3)" output when the special symbol time saving function is operating,
(4) "Starting port signal (information terminal 4)" output when the starting port sensors 33a, 34a, 35a detect the passage of the game ball,
(5) "Big hit signal (information terminal 5)" output during operation of the accessory continuous operation device described later,
(6) "Special symbol 1 confirmation signal (information terminal 6)" output when the variable display of special symbol 1 is stopped,
(7) “Special symbol 1 start port signal (information terminal 7)” output when the right start port sensor 33a or the middle start port sensor 34a detects a game ball,
(8) "Special symbol 2 start port signal (information terminal 8)" output when the lower right start port sensor 35a detects a game ball,
(9) When there is a prize in the winning opening, the number of prize balls is added, and every time the total value becomes 10 or more, 10 is subtracted from the total value and output as "main prize ball signal (information terminal 9)". ) ”,
(10) When the RAM is cleared (output for 30,000 ms after the RAM is cleared), when the setting change process described later is executed (see FIG. 11), when an illegal magnetic detection is performed by the magnetic sensor (output for 30,000 ms after the magnetic detection is released), the radio wave sensor is used. A "security signal (information terminal 10) that is output when an illegal radio wave is detected (output for 30,000 ms after being released from the radio wave detection), when an illegal prize is detected for the normal start winning opening sensor 37a (output for 30,000 ms after being released from 200 ms continuous ON detection), etc. ) ”And other signals can be output.

The main control unit 20 outputs the corresponding outer end signals from the information terminals 1 to 10 for a predetermined time (for example, for 100 ms) at the timing when the output trigger of each signal arrives, but is predetermined so that the output signals are not continuous. Output after a time (for example, 100 ms).

The hall computer HC monitors and collects game information of the game machine based on the outer end signal output from the external terminal board 21 for the frame, and comprehensively manages the operating status of the game machine installed in the pachinko hall. To do.

Here, the data counter DT related to the present invention will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 31A (3). The data counter DT is a game information notification device that notifies specific game information about the connected game machine, and is usually installed above the game machine. The data counter DT includes a notification means for notifying predetermined game information based on an outer end signal from the frame external terminal board 21. The notification means is, for example, a light emitting unit DTa having a built-in full-color LED, a display unit DTb, DTc, DTd, DTte, etc., which are composed of a display device such as a liquid crystal display device.

The illustrated data counter DT has the following notification functions.
(A) "Big hit notification function (light emitting unit DTa)" that notifies the fact when a big hit occurs,
(B) "Big hit cumulative number notification function (big hit count display unit DTd)" that notifies the total number of big hits (the number of big hits since the store opened),
(C) "Acquired ball number notification function (not shown)" that notifies the number of acquired balls during a big hit,
(D) Symbol variation display from the time the store opens or after the end of the jackpot (which may be a specific jackpot) "Start count notification function (start count display unit DTb)" that notifies the number of game executions (number of special symbol fluctuations) ,
(E) "Start cumulative number of times notification function (total number of rotations display unit DTc)" that notifies the total number of fluctuations of the special symbol from the time of opening,
(F) "History information notification function (not shown)" that notifies history information such as the number of big hits (may be a specific number of big hits) such as the day before and the day before the previous day and the number of big hits.
(G) "Number of consecutive villas notification function (number of consecutive villas display unit DTe)" that notifies the number of consecutive villas caused by this big hit (in this embodiment, the number of consecutive villas not including the first hit).
Further, the code DTg is a call button for calling a hall clerk. When the call button DTg is pressed, the light emitting unit DTa emits light in a light emitting mode dedicated to the call. Further, the reference numeral DTh is a push button for switching the history information for displaying the history information.

The above-mentioned data counter DT is currently installed for each pachinko machine in most pachinko halls. When such a data counter DT receives any of the above-mentioned "big hit signal" and "variable short-time big hit medium signal" output during the big hit, for example, it notifies that a big hit has occurred or a big hit. Update the number of times, etc. As a result, not only the player is notified of the occurrence of the big hit, but also the surrounding players and the hall clerk are notified that the game table is undergoing the big hit, so that the occurrence of the big hit can be easily identified. ..

The data counter DT generally displays necessary information on various display units according to the type of the outer end signal, based on the switching from non-reception to reception (ON edge) of the outer end signal.

In addition, the main control unit 20 corresponds to the type test (test related to the type verification of the gaming machine based on the rules regarding the certification of the gaming machine and the type verification, etc.) conducted by the Security Electronics and Communication Technology Association (Hotsukyo). Therefore, a type test signal that specifies the game operation in real time can be output from the external terminal board 21 for the frame. When installing a gaming machine that conforms to the type test in a pachinko hall, no change in the conforming control program is permitted. Therefore, the type test signal is repeatedly output processed even after being installed in the pachinko hall (see the test firing test signal terminal management process during the performance display monitor process described later (step S823 in FIG. 28, and FIG. 29 showing the details thereof). ).

Further, a payout control board (payout control unit) 29 is connected to the main control unit 20, and when it is necessary to pay out prize balls, a control command (number of prize balls) related to payout is given to the payout control board 29. The specified payout control command) can be sent.

The payout control board 29 is connected to a launch control board (launch control unit) 28 that controls the launch device 32 and a game ball payout device (game ball payout means) 19 that pays out game balls. The main roles of the payout control board 29 are reception of payout control commands from the main control unit 20, prize ball payout control of the game ball payout device 19 based on the payout control command, transmission of a status signal to the main control unit 20, and the like. Is.

The game ball payout device 19 is provided with a supply shortage detection sensor 19a for detecting a supply shortage of game balls and a ball counting sensor 19b for detecting a game ball (prize ball) to be paid out. It is possible to receive each detection signal of. Further, the game ball payout device 19 is provided with a payout motor 19c for driving a ball payout mechanism unit (not shown) for paying out the game ball, and the payout control board 29 controls the payout motor 19c. It is possible to transmit the control signal of.

Further, the payout control board 29 has a full detection sensor 60 (in the present embodiment, a detection sensor that detects the storage state of the game balls stored in the upper tray 9) for detecting the full state of the upper tray 9 with the game balls. A door opening sensor 61 (in this embodiment, a detection sensor that detects the open state of the front frame 2 and / or the front operation panel 7) is connected.

The payout control board 29 can transmit various status signals to the main control unit 20 based on the detection signals from the fullness detection sensor 60, the door opening sensor 61, the supply shortage detection sensor 19a, and the ball counting sensor 19b. It has become. This status signal includes a ball jam signal indicating a full state, a door opening signal indicating that the front frame 2 and the front operation panel 7 are open, and a supply shortage indicating a supply shortage of game balls from the game ball payout device 19. It includes a signal, a counting error signal indicating that the payout of the prize ball is insufficient or an abnormality has occurred in the ball counting sensor 19b, a payout completion signal indicating that the payout operation has been completed, and the like, and various status signals can be transmitted. ing. Based on these status signals, the main control unit 20 determines whether the front frame 2 / front operation panel 7 is in the open state (door opening error) and whether the game ball payout device 19 is paying out normally (supply shortage error). , Monitor the full state of the upper saucer 9 (ball clogging error) and the like.

Further, a launch control board 28 is connected to the payout control board 29, and a launch permission signal ES (launch control signal) for permitting launch to the launch control board 28 can be transmitted. The launch control board 28 controls the energization of the launch solenoid (not shown) provided in the launch device 32 based on the output of the launch permission signal ES from the payout control board 29, and the launch operation handle 15 The game ball is launched by the operation of. Specifically, it is detected that the launch permission signal ES is output from the payout control board 29 and that the player is touching the handle by the touch sensor (not shown) provided on the launch operation handle 15. The firing operation of the game ball is permitted on condition that the firing operation stop switch (not shown) provided on the firing operation handle 15 is not operated. Therefore, when the launch permission signal ES is not output, the launch operation is not executed even if the launch operation handle 15 is operated, and the game ball is not launched. Further, the launch strength of the game ball can be changed according to the operation amount of the launch operation handle 15. When the payout control board 29 detects the ball clogging error, the ball clogging signal is transmitted to the main control unit 20 and the output of the firing permission signal ES to the firing control board 28 is stopped, so that the full state of the upper tray 9 is resolved. It is designed to stop the launching operation until it is done.

A setting key switch 94, a setting change switch 95, and a setting change completion switch 96 are connected to the main control unit 20, and the main control unit 20 can receive detection signals from these. A setting display 97 is connected to the main control unit 20, and the main control unit 20 can transmit a control signal for displaying and controlling the display.

The setting key switch 94 can be turned on / off by inserting a setting key possessed by a person concerned with the hall when the power is turned on, so that the setting value can be changed. It is a key switch for switching to. Further, the setting change switch 95 is a push button type switch for changing the set value. Further, the setting change completion switch 96 is a setting confirmation switch used when confirming the changed setting value. These switches are provided in appropriate places inside the gaming machine.

Further, the setting display 97 displays information related to the set value, and functions as a setting display means. In the case of this embodiment, it is composed of one 7-segment display and is mounted on the main control unit (main control board) 20. The setting display 97 is not limited to the main control board, but is a payout control board 28, a launch control board 29, and a relay board (relay board that relays the connection between various display devices, switches, etc., and the control board: shown in the figure. It can be provided at an appropriate place inside the game machine, such as an effect control unit (effect control board (including a liquid crystal control board)) 24.

The above-mentioned "set value" gradually changes the ball output rate (so-called machine discount (PAYOUT rate)), and in the present embodiment, six levels of setting values 1 to 6 are provided. ing. This "set value" defines at least the lottery probability (winning probability) of a big hit (a hit type in which the condition device described later is activated) for each stage (for example, 6 stages of settings 1 to 6). The higher the set value, the higher the winning probability is set, which is advantageous to the player. For example, setting 1 is 1/410, setting value 2 is 1/390, setting 3 is 1/370, setting 4 is 1/350, setting 5 is 1/330, setting 6 is 1/320, and so on. That is, the higher the set value, the higher the machine ratio, which is advantageous to the player. As described above, the set value is a value that defines the machine discount and the like, and means a value for a grade related to the likelihood of a specific event (for example, a big hit) occurring.

By the way, the "set value" is determined exclusively by the hall clerk operating the setting change switch 95 based on the sales strategy of the pachinko hall (game store). When a plurality of types of jackpots are provided, the winning probabilities of all or part of the jackpot types that trigger the operation of the conditional device can be changed according to the set value. For example, when there are four types of jackpots 1 to 4, the higher the set value, the higher the probability of winning all of the jackpots 1 to 4, or the specific jackpots 1 to 3 Only the winning probability of the jackpot 4 may be increased, and the winning probability common to all the set values may be set for the jackpot 4 (the total winning probability of the jackpots 1 to 4 may be increased). Further, the winning probability of the small hit type that does not trigger the operation of the conditional device may be changed according to the set value, as in the case of the large hit described above.

(About the operation to change the set value)
When the setting change switch 95 is turned on while the setting change operation is possible, the current display value of the setting display 97 is "1 → 2 → 3 → 4 → 5 → 6 → 1 → 2 → 3 → ... It can be switched to circulate in the range of 1 to 6 as in "." Then, when the desired set value is reached, when the setting change completion switch 96 is turned on, the current display value is fixed as the set value. This set value information is stored (stored) in a predetermined area (set value storage area) of the RAM 203. Then, when the setting key switch 94 is operated from the current ON state to the OFF state, the setting change operation enable state ends. Therefore, the main control unit 20 serves as a setting value selection means for selecting one of a plurality of types of setting values based on the operation of the predetermined operation means (setting key switch 94, setting change switch 95). Function.

Further, a performance display 99 is connected to the main control unit 20, and the main control unit 20 can transmit a control signal for displaying and controlling the display.

(About the game result information displayed on the performance display 99)
The performance display 99 functions as an information display means for displaying (notifying) information related to the game result (hereinafter referred to as "performance information") for a predetermined period (specific game period), and a plurality of 7-segment displays (7). It consists of a segment LED). In the performance display 99 of the present embodiment, four 7-segment LEDs in which a display unit and a circuit unit are unitized are arranged side by side, and these are mounted on the main control board 20, for example, to display a four-digit number. Configure possible indicators. The details will be described later, but the above "performance information" is information that pachinko hall stores and related agencies want to confirm, and whether or not there is an illegal prize ball such as an excess prize ball for the game machine and the original ball output of the game machine. A typical example is information on performance (predetermined information on game performance). Therefore, the performance information itself is information that is not directly related to the progress of the game when the player plays the game, unlike the advance notice effect. Therefore, the performance display 99 is not installed in a place that is visible to the player, but is installed in a place that is easily visible inside the gaming machine. Specifically, the main control unit (so that the display unit of the performance display 99 composed of four 7-segment LEDs is not obscured by a sticker, a structure, etc., in a place that is easy to see from the back surface of the gaming machine. Main control board) 20, payout control board 28, launch control board 29, relay board, effect control unit (effect control board (including liquid crystal control board)) 24, or a board case that protects the control board. It is mounted on the top. Further, the four 7-segment LEDs are arranged side by side and can display a 4-digit number, and each 7-segment LED has a decimal point DP under the 7-segment number.

Here, specifically, the following information can be adopted as the above-mentioned performance information.
(1) The total number of payouts paid out by winning in the specific state (total number of prize balls in the specific state: α) is divided by the total number of out balls in the specific state (number of outs in the specific state: β). Information based on the value (α / β) (specific ratio information) can be adopted as performance information. Such specific ratio information is useful as an index for evaluating the ball ejection performance of the gaming machine.
(1-1) The above "total number of payouts" means when a prize is won in the winning openings (middle starting opening 34, right starting opening 33, lower right starting opening 35, general winning opening 43, large winning opening 40, 50). This is the total value of the game balls (prize balls) paid out. In the case of this embodiment, there are four middle starting ports 34, one right starting opening 33, two lower right starting openings 35, 15 upper winning openings 40, and 10 lower winning openings 50, general. There are 6 winning openings 43. The total number of out balls is the number of game balls driven into the game area 3a from the launching device 32 (the number of game balls detected by the OUT monitoring switch 49a).
(1-2) Further, which state is adopted as the "specific state" can be appropriately determined according to the performance information to be acquired. In the present embodiment, any of the normal state, the latent probability state, the time saving state, the probability variation state, the big hit game, the small hit game, and the like can be adopted (details of each game state will be described later). To do). Further, not only one state may be measured, but a plurality of types of states may be measured. For example, a plurality of types of states such as a normal state and a latent state, a normal state and a small hit game, and all game states except during a hit game can be appropriately selected as measurement targets.
(1-3) Further, as the period in the specific state, the period focusing on the jackpot lottery probability may be the measurement target instead of focusing on each game state such as the normal state or the winning game. For example, a period in which the jackpot lottery probability is in a low probability state and / or in a high probability state may be measured. The big hit game (during the big hit game) is controlled to a low probability state, and the game state at the time of winning continues during the small hit game (small hit game), so that the big hit lottery probability state at the time of winning is changed. Will be continued. Therefore, when it is desired to measure the period of the pure low probability state, the period other than during the big hit game may be the measurement target. Further, when it is desired to measure the period of the low probability state or the high probability state excluding the hit game of both the big hit and the small hit, the period excluding the hit game may be the measurement target. The details of the big hit type, the small hit type, the operation mode of these hit games, and the like will be described later.
(1-4) Further, as the "total number of payouts", the number of payouts excluding one or more specific winning openings from the measurement target may be used as the total number of payouts (total number of payouts excluded from specific winning openings). For example, among the winning openings, those excluding the large winning openings 40 and 50 from the measurement target (in this case, the total number of payouts is the one excluding the hits from the measurement target) as the total number of payouts. May be good.

(2) In addition, only any one of the total number of payouts, the total number of payouts excluding specific winning openings, and the total number of out balls may be measured, and the measurement result may be used as performance information.

In the present embodiment, the total number of payouts in the normal state (number of payouts in the normal state) and the total number of out balls in the normal state (number of outs in the normal state) are measured in real time, and the number of payouts in the normal state is the number of outs in the normal state. The value divided by is multiplied by 100 (the value calculated by the number of payouts at normal times ÷ the number of outs at normal times x 100) is displayed as performance information (hereinafter referred to as the "base value") (the displayed value is the decimal point). The value rounded to the first decimal place is displayed). Therefore, each data of the normal payout number, the normal out number, and the base value is stored (stored) in the corresponding area of the RAM 203 (normal payout number storage area, normal out number storage area, specific ratio information storage area), respectively. It is supposed to be done. However, instead of simply measuring permanently and displaying the performance information, when the total number of out balls reaches a predetermined specified number (for example, 60,000), the measurement is temporarily terminated and the measurement is terminated. The base value is stored as history information in a predetermined area (performance display storage area) of the RAM 203 (the current base value is stored). In the case of the present embodiment, the "specified number" that triggers the end of the above measurement is not the number of outs in the normal state, but the total number of out balls during all game states (including during the winning game) (hereinafter, "total number of outs"). ") Is adopted. The total number of out-states is also measured in real time and stored in the corresponding area (storage area for all-state outs) of the RAM 203. Hereinafter, unless otherwise specified, the above-mentioned (normal time payout number storage area, normal time out number storage area, specific ratio information storage area, and all state out number storage area are collectively referred to as "measurement information storage area".

Then, after storing the base value of this time as history information, the measurement information storage area used in this measurement is cleared, and the number of next normal payouts, the number of normal outs, the base value and the number of all state out balls Start measurement. As a result, the next performance information is measured and stored in real time.

On the performance display 99, the previous base value as history information and the base value currently being measured in real time are alternately switched and displayed at predetermined time intervals (configured so that simultaneous display is possible). May be). In the case of this embodiment, out of the four 7-segment LEDs, the two 7-segment LEDs on the left half of the front are the base value (real-time base value: first base value) being measured in real time or the previous base value. (History base value: 2nd base value) The identification information that can be identified is displayed as the'identification display unit (identification segment)', and the two 7-segment LEDs on the right half of the front display the base value'. Base display (ratio segment)'. When displaying the real-time base value on the base display unit, for example, "bL." Is displayed on the identification display unit, and when displaying the history base value on the base display unit, for example, " Display "b6." (Identification display). The base value is displayed on the numerical display after rounding off to the first decimal place, but when the value after rounding is 3 digits or more, "99." indicating overflow is displayed on the base display. Note that the history base value is not limited to the previous base value, and may be configured so that the base value of a specific number of times such as two times before or before (three times before) can be displayed, and the base value up to how many times before. Can be appropriately determined as to whether or not to display. Further, regarding the performance display 99, if the configuration is such that the real-time base value and the previous history base value can be displayed at least, what kind of display mode the base value should be displayed, and the switching display mode thereof. It is also free to use a periodic switching display form or another display form.

Further, the main control unit 20 can transmit various effect control commands including information on the special symbol variation display game and information on the error to the effect control unit 24 according to the processing state. However, in order to prevent the goto action, the main control unit 20 only transmits a signal to the effect control unit 24, and has a one-way communication configuration in which the signal from the effect control unit 24 cannot be received. ..

(2-2. Production control unit 24)
The effect control unit 24 is equipped with a microprocessor having a CPU 241 (effect control CPU), a ROM 242 (effect control ROM) that stores the effect data required for the effect control process, and a RAM 243 (effect control ROM) that functions as a work area or a buffer memory. It is mainly composed of a microprocessor equipped with an effect control RAM), and is also provided with an acoustic control unit (sound source LSI), RTC function unit (Real Time Clock), counter circuit, interrupt controller circuit, reset circuit, WDT circuit, etc. And control the overall production operation.

The main roles of the effect control unit 24 are receiving the effect control command from the main control unit 20, determining the selection of the effect based on the effect control command, controlling the image display of the liquid crystal display device 36 which is the effect means, and the sound of the speaker 46. Control, light emission control of decorative lamp 45 and various LEDs (button LED 13b, other production LEDs (not shown)), operation control of movable body accessories 80 and 90, and the like.

The effect control unit 24 includes a display control unit (not shown) that controls the display of the liquid crystal display device 36. This display control unit is developed by a VDP that controls overall video output processing such as image development processing and image drawing, an image ROM that stores image data (effect image data) that the VDP performs image development processing, and a VDP. A VRAM (Video RAM) that temporarily stores the image data, a liquid crystal control CPU that outputs control data necessary for the VDP to perform display control, and a program that describes the display control operation procedure of the liquid crystal control CPU and its It is mainly composed of a liquid crystal control ROM that stores various data necessary for display control and a liquid crystal control RAM that functions as a work area or a buffer memory.

Further, the effect control unit 24 has an optical display including a decorative lamp 45 (surrounding LED 45) and various effect LEDs in order to display various effects (light effect, sound effect, and movable body effect by a movable body accessory). An optical display control unit for the device 45a, an acoustic control unit (sound source LSI) for the sound generator 46a including the speaker 46, and a drive control unit (motor drive) for the movable body accessory motor 80c that operates the movable body accessory (not shown). Circuit) etc. The effect control unit 24 can transmit a control signal related to the effect means to these control units.

Further, the effect control unit 24 is connected to a position detection sensor 82a that monitors the movement of the movable body accessory, and the effect control unit 24 is based on the detection information from the position detection sensor 82a and the current operation of the movable body accessory. The operation mode is controlled while monitoring the position (for example, the amount of movement from the origin position). Further, based on the detection information from the position detection sensor 82a, a malfunction in the operation of the movable body accessory is monitored, and if a malfunction occurs, this is notified as an error.

Further, the effect control unit 24 is connected to an effect button switch 13a that detects the operation of the effect button 13 and a direction key switch (not shown) that detects the operation of the direction keys 75 (75a to 75d) to control the effect. The unit 24 can receive the operation detection signal from the effect button 13 and the direction key 75.

The effect control unit 24 determines by lottery or uniquely from a plurality of types of effect patterns prepared in advance based on the effect control command sent from the main control unit 20, and performs various effect means at the required timing. Control it to bring out the desired effect. As a result, the display of the effect image by the liquid crystal display device 36 corresponding to the effect pattern, the reproduction of the sound from the speaker 46, and the lighting / blinking drive of the decorative lamp 45 and the LED are realized, and various effect patterns (decorative pattern variation display operation and By developing the notice production etc. in chronological order, a "production scenario" in a broad sense is realized.

Note that the effect control command defines the function by a 2-byte configuration consisting of a 1-byte length mode (MODE) and a 1-byte length event (EVENT), and in order to distinguish between MODE and EVENT, Bit7 of MODE is used. Bit7 of ON and EVENT is turned OFF. When this information is transmitted as valid, a strobe signal is output corresponding to each of the mode (MODE) and the event (EVENT). That is, when there is a command to be transmitted, the CPU 201 (main control CPU) sets and outputs mode (MODE) information for transmitting the command to the effect control unit 24, and the first time after a predetermined time has elapsed from this setting. The strobe signal is transmitted. Further, the event (EVENT) information is set and output after a lapse of a predetermined time from the transmission of the strobe signal, and the second strobe signal is transmitted after the lapse of a predetermined time from this setting. The strobe signal is controlled in the active state by the CPU 201 for a predetermined period during which the CPU 241 (effect control CPU) can reliably receive the command.

Further, the effect control unit 24 (CPU 241) generates an interrupt based on the input of the strobe signal, executes the control program for the command reception interrupt process, and acquires the effect control command in this interrupt process. It has become. Further, unlike the CPU 201, the CPU 241 is executing an interrupt process (a timer interrupt process that is periodically executed) based on another interrupt when an interrupt occurs based on the input of a strobe signal. Even if there is, the command reception interrupt process is performed by interrupting the process, and the command reception interrupt process is preferentially performed even if other interrupts occur at the same time.

<3. Overview of operation>
Next, a gaming operation related to the gaming machine 1 using the control device (FIG. 3) will be described.

(3-1. Symbol variation display game)
(3-1-1. Special symbol variation display game, decorative symbol variation display game)
In the game machine 1 of the present embodiment, a predetermined starting condition, specifically, based on the game ball entering (winning) the middle starting port 34, the right starting port 33 or the lower right starting port 35. , The main control unit 20 performs a "big hit lottery" by a random number lottery. Based on the lottery result, the main control unit 20 variablely displays the special symbols 1 and 2 on the special symbol display devices 38a and 38b to start the special symbol variable display game, and displays the result as a special symbol after a lapse of a predetermined time. Derived display is performed on the device, thereby ending the special symbol variation display game.

Here, in the present embodiment, the big hit lottery based on the winning of the middle starting port 34 or the right starting port 33 and the big hit lottery based on the winning of the lower right starting port 35 are performed separately and independently. Therefore, the jackpot lottery result for the middle start port 34 and the right start port 33 is derived on the special symbol display device 38a side, and the jackpot lottery result for the lower right start port 35 is derived on the special symbol display device 38b side. .. Specifically, on the special symbol display device 38a side, the special symbol 1 is variablely displayed and the first special symbol variable display is performed on the condition that the game ball enters the middle start port 34 or the right start port 33. The game starts. On the other hand, on the special symbol display device 38b side, the special symbol 2 is variablely displayed and the second special symbol variable display game is started on the condition that the game ball enters the lower right starting port 35. It has become. Then, when the special symbol variation display game on the special symbol display device 38a or the special symbol display device 38b is started, when the jackpot lottery result is "hit (big hit, small hit)" after a predetermined variation display time has elapsed. Is in a predetermined "hit" mode, and in other cases, in a predetermined "miss" mode, the special symbol being displayed in a variable manner is stopped and displayed, whereby the game result (big hit lottery result) is derived and displayed. It has become.

In the present specification, for convenience of explanation, the first special symbol variation display game on the special symbol display device 38a side is referred to as "special symbol variation display game 1", and the second special symbol display device 38b side is referred to as "special symbol variation display game 1". The special symbol variation display game of is referred to as "special symbol variation display game 2". Unless otherwise required, "special symbol 1" and "special symbol 2" are simply referred to as "special symbol" (sometimes abbreviated as "special symbol"), and "special symbol variation display game 1" and "special". The "symbol variation display game 2" is simply referred to as a "special symbol variation display game".

Further, when the above-mentioned special symbol variation display game is started, the decorative symbol (directing game symbol) is variablely displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36, and the decorative symbol variation display game is started, which accompanies this. Then, various productions are developed. When the special symbol variation display game ends, the decorative symbol variation display game also ends, the special symbol display device reflects a predetermined special symbol indicating the jackpot lottery result, and the liquid crystal display device 36 reflects the jackpot lottery result. The decorative design is derived and displayed. That is, the result of the special symbol variation display game is reflected and displayed by the dramatic decorative symbol variation display game including the variation display operation of the decorative symbol.

Therefore, for example, when the result of the special symbol variation display game is "big hit" (when the jackpot lottery result is "big hit"), the decorative symbol variation display game develops an effect reflecting the result. Then, in the special symbol display device, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating a big hit (for example, the 7-segment is in the display state of "7"), the liquid crystal display device 36 displays "left", "middle", and "right". In each display area of "", the decorative symbols reflect the "big hit" (for example, in each of the "left", "middle", and "right" display areas, the three decorative symbols are "7", "7", and "7". 7 ”is displayed) and the display is stopped.

In the case of this "big hit", specifically, the special symbol variation display game ends, and the decorative symbol variation display game ends accordingly, and as a result, the symbol mode of the "big hit" is derived and displayed. After that, the upper prize opening solenoid 42c (see FIG. 3) provided in the first special variable winning device 42 operates to open and close the opening door 42b in a predetermined operation pattern, whereby the upper prize opening 40 opens and closes. Or, the lower grand prize opening solenoid 52c (see FIG. 3) of the second special variable winning device 52 is activated to open and close the open door 52b in a predetermined operation pattern, thereby causing the lower grand winning opening. The 50 is opened and closed, and a special gaming state (big hit game) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state is generated. In this big hit game, the opening time of the big winning opening is until a predetermined time (maximum opening time: 28.5 seconds, for example) elapses, or the number of game balls that have won the big winning opening (winning balls to the big winning opening). Is a predetermined number (maximum number of winnings: the maximum number of winning balls allowed for a winning opening whose entrance is opened or expanded by one operation of the accessory:, for example, 15 (upper large winning opening 40) A "round game" in which the winning area is opened or expanded until the number reaches 10 (lower winning opening 50), and the winning opening is closed when any of these conditions is met, is performed in advance. The specified number of rounds (for example, up to 16 rounds) is repeated.

When the jackpot game starts, an opening effect for notifying that the jackpot has started is performed first, and after the opening effect is completed, the round game is performed a plurality of times up to a predetermined number of predetermined rounds. Then, after the specified number of rounds is completed, an ending effect is performed to notify that the jackpot is finished, and the jackpot game is finished. That is, the jackpot game is roughly divided into each game period of the opening effect period, the round game execution period up to the maximum number of rounds, and the ending effect period.

Regarding the information necessary for executing the above-mentioned decorative symbol variation display game, the main control unit 20 first states that a game ball has entered (winned) in the right starting port 33, the middle starting port 34, or the lower right starting port 35. Based on this, specifically, "big hit", "small hit", on the condition that the game ball is detected by these start port sensors 33a, 34a, or 35a and the start condition (start condition related to the special symbol) is satisfied. Or, the'winning lottery (winning / failing type lottery)'to draw a lottery to see which one is "missing", the big hit type if it is a "big hit", and the small hit type if it is a "small hit". , If it is "missing", a big hit lottery including "design lottery (winning type (winning type) lottery)" to draw the lost type is performed (big hit, small hit, or if there is only one type of loss, a big hit lottery is performed. Since it is not necessary to perform a type lottery, the lottery may be omitted), and based on the lottery result information, a variation pattern of a special symbol or a special symbol that is finally stopped and displayed according to the winning type (hereinafter, "" "Special stop symbol") is determined. Then, as an effect control command for specifying the processing state, a "variation pattern designation command" including at least the variation pattern information of the special symbol (for example, information on the jackpot lottery result and the variation time of the special symbol) is sent to the effect control unit 24 side. Send. As a result, the basic information required for the decorative symbol variation display game is sent to the effect control unit 24. In the present embodiment, a "decorative symbol designation command" including information on the special stop symbol (design lottery result information (information on the winning type)) is also transmitted to the effect control unit 24 in order to enrich the variation of the effect. It has become like.

The variation pattern information of the special symbol may include information for designating whether or not a specific advance notice effect (for example, "reach effect" or "pseudo-continuous effect" described later) is generated. In detail, the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol is roughly classified into a "hit fluctuation pattern" in the case of a hit and a "loss fluctuation pattern" in the case of a loss according to the result of the big hit lottery. For example,'reach fluctuation pattern'that specifies the occurrence of reach effect,'normal fluctuation pattern' that does not specify the occurrence of reach effect,'pseudo-ream reach variation pattern' that specifies the occurrence of pseudo-ream effect and reach effect, pseudo Multiple types of fluctuation patterns are included, such as the'normal fluctuation pattern with pseudo-ream'that specifies the occurrence of continuous production and does not specify the occurrence of reach production. In addition, in order to secure the production time of the reach effect and the pseudo-continuous effect, basically, the reach variation pattern and the variation pattern with pseudo-ream are set to have a longer variation time than the normal variation pattern.

The effect control unit 24 is time-series during the decorative symbol variation display game based on the information included in the effect control commands (here, the variation pattern designation command and the decorative symbol designation command) sent from the main control unit 20. The content of the production to be developed (the production scenario such as the advance notice production) and the decorative design to be finally stopped and displayed (decorative stop design) are determined, and the decorative design is changed and displayed according to the time schedule based on the fluctuation pattern of the special design. Run the symbol variation display game. As a result, the decorative symbol by the liquid crystal display device 36 is variablely displayed in synchronization with the variable display of the special symbol by the special symbol display devices 38a and 38b, and the period of the special symbol variable display game and the decorative symbol variable display game are in progress. The time width is substantially the same as the period of. Further, the effect control unit 24 controls the liquid crystal display device 36, the light display device 45a, or the sound generator 46a, respectively, so as to correspond to the effect scenario, and develops various effects in the decorative symbol variation display game. As a result, image reproduction (image effect) on the liquid crystal display device 36, sound effect reproduction (sound effect), and lighting / blinking drive of the decorative lamp 45, LED, etc. (light effect) are realized.

In this way, the special symbol variation display game and the decorative symbol variation display game have an inseparable relationship, and what reflects the display result of the special symbol variation display game is expressed in the decorative symbol variation display game. , These two symbol variation display games may be regarded as equivalent symbol games. Unless otherwise specified in the present specification, the above two symbol variation display games may be simply referred to as "symbol variation display games".

(3-1-2. Ordinary symbol variation display game)
Further, in the gaming machine 1, based on the fact that the gaming ball has passed (winning) through the normal symbol start port 37, the main control unit 20 performs a "subsidy winning lottery" by a random number lottery. Based on this lottery result, the normal symbol represented by the LED is variablely displayed on the normal symbol display device 39a to start the normal symbol variable display game, and after a certain period of time, the result is a combination of lighting and non-lighting of the LED. It is designed to stop and display. For example, when the result of the normal symbol variation display game is "auxiliary hit", the display unit of the normal symbol display device 39a is in a specific lighting state (for example, all two LEDs 39 are lit, or "○" and "○" and ". Of the LEDs expressing "x", the LED on the "○" side is in the lit state) to stop and display.

When this "auxiliary hit" occurs, the normal electric accessory solenoid 41c (see FIG. 3) operates and the movable piece 47 opens and closes in a predetermined operation pattern, whereby the right starting port 33 is opened. As a result, the game ball easily flows in (starting opening open state), and an auxiliary game state (hereinafter referred to as “solenoid open game”) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state (normal state) occurs. In this general electric opening game, the number of game balls won by the movable piece 47 of the normal variable winning device 41 until the opening time of the right starting port 33 elapses or the right starting port 33 has won a predetermined number (for example, The winning area is opened until the number reaches 4), and the right starting port 33 is closed when any of these conditions is satisfied. The condition for closing the right start port 33 is not limited to this, and may be based only on the opening time of the right start port 33, or based only on the number of game balls won in the right start port 33. There may be.

Here, in the present embodiment, each start port 33 to 35 or the normal symbol start port 37 is awarded during the special / decorative symbol variation display game, the normal symbol variation display game, the big hit game, or the public electric open game. Is generated, that is, when a detection signal is input from the start port sensors 33a to 35a or the normal symbol start port sensor 37a and the corresponding start condition (symbol game start condition) is satisfied, this is used to start the variable display game. As the data related to the right, except for the data related to the variable display, the maximum number of reserved storages (for example, maximum 4), which is a predetermined upper limit, is stored. The pending data that is not used for this symbol variation display operation or the game ball related to the reserved data is also referred to as an "operation pending ball". In order to clarify the number of operation holding balls to the player, a dedicated holding display (not shown) provided at an appropriate position in the game machine 1 or a holding display provided as an icon image on the screen by the liquid crystal display device 36. Turn on the device.

Further, in the present embodiment, up to four operation holding balls related to the special symbol 1, the special symbol 2, and the normal symbol are reserved and stored in the corresponding storage area of the RAM 203, and are retained as the number of times the fluctuation of the special symbol or the ordinary symbol is confirmed. The maximum number of stored balls (maximum number of reserved balls) for each of the special symbol 1, the special symbol 2, and the normal symbol is not particularly limited. In addition, all or part of the maximum number of reserved memories of each symbol may be different, and the number can be appropriately determined according to the playability.

(Simultaneous fluctuation type: Fig. 7 (a))
The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment has a configuration in which the variable display operation of the special symbol 1 in the special symbol display device 38a and the variable display operation of the special symbol 2 in the special symbol display device 38b can be executed independently. It has become. That is, it is a configuration of a so-called "simultaneous fluctuation type" pachinko gaming machine in which the fluctuation display of the special symbol 1 and the fluctuation display of the special symbol 2 can be executed in parallel. In the case of this simultaneous fluctuation type, both special symbols can be displayed in a variable manner in parallel. Therefore, for example, during the execution of the winning game for one special symbol, the fluctuation time of the other special symbol is There may be a case where the game ends and stops at a hit symbol (a symbol indicating a big hit (big hit symbol) or a symbol indicating a small hit (small hit symbol)). However, since the winning game is executed for either one of the special symbols 1 and 2, it is not possible to execute the winning game for both the special symbols 1 and 2. Therefore, it is necessary to devise a way to prevent both the special symbols 1 and 2 from being stopped and displayed at the same time (during the final display, during the hit game, etc.) with the big hit symbols.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 7 (a), for example, when the variation display of the special symbols 1 and 2 is executed in parallel, the variation time of one special symbol ends and precedes the other special symbols. In the case where the symbol is stopped and displayed, the fluctuation time is forcibly terminated even when the other special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner, and the symbol (lost symbol) is stopped (forced loss stop control). If one of the special symbols hits first and is stopped and displayed, the fluctuation display is continued (not stopped and displayed) while the measurement of the fluctuation time of the other special symbol is interrupted, and the one of the special symbols is stopped and displayed. When the measurement is restarted after the hit game related to the hit symbol is completed, it is not necessary to forcibly stop the measurement due to the lost symbol (measurement interruption control). However, in the case where one special symbol is stopped and displayed first with a lost symbol, there is no problem even if the other special symbol is stopped at the hit symbol after that, so the fluctuation is continued as it is. In this embodiment, a simultaneous fluctuation type of "forced loss at the time of a big hit / measurement interruption at the time of a small hit" is adopted, in which the forced loss is stopped in the case of a big hit and the measurement is interrupted in the case of a small hit.

(3-2. Game state)
The pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment is configured to be capable of generating a plurality of types of gaming states in addition to the above-mentioned jackpot, which is a special gaming state. In order to facilitate the understanding of the present invention, first, functions (means) related to the occurrence of various gaming states will be described.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment has a "probability variation function (probability variation function)" in which the main control unit 20 (CPU201) is responsible for the functional unit. There are two types of this, a probabilistic function related to a special symbol (hereinafter referred to as "special symbol probabilistic function") and a probabilistic function related to a normal symbol (hereinafter referred to as "ordinary symbol probabilistic function").

The special symbol probability change function changes the jackpot lottery probability from a low probability (for example, 1/320) of a predetermined probability (normal probability) to a high probability (for example, 1/137), which is more advantageous than the normal gaming state. It is a function to generate a "high probability state". In addition, the normal symbol probability change function changes the lottery probability per auxiliary from a low probability (for example, 1/200), which is a predetermined probability (normal probability), to a high probability (for example, 199/200), and is more than a normal game state. Is also a function to generate an advantageous "probability change state per auxiliary".

In addition, the main control unit 20 is provided with a "variation time shortening function (time saving function)" that serves as its functional unit. There are two types of this: a time saving function related to a special symbol (hereinafter referred to as "special symbol time saving function") and a time saving function related to a normal symbol (hereinafter referred to as "ordinary symbol time saving function").

The special symbol time reduction function generates a "special symbol time reduction state" that shortens the average time required for one special symbol fluctuation display game (the average time from when the special symbol starts to change to when it is stopped and displayed). It is a function to make it. Under the gaming state (special symbol time saving state) in which the special symbol time saving function is operating, the average fluctuation time of the special symbol in one special symbol variation display game is shortened, and the jackpot per unit time is shorter than that in the normal gaming state. The number of lottery times is improved. The number of lottery times is improved. In addition, the normal symbol time saving function shortens the average time required for one normal symbol fluctuation display game (the average time from when the normal symbol starts to change to when it is stopped and displayed). Is a function to generate. Under the gaming state (normal symbol time saving state) in which the normal symbol time saving function is operating, the average fluctuation time of the normal symbol in one normal symbol variation display game is shortened, and the assistance per unit time is shortened compared to the normal game state. The number of winning lottery is improved. The number of lottery is improved. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the fluctuation time of the special symbol or the normal symbol may be shortened due to the difference in the number of balls on hold, but in this case, the time saving function is not activated. This is due to other control processing.

Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment has an "open extension function" in which the main control unit 20 is responsible for its functional unit. The opening extension function is a function of generating an "opening extension state" in which the opening operation period of the movable piece 47 of the ordinary variable winning device 41 (at least one of the opening time of the movable piece 47 and the number of times of opening the movable piece 47) is extended. This open extension state is a so-called "electric chew support state". Under the gaming state (opening extension state) in which the opening extension function is operating, the opening operation period (starting opening opening state time) of the movable piece 47 is extended from, for example, 0.1 seconds to 3.7 seconds, and the opening operation period thereof is extended. The number of times of opening and closing is extended from, for example, 1 time (when the opening extension function is not operating) to 3 times (when the opening extension function is operating), and the movable piece 47 operates per unit time compared to the normal gaming state. The operating rate is improved.

By operating one or a plurality of types of each of the above functions, it is possible to change the internal gaming state (internal gaming state) of the gaming machine. In the following, for convenience of explanation, the gaming state in which the special symbol probability change function, the special symbol time reduction function, the normal symbol probability change function, the normal symbol time reduction function, and the open extension function are activated is referred to as a "probability change state", and among these functions, The game state in which the special symbol probability change function is removed is referred to as a "time saving state", and the game state in which at least the special symbol probability change function is activated and the open extension function is not activated is referred to as a "latent state (latent probability)". Further, a state in which all functions are not in operation (non-operation) is referred to as a "normal game state (normal state)". Therefore, paying attention to the jackpot lottery probability in these gaming states, when the gaming state is "time saving state" or "normal state", the jackpot lottery probability becomes "low probability" and the gaming state is "latent state". Or, in the case of "probability change state", the jackpot lottery probability is "high probability".

In the present embodiment, the special symbol time saving function is activated in the probabilistic state, the time saving state, and the latent probability state. During the latent state, the special symbol time saving function according to the special figure 2 is activated, and the special figure 2 is set to the special symbol time saving state.

Further, under the above-mentioned electric chew support state (hereinafter referred to as "state with electric support"), the operating rate (opening time and number of times of opening) of the movable piece 47 of the normal variable winning device 41 is improved, and the right starting port 33 is reached. Since the winning rate increases and the winning frequency per unit time increases, the gaming state is advantageous for the player as compared with the case where the electric chew support state is not provided (hereinafter, referred to as “the state without electric support”). Focusing on the presence or absence of this electric chew support state, if the game state is "normal game state" or "latent state", it will be "no electric support state", and the game state will be "time saving state" or "probability change state". If it is, it will be in the state with electric support. A gaming state focusing on the operating status of each function (special symbol probability change function, special symbol time reduction function, normal symbol probability change function, normal symbol time reduction function, and open extension function) related to determination of the above jackpot lottery probability and the presence / absence of an electric support state. Is referred to as an "internal gaming state". Further, regarding the operation status of each of the above functions, the operation / non-operation is managed by the ON / OFF state of the flag corresponding to each function on the main control unit 20 side, and the internal game state type is also "Game state number YJ". (YJ = normal "00H", time saving "01H", latent probability "02H", probability variation "03H", etc.) "is managed using an identifier.

During the big hit, a hit game (big hit game) in which the big winning opening is opened and closed occurs, but all the above functions are disabled, and basically under the same game state as the above normal state. Placed in. However, the hit game by small hit (small hit game) is different from the above-mentioned big hit game. During the small hit game, the big winning opening is opened and closed as in the big hit game, but if the small hit is won, the internal game state itself is not changed. That is, during the small hit game, the game state at the time of winning the small hit is continued. For example, if a small hit is won during the time saving state, it will be placed under the time saving state during the small hit, and if a small hit is won during the latent state, it will be placed under the latent state during the small hit game. ..

<4. About hit>
Next, with reference to FIG. 4, the “hit” of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described.

(4-1. About hit type and hit game)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the types of hits drawn in the above-mentioned special symbol variation display game, that is, the types of hits subject to the big hit lottery, are "big hits 1 to 8" belonging to the big hit types and small hit types. There are multiple types of hits such as "small hits" belonging to. Notations such as "16R" and "8R" in the figure indicate the specified number of rounds (maximum number of rounds), respectively. It should be noted that a plurality of types of losses (losses A, B, C) are provided as "loss" types that are not big hits and small hits (see FIG. 35). Further, although there is only one type of small hit, a plurality of types may be provided.

The big hit type is a hit that triggers the operation of the conditional device, and the "small hit" is a hit that belongs to the "non-big hit" type that does not trigger the operation of the conditional device. Here, the "condition device" is a device whose operation is a condition necessary for the operation of the accessory continuous operation device for performing a round game, and a combination of a specific special symbol is displayed or a game ball. Refers to a device that operates when the player passes through a specific area in the large winning opening (excluding the one that wins the large winning opening while the accessory continuous operation device is operating). Further, the "accessory continuous operation device" refers to a device capable of continuously operating a special electric accessory. In addition, the "special electric accessory" refers to an electric accessory that opens or expands the entrance of the grand prize opening. Therefore, in the case of a small hit, the round game itself is not executed, and a big prize is won in an operation mode that is the same as or very similar to the round game by the big hit (pseudo round game), or a completely different operation mode from the round game by the big hit. The opening and closing operation of the mouth is controlled. Both the hits belonging to the big hit type and the hits belonging to the small hit type are the hits that trigger the transition to the special game state (the trigger for the occurrence of the hit game) accompanied by the opening and closing operation of the big winning opening. , It's not just a "loss".

Further, as shown in FIG. 4, the jackpots 1 to 4 are subject to the jackpot lottery on the special symbol 1 side, and the jackpots 5 to 8 and the small hits are subject to the jackpot lottery on the special symbol 2 side. , Only the special symbol 2 side (special symbol variation display game 2 side) can win a small hit.

Further, for the jackpots 1 to 8, the gaming state after the jackpot game is completed is determined according to the gaming state at the time of winning. For example, the jackpot 1 is shifted to the "latent state (high probability, no electric support)" regardless of the gaming state at the time of winning, and the jackpot 2 is in the normal gaming state at the time of winning. In the case, it shifts to the "probability change state (high probability, with electric support)", and in the case of the latent probability / time saving / probability change state, it shifts to the "latent probability state". In addition, the jackpots 4 and 8 are jackpots that trigger a transition to a time saving state (low probability, with electric support), and when the gaming state at the time of winning is the normal state, "time saving state A (time saving number of times 50 times)". In the case of the latent probability, the time reduction, and the probability change state, the transition is made to the "time reduction state B (time reduction number 7 times)". The other jackpots 3, 6 to 7 are as shown in FIG.

In addition, for jackpots 1 to 8, the maximum opening time of the big winning opening in one round game is the "long opening time" of the time width in which the number of winnings to the big winning opening can be expected to reach the maximum number of winnings (9). (For example, 29.8 seconds) ”is set to“ long open jackpot ”. Therefore, in the case of the present embodiment, the profit state during the jackpot game becomes higher as the maximum number of rounds is relatively larger. In addition, due to the ball output rate, a "short opening jackpot" in which the maximum opening time of the big winning opening in one round game is "short opening time (for example, 0.1 seconds)" is given to a part of the jackpot. It may be provided. In this short-open jackpot, since the maximum opening time of the jackpot is very short, it is possible to make a jackpot with almost no chance of winning (it may not be possible to win). In addition, the maximum number of rounds can be appropriately determined for each jackpot.

Regarding the "latent state", "probability change state", and "time saving state" according to the present embodiment, the number of times the special symbol variation display game (number of changes of the special symbol) is executed is a predetermined number of times (special symbol variation display game). It continues until the end of 1 and 2 (total number of executions of special symbols 1 and 2), and when the special symbol variation display game ends without winning a big hit (excluding small hits) within the specified number of times. From the next game, it will shift to the normal state (normal game state). In the case of the present embodiment, a predetermined specified number of times (ST specified number of times) is set for the latent probability state or the probability change state (number cut type (ST machine type)), and the time saving state is 7 times (in the case of the time saving state A) or. 50 times (in the case of the time saving state B) is set. The latent probability state or the probability change state may be a "general probability change machine type" in which the high probability state is continued until the next big hit is won, instead of setting the above ST specified number of times. Further, the time saving state can be set to an appropriate number of times (for example, 100 times). Further, the transition to the latent state or the probability change state may be conditional on the game ball entering a specific area in the large winning opening (V probability change machine type).

(About hit games by small hits)
In the winning game by a small hit (hereinafter, referred to as a "small hit game"), the lower prize winning opening 50 is opened once or a plurality of times (in the present embodiment, once). Here, since the "small hit" is a hit type that does not trigger the operation of the "condition device" as described above, a round game such as the "big hit" is not executed. That is, the opening / closing operation of the lower large winning opening 50 during the small hit game is a pseudo round game. Here, the opening time of the lower prize opening 50 may be set when the lower prize opening 50 is opened once due to a legal request, and the opening time may be repeated a plurality of times. Therefore, the total opening time is set to not exceed 1.8 seconds. Therefore, in the case of this embodiment, the opening time of the lower prize opening 50 is set to 1.2 seconds. This opening time is set as an opening time in which one to several game balls can win a prize in consideration of the arrangement pattern of the game nails (not shown), the flow path correction plates 37d, 40d, and the like. Regarding the closing condition of the lower prize opening 50 in the small hit game, the maximum number of winnings (for example, the number of game balls won in the lower prize opening 50 is the maximum number of winnings when the maximum opening / closing operation time of the lower prize opening 50 has elapsed. , 9), and one of the conditions is satisfied. In the case of the present embodiment, since the number of game balls that have won the lower prize opening 50 does not reach the maximum number of prizes within the above maximum opening / closing operation time (within 1.2 seconds), the lower prize is actually won. After 1.2 seconds of the maximum opening / closing operation time of the mouth 50 has elapsed, specifically, after a series of opening / closing operations of the large winning opening are executed, the small hit game is ended.

Further, after the small hit game by the small hit, the internal gaming state at the time of winning the small hit is continued as it is, and the transition control of the internal gaming state due to the small hit winning is not performed. Therefore, the internal gaming state at the time of winning the small hit and the internal gaming state after the small hit game are both the same internal gaming state. In this respect, the nature is different from the "big hit" in which the transition control of the internal gaming state can be performed.

The small hit may be one type or a plurality of types. When a plurality of types of small hits are provided, it is preferable that the mode of the small hit game is different. For example, when at least the first small hit and the second small hit are provided, the first small hit executes a small hit game with an opening time of 1.0 second for the large winning opening, and the second small hit is the first small hit. It is possible to execute a small hit game with an opening time of 0.5 seconds for the large winning opening, which is shorter than the hit. In this way, by providing a plurality of small hits for executing small hit games with different opening times of the big winning openings, it is possible to add intonation or slowness to the ball ejection increase speed of the small hit rush described later, which makes the game interesting. Can be improved. When a plurality of types of small hits are provided, the winning probabilities of them can be appropriately determined. If it is a game that gives a sense of speed of increasing the number of balls, the small hit type with a relatively long opening time of the big winning opening is set with a high probability (in the above example, the first small hit is larger than the second small hit). If it is a game that slows down the feeling of increasing the number of balls to be released (set to a high probability), set the small hit type with a relatively short opening time of the big winning opening to a high probability (in the above example, the first small hit). Is set to a lower probability than the second small hit). In addition, the type of jackpot can be appropriately determined according to the playability.

<5. About production>
(5-1. Production mode)
Next, the effect mode (effect state) will be described. The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment is provided with a plurality of types of effect modes that produce effects related to the game state, and is configured to be capable of transition control between each effect mode in response to the transition of the game state. ing. The production modes include "normal production mode" corresponding to "normal state", "latent production mode (small hit rush production mode)" corresponding to "latent state", and "probability change production" corresponding to "probability change state". A plurality of types of production modes are provided according to each game state, such as a "time reduction production mode" corresponding to a "mode" and a "time reduction state".

The effect control unit 24 (CPU 241) has a function unit (effect state transition control means) for transition control between a plurality of types of effect modes. The effect control unit 24 specifies a specific effect control command sent from the main control unit 20 (CPU201), specifically, the current game state or the fact that the game state is transferred. Based on the effect control command, it is configured to be capable of transition control between a plurality of types of effect modes in a form that maintains consistency with the game state on the main control unit 20 side. Specific effect control commands include a variation pattern specification command, a game state specification command, a demo display command 1, a demo display command 2, and a predetermined command sent during a hit (a jackpot start command that specifies a jackpot start, or a jackpot end). There is a jackpot end command) that specifies. Further, the effect control unit 24 has a function unit (effect state management means) for managing the effect mode related to the game state. The effect control unit 24 (effect state management means) manages the current effect mode while maintaining consistency with the main control unit 20 side.

(5-2. Production under each production mode)
Further, in each production mode, the background as the background of the variable display screen of the decorative pattern in each production mode so that the player can grasp what kind of game state the player is staying in in the production mode. The display is switched and controlled to different background effects. In addition, the background effect is not limited to the one that changes according to each effect mode, and each effect mode can be changed by using a decorative pattern with a different pattern corresponding to each effect mode, or by changing the sound effect or the light effect. It can also be suggested.

(5-3. Notice production)
Next, the advance notice production will be described. The effect control unit 24 is based on the content of the effect control command from the main control unit 20, specifically, at least the variation pattern information included in the variation pattern designation command, and variously related to the current effect mode and the jackpot lottery result. It is configured so that the appearance of the "notice effect" can be controlled. Such a notice effect suggests (notices) the degree of expectation (winning expectation) of whether or not the player has won the winning type, and works as a "fan effect" to arouse the player's sense of expectation of winning. Typical notice productions include "reach production" and "pseudo-continuous production", as well as "look-ahead notice production" and player participation type production. The effect control unit 24 includes a notice effect control means capable of executing (appearing) and controlling these effects.

The “reach effect” refers to an effect mode accompanied by a reach state, and specifically, an effect mode in which a game result is derived and displayed via the reach state. There are multiple types of reach effects associated with winning expectations, such as N reach (normal reach), which has a relatively low expectation of winning, and N reach, which has a relatively high expectation of winning. Reach production (SP reach production) is included. Most of the "SP reach" have a relatively longer production time (variable time) than the N reach in order to fuel the player's expectation of winning. The SP reach includes, for example, a normal SP reach that develops from N reach to SP reach, an advanced SP reach that develops from N reach to SP reach, and further develops into another SP reach.

In the present embodiment, the N reach includes a plurality of types of N reach such as "N reach 1 and 2", and the SP reach includes a plurality of types such as "SP reach A to C, weak SP reach, and strong SP reach". There are different types of SP reach. In addition, regarding the relationship of the degree of expectation of winning, the relationship of "N reach 1 <N reach 2" and "SP reach A <SP reach B <SP reach C" is given. The N reach and the SP reach include various reach depending on the gaming state (see FIGS. 34 to 36 described later).

The "pseudo-continuous production" refers to a production mode accompanied by a pseudo continuous fluctuation display state (pseudo-variation) of a decorative pattern. This "pseudo-variation" means that a part or all of the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped (including the reach state and the non-reach state) in the decorative symbol variation display game, and the decorative symbol is re-variated from the temporarily stopped state. A variable display mode in which a display operation such as executing a display operation is repeated once or a plurality of times. In this respect, it is different from the "look-ahead notice effect (continuous notice effect)" described later, which is developed over a plurality of symbol variation display games. Basically, the rate of occurrence of such a "pseudo-ream" is determined so that the higher the number of pseudo-variations, the higher the expectation of winning. For example, the more the number of pseudo-variations, the higher the SP. The degree of expectation of occurrence of reach C (high expectation SP reach) is increasing.

In addition, the "look-ahead notice effect" mainly refers to the hold display mode and the hold display mode for the operation hold ball (undigested operation hold ball) that has not yet been used for executing the symbol change display game (special symbol change display operation). This is an effect mode in which the winning expectation degree regarding the operation holding ball can be notified in advance by using the background effect of the symbol variation display game executed earlier. In the symbol variation display game, in addition to the above-mentioned "reach effect", various effects such as so-called "character notice effect" and "step-up notice effect" are generated to excite the game content.

Here, the screen display of the liquid crystal display device according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 5, including the pre-reading notice effect. In the case of the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, in the upper display area in the screen of the liquid crystal display device 36, a display area for displaying the decorative symbol variable display game (a variable display effect of the decorative symbol or a notice effect is displayed). In the lower display area of the screen, there is a hold display area 76 (hold display units a1 to d1) for displaying the number of operation hold balls on the special symbol 1 side, and a special symbol. A hold display area 77 (hold display units a2 to d2) for displaying the number of operation hold balls on the second side is provided. Regarding the presence or absence of the operation holding ball, the fact is notified by a predetermined holding display mode. In the figure, the presence or absence of the operation hold ball is in the lit state (with the operation hold ball: "○ (white circle)" in the figure) or in the off state (without the operation hold ball: the broken line circle in the figure). An example is shown in which information on the number of balls is notified.

The display (hold display) regarding the presence or absence of the operation hold ball is sequentially displayed in the order of occurrence (winning order), and in each hold display area 76, 77, the leftmost operation hold ball is all the operations in the hold display. It is displayed as the earliest (that is, the oldest) activated holding ball on the time axis among the holding balls. Further, on the left side of the hold display areas 76 and 77, a changing display area 78 for showing the operation hold ball actually used in the special symbol change display game is provided. In the case of this embodiment, the changing display area 78 is configured so that an image in which the icon of the game execution hold K currently used for the game is placed appears on the icon of the seat J. That is, when the variable display of the special symbol 1 or the special symbol 2 is started, the oldest icon (icon image) of the hold a1 or a2 displayed in the hold display areas 76 and 77 is the hold K during game execution. As an icon, the icon is moved onto the icon of the seat J in the changing display area 78, and the state is maintained for a predetermined display time.

When an operation-holding ball is generated, the main control unit 20 sends the look-ahead determination information related to the jackpot lottery result and the number of operation-holding balls at the time of the look-ahead judgment (the number of existing operation-holding balls including the operation-holding ball generated this time). A "hold addition command" for designating and is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 (see step S361 in FIG. 17). The hold addition command is composed of 2 bytes, and the data on the upper byte side (winning command 2 (MODE)) that can specify the number of operation hold balls at the time of look-ahead judgment and the lower byte that makes it possible to specify the look-ahead judgment information. It is composed of side data (winning command 2 (EVENT)) (see FIG. 17).

When the effect control unit 24 receives the hold addition command, based on the look-ahead determination information included in the hold addition command, the effect control process related to the "look-ahead notice effect" is performed as a part of the display control process related to the hold display. Specifically, based on the information included in the hold addition command, a look-ahead notice lottery is performed to draw a lottery as to whether or not the look-ahead notice effect can be executed. (Special hold display mode, etc.) is displayed. The probability of winning by the above-mentioned pre-reading notice lottery is higher for "big hit" than for "missing", and for the reach type with a relatively high expectation of winning, pre-reading notice production occurs. Depending on whether or not it is a big hit, the probability of winning a specific hit type is indicated.

Here, the look-ahead determination information is specifically related to the jackpot lottery result (big hit lottery result at the start of fluctuation) executed when the operation holding ball is provided to the symbol variation display game in the main control unit 20. Information and information on the look-ahead fluctuation pattern obtained when the fluctuation pattern at the start of fluctuation is pre-read, that is, the pre-reading judgment information includes at least the pre-reading judgment result of the winning lottery result at the start of fluctuation (pre-reading winning result). Information is included, and in addition, pre-reading determination result (pre-reading symbol result) information of the symbol lottery result and pre-reading determination result (pre-reading variation pattern) information of the fluctuation pattern at the start of fluctuation can be included. What kind of information is included in the hold addition command to be sent to the effect control unit 24 can be appropriately determined according to the content to be notified by the pre-reading notice. It should be noted that the "look-ahead fluctuation pattern" obtained by the look-ahead determination when the operation-holding ball is generated does not necessarily have to be the "variation pattern at the start of fluctuation" obtained when the operation-holding ball is subjected to the fluctuation display operation. .. For example, if the fluctuation pattern at the start of the fluctuation is a fluctuation pattern that specifies "pseudo N (N = 2, 3) + SP reach A", the content specified by the look-ahead fluctuation pattern is "pseudo N + SP reach A". It may be specified that it is not the type of reach effect itself, but the main point, "SP reach A type".

In the case of this embodiment, when the look-ahead notice lottery is won, among the hold icons of the hold display units a1 to d1 and a2 to d2, the hold icon targeted for the look-ahead notice is, for example, a normal hold display. Pre-reading of "hold display change system" such as changing from white (normal hold display mode) to special hold color such as blue, green, red, rainbow color of notice display or color hold display (special hold display mode) A notice production will be performed. FIG. 5 shows an example in which the hatched hold display unit b1 has changed to a special hold display. Here, the display of the blue, green, red, and rainbow colors of the hold icon means that the winning expectation is high in the order of this color, and in particular, the display of the rainbow-colored hold icon is a big hit confirmation (correct). It is a premium hold icon (notice of reservation) to be displayed. Therefore, this hold display unit functions as a hold display means for displaying the number of operation holds. However, when executing the look-ahead notice effect, the hold display mode of one of the hold display units a1 to d1 and a2 to d2 is changed to a predetermined look-ahead notice display mode (special hold display mode). However, this works as a means for generating a look-ahead notice effect. The existing operation hold balls are sequentially digested when the symbol variation display game is executed. At this time, in order to express that one operation-holding ball has been digested, the display position of the hold display unit corresponding to the existing operation-holding ball is moved forward (shifted to the left side in sequence), and the number of the display is reduced. Although control (shift display) is performed, the above-mentioned unusual hold display mode is continuously displayed while changing the display position of the hold display during this period.

Next, the player participation type production will be described. The player participation type production is a production mode that belongs to the so-called "button notice production", and the player performs a predetermined operation (for example, an operation such as pressing, long pressing, repeated hitting, etc.) on the production button 13 (operation means). This is a notice production mode in which the content of the production can be changed based on the above. In the player participation type effect, an operation instruction effect for instructing the effect button 13 to perform a predetermined operation appears during the predetermined button valid period, and when the effect button 13 is operated during the button valid period, the effect button 13 is operated. The current production mode changes to another production mode (production during operation) (for example, the character display changes, special sound effects or light effects occur, etc.), and the production mode before and after the operation (production content). Depending on the situation, the sound effect mode is such that the expected degree of winning is announced.

(About front and back fluctuations: Fig. 7 (b))
Since the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment is a simultaneous variation type, the decorative symbol variation display game corresponding to each of the special symbol variation display games 1 and 2 may be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36, but the two symbols may be displayed. It is troublesome for the player to display the effects related to the variable display game at the same time, and it causes confusion as to which symbol variable display game should be focused on. Therefore, in the present embodiment, even if the special figures 1 and 2 are changing at the same time (both of the special symbol change display games 1 and 2 are being executed), the symbol related to one of the special symbols is executed according to the game state. The production of the variable display game is given priority. For example, in the normal state, the game is advanced aiming at winning the middle start port 34, so that the symbol variation display game 1 corresponding to the special symbol 1 side becomes dominant, while in the latent state. In the case of a latent state, the game is advanced with the aim of winning a prize in the lower right starting port 35, so that the symbol variation display game 2 corresponding to the special symbol 2 side becomes dominant. In consideration of this point, in any of the normal state, the probabilistic state, and the time saving state, the effect is the decorative symbol variation display game 1 as the main effect (the effect on the table variation display state (table variation state) side). If it is in a latent state, the decorative symbol variation display game 2 is made to appear as the main effect (see the correspondence relationship in FIG. 7 (b)). For example, in the normal state, since the special symbol 1 is in the table fluctuation state, the variation display operation of the decoration symbol and the advance notice effect related to the decoration symbol variation display game 1 are displayed on the liquid crystal screen of the liquid crystal display device 36. Therefore, if the current game state is any of the normal state, the probabilistic state, and the time saving state, the main effect is targeted at the symbol variation display game 1 (special figure 1 table variation state), and in principle, the symbol variation. The notice effect (reach effect, etc.), hold icon, and decorative design for the display game 2 are not displayed (special figure 2 back fluctuation state). If the current game state is a latent state, the main effect is for the symbol variation display game 2 (special figure 2 table variation state), and a notice effect for the symbol variation display game 1 (reach effect, etc.). ), Hold icon, and decorative design are not displayed (Special Figure 1 back fluctuation state). However, in the case of the present embodiment, it does not mean that the effect on the back variation display state (back variation state) side does not appear at all. For example, in the lower left corner of the liquid crystal display device 36, a sub effect different from the main effect ( As a sub-effect), a dedicated display area 160 is provided for the number of reserved symbols 1 and 2 and the presence / absence of variable display (see, for example, reference numeral 160 in FIGS. 31A to 31G). Hereinafter, for convenience of explanation, the front fluctuation state may be abbreviated as "front fluctuation" and the back fluctuation state may be abbreviated as "back fluctuation".

In addition, when it is assumed that the player is hitting the left side in the gaming state (during the hit game, the latent probability state, the time saving state, the probability change state), the effect control unit 24 is, for example, If there is a prize in the middle start port 34, a "right-handed warning notification effect" that warns the player to hit right is displayed, and the player is right under a "left-handed advantageous" gaming state (normal state). If it is assumed that you are hitting, for example, if there is a prize in the winning combination gate 57, the normal symbol start port 37, the right start port 33, or the lower right start port 35, the player is informed that he will hit left. It is equipped with a warning notification control means that displays a "left-handed warning notification effect" to warn.

(5-4. Directing means)
Various effects in the game machine 1 are expressed by the effect means provided in the game machine. Such a directing means may be any stimulus transmitting means capable of exerting a directing effect by appealing to human perception such as sight, hearing, and touch, and is a light generating means (light directing means) such as a decorative lamp 45 or an LED device. ), Sound generator (sound effect means) such as speaker 46, effect display device (display means) such as liquid crystal display device 36, pressurizing device that transmits contact pressure to the operator's body, and applies wind pressure to the player's body. A typical example is a wind pressure device or a movable body accessory that exerts a visual effect by its operation. Here, the effect display device is a display device that appeals to the eyes like the image display device, but differs from the image display device in that it includes a display device that does not depend on an image (for example, a 7-segment display). The term "image display device" mainly refers to a type in which an effect is displayed by displaying an image, and a device that displays an effect by means other than an image, such as a 7-segment display, is included in the concept of the effect display device.

<6. Transition of game state: Fig. 6>
Next, the transition of the game state will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 6, in the present embodiment, the game is controlled in the “normal state”, the “latent state”, the “time saving state”, and the “probability changing state”.

As already explained, the "normal state" and "latent state" are "no electric support" states in which the electric chew support function is not given, but the auxiliary hit probability is not zero, and the ball enters the normal symbol start port 37. Then, if it becomes an auxiliary hit, a normal electric opening game in which the movable piece 47 (electric chew) of the normal variable winning device 41 operates occurs. However, the lottery probability per auxiliary is placed under a low probability state (1/200), the operating time (opening time) of the movable piece 47 is very short (opening once in 0.1 seconds), and the right starting port 33 Winning a prize will be very difficult. On the other hand, since the "time saving state" and the "probability change state" are the "with electric support" states to which the electric chew support function is given, the lottery probability per auxiliary is placed under the high probability state (199/200), and also. The opening time of the movable piece 47 is long (3 times of opening for 1.2 seconds + 2 times of opening for 0.5 seconds), and it becomes easy to win a prize in the right starting port 33. In the case of the present embodiment, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is 1000 ms in the normal state and the latent state, and 1004 ms in the probable change state and the time saving state, which are substantially the same time, and the fluctuation pattern is also one type. .. Of course, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol may be the same or different with or without the electric support. Further, a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns of ordinary symbols having different fluctuation times may be provided.

In the case of the present embodiment, what kind of striking method the player should take to obtain an advantageous situation changes depending on the gaming state. Specifically, in the normal state, "left-handed" that aims the game ball to pass through the left flow path 3b is considered to be advantageous, and in the probabilistic state, the latent state, or the time saving state, the game is played. "Right-handed", which aims the ball to pass through the right-hand flow path 3c, is considered to be advantageous. In order to facilitate the understanding of the present invention, first, the characteristics of each gaming state will be described.

(About normal condition)
During the above "normal state", "left-handed" is considered to be advantageous, and therefore the player advances the game while aiming at the left flow path 3b. That is, the game is advanced while receiving the big hit lottery (special symbol variation display game 1) on the special figure 1 side with the aim of winning the middle starting port 34.

By the way, in the case of the present embodiment, there is no small hit in the lottery target type on the special figure 1 side, and there is a small hit in the lottery target type on the special figure 2 side (see FIG. 4). The small hit winning probability is also about 1 / 1.14, which is a very high probability (see FIG. 4). Therefore, there is a risk that a walkthrough will be made in order to win a small hit by "right-handing" during the normal state and to obtain a prize ball by the small hit game. However, in the normal state, the fluctuation time of the special symbol 1 is 112 seconds at the longest (see the column'RUSH direct hit reach'in the fluctuation pattern type column of FIG. 34), but the fluctuation time of the special symbol 2 is , "Ultra-long fluctuation pattern" with a very long fluctuation time of 600 seconds (missing, small hit) is selected (variation pattern type column in FIG. See 1-6'). Therefore, even if "right-handed" is performed in the normal state to win a prize in the lower right starting port 35 on the special drawing 2 side, any of these ultra-long fluctuation patterns (10-minute fluctuations 1 to 6 other than latent probability). ) Is selected, so the waiting time until the start of the small hit game becomes very long. In addition, when a small hit is won, right-handed strike is started immediately after the player confirms the stop display (stop special symbol) of Special Figure 2 or immediately after confirming the opening operation of the lower prize opening 50. Even if you aim at the lower prize opening 50, when the game ball reaches the open door 52b, the lower prize opening 50 is already closed, and if you do not continue to hit right. , The structure is such that it is not possible to expect a prize in the lower prize opening 50. Further, in the lottery target type on the special figure 2 side in the normal state, there is no big hit (small hit rush confirmed big hit) type that triggers the transition to the "latent state" in which the "small hit rush" described later occurs. Therefore, the act of "right-handing" in the normal state has an extremely large time loss in gaining a profit, and there is a high possibility that the game ball will be lost in the dark clouds, and the act is useless for the player. It is designed to be an act that is effectively invalidated.

(During the latent state: small hit rush occurs)
On the other hand, in the "latent state", unlike the normal state, "right-handed" is advantageous, so that the player advances the game while aiming at the right flow path 3c. Here, during the latent state, the fluctuation time of the special symbol 2 at the time of winning the small hit is a "short fluctuation pattern (high-speed fluctuation pattern)" in which the fluctuation time is 2 to 4 seconds (see FIG. 36). In addition, the small hit winning rate on the special figure 2 side in the "latent state" is "about 1 / 1.14 (see FIG. 4)", which is a very high probability of winning. Therefore, when the lower right start opening 35 is won, almost every game small hit is won, the short fluctuation pattern is selected, the small hit game occurs in a short time, and the lower big winning opening 50 is 1.2. Freed for seconds. In addition, during the latent state, it is placed under the'no electric support state'where the electric chew support function is not given, and the normal electric open game hardly occurs (the auxiliary hit probability in the latent state is 1/200). Even if it occurs, the operating time of the movable piece 47 is very short, and it is difficult to win a prize in the right starting port 33.

Therefore, under the latent state, the game ball that has flowed down the right flow path 3c of the game board 3 is first picked up by the flow path correction plate 37d and flows down on the same flow path correction plate 37d to the left. Then, it passes through the lower end of the flow path correction plate 37d and flows down onto the opening / closing door 42b of the upper prize winning opening 40, rolls on the opening / closing door 42 to the right, and flows down from the lower end. Most of the game balls that have flowed down from the opening / closing door 42 are guided by a guide nail (not shown) of the game board to the normal variable winning device 41 side of the electric chew, that is, the right starting port 33 side, and in rare cases, the flow-down guidance is provided. You will be guided in the direction of riding on the board 40d. Of these, the game ball guided to the electric chew side rolls on the movable piece 47 to the lower left without winning a prize in the right starting port 33 because the open game of the normal electric power hardly occurs, and the movable piece It flows down from the lower end of 47 and is guided to either the lower right starting port 35 side or the lower special variable winning device 52 side for small hits. In the case of this embodiment, about 40% of the game balls flowing down from the lower end of the movable piece 47 are guided to the lower right starting port 35 side, and the remaining 60% are guided to the lower special variable winning device 52 side for small hits. To. That is, most of the launched game balls create a situation in which the lower right start opening 35 for the special symbol variation display game 2 and the lower large winning opening 50 for small hits are guided.

The game ball guided to the lower large winning opening 50 for small hits wins the lower large winning opening 50 if the open door 52b is open. The game ball guided to the other flow-down guide plate 40d side falls toward the lower large winning opening 50 located diagonally to the lower left, and rarely wins a prize. On the other hand, the game ball guided to the lower right start opening 35 side does not surely win the right lower start opening 35, and the winning rate is about 80%, and a relatively large number of game balls are on the right. Win a prize in the lower starting port 35.

In this way, in the latent state, the open game of the normal electric power is unlikely to occur, so that the right-handed game ball is located below the electric chew without being picked up by the electric chew. Head to the starting port 35 or the lower special variable winning device 52 for small hits, many of which win in one of the winning openings. In addition, the winning rate for the lower right start port 35 is also relatively high, and a high-speed fluctuation pattern is selected when a small hit is won, so the execution frequency of the special symbol fluctuation display game 2 per unit time is compared to other game states. It gets higher. For this reason, small hit games frequently occur in the latent state, and each time the small hit is won, an average of 1 to 2 prizes are generated in the lower prize opening 50 (10 prize balls). It has become like. In other words, in the "latent state", a "small hit rush" occurs in which the balls are piled up by the small hits, and the more the latent state continues (the more you get hooked without winning the big hit), the more you play. The profits earned by the person will increase.

(About time saving state / probability change state)
On the other hand, the "time saving state" and the "probability change state" are placed under the "state with electric support" to which the electric chew support function is added. In this state with electric support, the normal electric opening game occurs with high probability, and the opening time of the right start port 33 is also from 0.1 seconds to 3.7 under the state without electric support (latent state, normal state). Extended to seconds. For this reason, most of the game balls flowing down the right flow path 3c are picked up by the ordinary variable winning device 41 of the electric chew, and the lower right starting port 35 is hardly won. Of course, not all of the game balls are picked up by the electric chew and win the right start port 33 for special figure 1, and the game ball that spills without winning the right start port 33 is the special feature on the downstream side. The lower right starting port 35 for FIG. 2 may win a prize.

Therefore, during the time saving state or the probability change state, the symbol variation display game 1 on the special figure 1 side is dominantly generated, and the symbol variation display game 2 on the special figure 2 side is unlikely to occur in the symbol variation display game. The situation is the opposite. Further, even if the special symbol fluctuation display game 2 is executed, any one of the ultra-long fluctuation patterns "10-minute fluctuations 1 to 6 other than the latent probability" is obtained when the small hit is won in the time saving state or the probability variation state. (Fluctuation time 600 seconds) ”is selected (see FIG. 36), so that even if a small hit is won with a high probability, a situation is created in which the small hit game itself is unlikely to occur for a long time. Therefore, it becomes difficult to win a prize in the lower large winning opening 50, and the “small hit rush” in which the above-mentioned small hit game frequently occurs in a short time does not occur.

In this way, although it is easy to win a prize in the right start port 33 of the special figure 1 side start port by the electric chew support function in the time saving state and the probability change state, since it is not accompanied by the above-mentioned small hit rush, in terms of ball ejection performance, The advantage to the player is overwhelmingly inferior to the latent state. In particular, in the case of the present embodiment, the transition probability to the latent state under the time saving state or the probabilistic state, that is, the “small hit rush” transition rate is also 50% on the special figure 2 side (see the big hit 5 in FIG. 4), special figure 1. On the side, it is 15% (see jackpots 1 and 2 in FIG. 4). In this respect as well, the advantage to the player is inferior to that of the latent state in which the big hit lottery on the special figure 2 side is frequently received. In this respect, it is decisively different from a general pachinko machine in which the profit state is increased if there is an electric support in a time-saving state or a probable change state.

In the present embodiment, the above-mentioned "small hit rush" is generated in a latent state, but the present invention is not limited to this. Depending on the configuration of the accessory and various winning devices (41, 42, 51, etc.) arranged on the game board, the hit type, the auxiliary hit type, the hit game mode, the public electric open game mode, etc. And / or under a time saving state (under a gaming state accompanied by an electric support state), a small hit rush may occur.

(Normal state → jackpot game)
With reference to FIG. 6, the line L1 is a case where the jackpot lottery probability 1/320 is won in the special symbol variation display game 1 in the “normal state”. When the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display device 38a, the big hit game according to the winning type is executed by using the special variable winning device 42 for big hit. As shown in FIG. 4, there are jackpots 1 to 4 in the winning types of the special figure 1, and the selection probabilities (lottery probabilities) of the "design lottery" are 10/200 (5%) and 20/200 (, respectively). 10%), 100/200 (50%), 70/200 (35%). Of these, when "big hit 1" that triggers the transition to the latent state is selected (line L2), "big bonus (big hit game when the small hit rush is confirmed)" is started. On the other hand, when the big hits 2 to 4 are selected (line L3), the "first battle bonus (big hit game when the small hit rush is not confirmed)" is started.

In the above big bonus, as a hitting effect, a special blessing effect that celebrates the latent state, that is, the confirmation of the transition to the "small hit rush" appears. On the other hand, in the first battle bonus, a story-like production having a story like a so-called "battle production", such as concealing the jackpot type won this time, appears as a hit production. Here, a battle production that expresses the battle between the hero and the aliens appears. In this battle production, in each round game of the 1st to 7th rounds, a battle production is developed that gives a guessing element as to which of the jackpot types 2 to 4 is the jackpot type, and during the 7th round game, As a result of the battle production, the jackpot type won this time will be definitely notified, that is, whether it will be shifted to the probabilistic state or the time saving state, and whether the maximum number of rounds is 16R or 8R. Be notified.

As already explained, the game state after the jackpot game is completed is determined according to the jackpot type that was won this time (see FIG. 4). Regarding this, the illustrated line L4 is a route that shifts to the "latent state" after the jackpot game with the jackpot 1 (normal time latent probability jackpot) is completed, and the line L5 is based on the jackpot 2 and 3 (normal time probability variable jackpot). The route that shifts to the "probability change state" after the jackpot game ends, and the line L6 shows the route that shifts to the "time saving state" after the jackpot game with the jackpot 4 (normal time saving jackpot) ends.

(Latent state → Small hit game → Latent state)
During the latent state, the above-mentioned "small hit rush" that loops the small hit game can occur as shown in line L7 → line L8. This small hit rush will continue as long as it continues to win the 1 / 1.14 small hit without winning the 1/137 big hit. In the small hit game, the lower big winning opening 50 for small hits is opened for 1.2 seconds, and the game ball that arrives without being guided to the lower right starting opening 35 side becomes the opening lower big winning opening 50. Win a prize. In addition, even if a small hit is won, there is no transition to the internal gaming state (a small hit is a hit that does not trigger a transition to the internal gaming state), and when the small hit game is completed, the original "latent state" is restored ( Line L8), "small hit rush" is possible, and the number of balls won is increased by the small hit consecutive villas, and it is possible to win a large number of prize balls in a short time.

In this way, during the latent state, the player hits right to aim for a prize at the lower right starting port 35 for special figure 2, and proceeds with the game with expectations for the small hit consecutive villa (small hit rush). Let me do it. Also, during the latent state, it will continue unless you win the big hit 4, 8 of the latent time saving big hit or the big hit 3, 6, 7 (the big hit that triggers the transition to the time saving state or the probability changing state) To. The player does not win these jackpots, and the current latent state continues, or even if the jackpot is won, the latent probability jackpot (big hit) that triggers the transition to the latent state again. While expecting to win 1, 2, 5), the game will proceed (line L17).

If the special symbol variation display game 1 is executed before the execution of the special symbol variation display game 2, the small hit rush will end unless the special symbol 1 side is lost. This is because when the special figure 1 wins the big hit (in the case of the big hit fluctuation), in the big hit lottery of the special figure 2, all the big hits are excluded from the symbol lottery target, and the small hit is won or lost (Fig. 18). (See steps S413 and S414 of FIG. 21 and steps S431 and S432 of FIG. 21), the small hit rush will continue, but when the big hit fluctuation on the special figure 1 side ends, the special figure 2 side is forced to " This is because the game is stopped at "Loss symbol" (see steps S485 to S489 in FIG. 24), and the big hit game won on the special figure 1 side is started, and the execution of the variable display operation on the special figure 2 side is prohibited. is there. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 34, as the hit variation pattern of the special figure 1 in the latent state, "variation per 4 minutes during latent (variation time 240 seconds)" is selected for all big hits, so that the variation ends. A maximum of 4 minutes before the game is set as a chance period for a small hit rush. However, even in such a case, if the jackpots 1 and 2 (latent jackpot at the time of latent probability) are won, the state will be shifted to the latent state again (small hit rush in FIGS. 4 and 6). (See the broken line frame in), in effect, the small hit rush will continue.

(Probability change state → small hit game, loss → probability change state)
During the probabilistic state, as described above, most of the game balls heading for the lower prize opening 50 on the downstream side are picked up by the electric chew, and the lower prize opening 50 is hardly won. Further, at the time of the small hit of Special Figure 2, the "ultra-long fluctuation pattern (600 seconds)" is selected, and the small hit game is unlikely to occur. Therefore, the above-mentioned "small hit rush" does not occur (line L10, line L11). In the case of the present embodiment, in the "probability change state", the right starting port 33 is frequently won, but the number of winning balls is one, that is, even if the right starting port 33 is won, the net increase number is 0. In addition, it is difficult for small hit games to occur, and since there is almost no winning of the lower large winning opening 50, the number of balls to be played does not increase, and basically, the number of balls held by the player is slightly reduced or the status quo is maintained. While the game progresses (the base value of the electric chew prize while there is electric support is 100% or less). In addition, during the probabilistic state, the jackpot is substantially continued until the next jackpot is won (ST specified number of times 65535 times), and the player expects that the jackpot in the probabilistic state is a jackpot that triggers the transition to the latent state. However, it will be fun to play.

(Time saving state → small hit game, loss → time saving state)
Even during the "time saving state", it is placed under the game situation of the same event as the probabilistic state (almost no prize is won in the lower large winning opening 50, "super long fluctuation pattern" is selected at the time of the small hit in Special Figure 2), small No hit rush occurs (line L13, line L14). In addition, since the time saving state ends after 7 or 50 times of time saving and shifts to the normal state (lines L15 and L20), the player can use the jackpot in the time saving state as a trigger to shift to the latent state. You will enjoy the game while expecting that.

(Big hit winning in latent state, probable change state, or time saving state)
When a big hit is won in a latent state, a probable change state, or a time saving state (lines L9, L12, L16), a hitting effect and a big hit game are started according to the big hit type. In the figure, as an example, an example in which the "second battle bonus" is started as a jackpot game during the consecutive villa state is shown. In this second battle bonus, as with the first battle bonus, a "battle production" that conceals the jackpot type that was won this time will appear. However, the battle production of the second battle bonus is different from the battle production of the first battle bonus. Here, regardless of which jackpot is won, the battle effect is developed, and the type of jackpot won this time is definitely notified as the result effect of the battle effect from the round game (final round) to the ending effect. That is, it is notified whether to shift to the latent state, the probable change state, or the time saving state. Specifically, in the case of "big hit 1, 2, 5" that triggers the transition to the latent state, a blessing effect that notifies the small hit rush rush (transition to the latent state) appears, and "big hit 3, In the case of "6, 7", a chance effect to notify the probable change rush (probable change state transition) appears, and in the case of "big hit 4, 8", a challenge effect to notify the time saving rush (time saving state transition), respectively. Appears as a result of the battle production. After the big hit game, the game is shifted to a predetermined game state according to the big hit type won this time (lines L17 to L19).

(Time saving state → normal state)
By the way, when returning to the normal state after finishing the time saving state, it is considered that the number of operation-holding balls of the special symbol 2 (special figure 2 operation-holding balls) is often present.

During the time saving state, a prize is frequently generated in the right starting port 33 due to the action of the electric chew support function. Therefore, there is a high possibility that the special figure 1 operation holding ball is present at the time of time-saving number of digestions. In addition, a game ball that spills without winning a prize in the right starting port 33 for special figure 1 may win a prize in the lower right starting port 35 for special drawing 2 on the downstream side, and wins in the lower right starting port 35. Then, the fluctuation on the special figure 2 side is also started. As for the fluctuation on the special figure 2 side during the time saving state, the ultra-long fluctuation pattern of 600 seconds is selected at the time of loss and small hit (other than latent probability in the column of "normal / probability change / time saving" in FIG. 36. (Refer to "Middle 10-minute fluctuations 1 to 6")) It takes a very long time for one special figure 2 operation holding ball to be digested. It is highly possible that Special Figure 2 is changing.

In such a game situation, when the time saving state is exited and the normal state is entered, the special figure 1 side is in the "table fluctuation state" as in the time saving state, and the other special figure 2 side is in the "table fluctuation state". It is in a “backward fluctuation state” (see FIG. 7 (b) and FIG. 31E). If the maximum number of 4 special figure 2 operation hold balls is accumulated when the time saving state is exited and there is a big hit winning hold among them, the fluctuation pattern related to special figure 2 in the normal state is In order to prevent a capture hit, a 600-second ultra-long fluctuation pattern (10-minute fluctuations 1 to 6 other than latent probability) is selected for loss and small hits, and a 240-second long fluctuation pattern (normally) even for big hits. (Variation per 4 minutes in the middle) is selected (see the normal column in FIG. 36 and the normal column in FIG. 34). If the jackpot winning hold is the second hold, the waiting time (until the change display of the second jackpot win hold stops) is about 14 except for the fluctuation time of special figure 2 currently in process. It takes about a minute (1 operation hold ball fluctuation time 10 minutes + jackpot winning hold fluctuation time 4 minutes), and if the jackpot winning hold is the 4th hold, the waiting time will be even longer, about 34 minutes. It will also take about (3 operation hold ball fluctuation time 30 minutes + jackpot winning hold fluctuation time 4 minutes).

Therefore, there are many players who quit the game without noticing that the special figure 2 is changing. Of course, even if the player quits the game, the change of the special figure 2 is performed as it is, so if the symbol change display game (big hit change of the special figure 2) related to the jackpot winning hold is completed, the big hit will occur. (The condition device operation flag to be described later is ON), and then, until the game ball passes through the role-matching gate 57, the actual jackpot game (round game) is not started and is placed under the "round game start waiting state". Be hung. Under such circumstances, if the special figure 2 notifies that a big hit has occurred in the dark clouds under the back fluctuation state without taking any measures, the following problems occur.

Even though no one is playing the game, the data counter DT starts the jackpot notification (the above-mentioned jackpot notification function), giving the surrounding players a sense of distrust or discomfort. In addition, although the data counter DT is informing the jackpot, there is a risk that a hyena act such as securing the table will be rampant for the player who confirmed that no one is on the game table, and the players and the hall side It may induce troubles between players. Therefore, in the case of a big hit, it is preferable not to execute the big hit notification by the data counter DT at least until the game ball passes through the winning combination gate 57.

(At the time of the first hit: When the big hit is won in the normal state)
Therefore, in the present embodiment, the "big hit middle signal" of the outer end signal indicating that the big hit game is in progress is output from the frame external terminal board 21 at the timing described below. This will be described in detail with reference to FIG.

FIG. 32A is a time chart showing the output timing of the jackpot signal when the jackpot is won in the normal state.

The above "big hit signal" is output when the special figure stops at the big hit symbol and the condition device is activated (after the condition device operation flag is turned on) and the accessory continuous operation device is activated (the accessory continuous operation device operation flag is ON). Will be done. The condition device operation flag is a flag that specifies whether or not the jackpot game is in progress. If the flag is in the ON state (= 5AH), it indicates that the jackpot game is in progress, and the flag is in the OFF state (= 5AH). = 00H) indicates that the jackpot game is not in progress. Further, the above-mentioned "accessory continuous operation device operation flag" is a flag for designating the operation state of the accessory continuous operation device, and when the flag is in the ON state (= 5AH), the accessory continuous operation device It indicates that the operation is in progress (round game continuation is possible), and when the flag is in the OFF state (= 00H), it indicates that the accessory continuous operation device is not activated (round game continuation is not possible). The accessory continuous operation device operation flag is set to the ON state when the combination gate sensor 57a detects a game ball in the special electric accessory management process (step S095 in FIG. 13) described later, and the jackpot game ends. Sometimes it is set to the OFF state.

For details, refer to FIG. 32 (A), and in the main control unit 20, the special symbol related to the jackpot (here, special figure 1) is stopped and displayed, and a predetermined fixed display time (time t0 to time t1) has elapsed. In that case, a big hit occurs (after the time t1 (after the condition device operation flag is turned on)), and the game ball is not output until the game ball is detected by the winning combination gate sensor 57a, and the game is played by the winning combination gate sensor 57a. When the ball is detected (when the accessory continuous operation device operation flag is turned on), a jackpot signal is output (time ta). Then, although not shown, the output is stopped when the jackpot game is completed (when the specified number of round games are completed). The above-mentioned "confirmed display time" is a margin time width for notifying the stop display mode of the special symbol after the fluctuation time of the special symbol ends, and when this confirmed display time elapses, the next process is performed. The transition is possible (see step S482 in FIG. 24, step S492 in FIG. 25, and steps S502 and S508 in FIG. 26, which will be described later).

Here, in the present embodiment, even if the fluxgate compass 57a detects a game ball after a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) elapses after the big hit occurs, the detection signal is treated as invalid. A "detection invalid period (time t1 to t2)" is provided. This detection invalid period (effective waiting time for the winning combination gate) is used as an effect time width for displaying the "right-handed instruction effect 135 (see FIG. 31A described later)" as a part of the hitting effect. Therefore, even if the game ball passes through the winning combination gate 57 during this detection invalid period, the round game is not started and the jackpot signal is not output (see time te).

However, after the detection invalid period (waiting time for valid combination of the combination gate) has elapsed (after time t2), the detection of the game ball by the combination gate sensor 57a is enabled (see "the combination gate" in the figure). Therefore, when the fluxgate compass 57a detects a game ball during this valid period, a jackpot signal is output (time ta), and after a predetermined interval time (for example, 20 ms) has elapsed, the round game is played. It is supposed to be started (time tb).

As a result, at the time of the first hit, it is possible to prevent the big hit notification by the data counter DT from being executed at least until the game ball passes through the winning combination gate 57. In particular, it is possible to prevent the sudden jackpot notification by the data counter DT from being executed when the special figure 2 side is in the back fluctuation state. At the time of the first hit, the fluctuation shortening signal is not output, and the data counter DT is a big hit medium signal based on the fact that the "fluctuation shortening signal" output to the time saving state, the probability variation state, or the latent probability state is not received. Even if you receive, it can be judged that this big hit is not the big hit in the consecutive villas, but the first hit.

(At the time of consecutive villas (when the jackpot is won in the latent state, the shortened time state, or the probable change state))
Further, in the present embodiment, in addition to the above-mentioned "big hit medium signal", the above-mentioned "variable short time big hit medium signal" of the outer end signal indicating that the big hit game is in progress is output from the frame external terminal board 21, but the "variable short time big hit" The "medium signal" is output during the jackpot game (triggered by the condition device operation flag ON) while the special symbol time reduction function is operating (the special symbol time reduction state flag is ON). That is, the variable / short time big hit medium signal is output at the start of the big hit that is won during the latent state, the time saving state, or the probability change state.

FIG. 32B is a time chart showing the output timing of the variable / shortened jackpot signal when a jackpot is won during the latent state as an example of the gaming state during the special symbol time saving function operation. The description of the same contents as in FIG. 32 (A) will be omitted as appropriate to avoid duplicate description.

The above-mentioned "changed short-time jackpot signal" is output while the condition device is operating (condition device operation flag is ON), and is output while the accessory continuous operation device is operating (the accessory continuous operation device operation flag is ON). For details, refer to FIG. 32 (B), and in the main control unit 20, the timing (condition device operation flag ON) when the special symbol related to the big hit (here, special figure 2) is stopped and the big hit at time t1 occurs. At (hours), the signal during the jackpot is output. Then, as with the jackpot signal, the output is stopped when the maximum number of round games is completed (not shown).

Then, when the data counter DT receives the big hit middle signal or the variable / short time big hit middle signal, the big hit notification is started. That is, in the gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, in the case of "first hit (big hit in the normal state)" and in the case of "consecutive villas (in the case of this embodiment, the probabilistic state, the latent state, or the time saving state". It is possible to make the start timing of the jackpot notification by the data counter DT different from that in the case of "when the jackpot is won)". Specifically, during the consecutive villas, the outer end signal that can identify that the jackpot game, in other words, the condition device is operating, is output prior to the first hit.

In detail, when a big hit occurs, at the time of the first hit (big hit in the normal state), the signal during the big hit at the time of variation is not output (see FIG. 32 (A)), and the above-mentioned signal during the big hit Since only is output, the data counter DT side receives the big hit middle signal and starts the big hit notification. Therefore, on the data counter DT side, the big hit notification is not started only when the big hit occurs on the game machine 1 side, but the big hit notification is started after waiting for the game ball to pass through the combination gate 57. On the other hand, at the time of consecutive villas (big hits other than in the normal state), the "changed short time big hit medium signal" is output prior to the above big hit medium signal, so the data counter DT side outputs this variable short time big hit medium signal. In response to this, before the game ball passes through the Gakuren Gate 57, that is, when the big hit on the game machine 1 side starts, the big hit notification is started. When passing through the combination gate 57, a big hit middle signal is output, but since the data counter DT side has already received the big hit middle signal at the time of variation and has started the big hit notification, the big hit caused by the big hit middle signal Notification is not executed.

In this way, the start timing of the big hit notification by the data counter DT is different between the case of the first hit and the case of the consecutive villas, which gives the player a sense of distrust in the case of the first hit. From the viewpoint of preventing the above-mentioned problems, it is necessary to start the jackpot notification by the data counter DT when passing through the combination gate (when the accessory interlocking operation device is ON), but in the case of consecutive villas, the player It is extremely rare to quit the game, and there is no problem even if the jackpot notification is started immediately when the jackpot occurs (timing when the condition device operation flag is ON), and this is done at the time when the jackpot occurs. This is because it is preferable to correctly notify the above (see FIGS. 31A to 31G described later).

In the case of the data counter DT that can discriminate between the first hit time and the consecutive villa time based on the fluctuation shortening signal and the big hit middle signal, the configuration may be such that the variable short time big hit middle signal is not output. Specifically, when the data counter DT side receives the fluctuation shortening signal (ON edge detection), the current gaming state is a gaming state accompanied by the operation of the special figure time saving function (in the case of this embodiment, the time saving state, the probability change state, Or it is in a latent state). On the other hand, on the gaming machine side, if a big hit occurs during the gaming state accompanied by the operation of the special figure time saving function, the output of the fluctuation shortening signal is stopped (the time saving function does not operate during the big hit), and the big hit immediately after that. A medium signal is output (see the broken line portion of the big hit medium signal in FIG. 32 (B)). Using such an output mode, the data counter DT side detects the OFF edge of the special figure fluctuation shortening signal after receiving the special symbol confirmation signal during the game state accompanied by the operation of the special figure time saving function. At the same time, when the ON edge of the big hit signal is detected, it can be determined that the big hit is at the time of consecutive villas. Of course, if the configuration is such that any of the variable and short-time big hit medium signal, big hit medium signal, and fluctuation shortening signal can be output, the above-mentioned data counter can be supported, and various data counters DT can also be supported. It is possible to provide a possible gaming machine.

The details will be described later, but the current jackpot in the normal state is the jackpot on the special figure 1 side (big hits 1 to 4) and the jackpot on the special figure 2 side at the start of the jackpot on the gaming machine 1 side. The effects (big hit start effect (opening effect)) are different (see FIGS. 31A to 31G described later). In other words, the case where the big hit this time is the big hit on the special figure 1 side under the special figure 1 table fluctuation state (special figure 2 back fluctuation state), and the case where this big hit is the special figure 1 table The jackpot start effect is different depending on whether the jackpot is on the side of the special figure 2 (the jackpot on the back of the special figure 2) under the variable state (the swinging state on the back of the special figure 2). As a result, by taking measures against the hitting effect, it is possible to effectively prevent giving a feeling of strangeness to the surroundings and also to effectively prevent hyena acts.

(Specific examples of production on the gaming machine 1 side and the data counter DT side: FIGS. 31A to 31G)
31A to 31G show an example of production on the game machine 1 side and an example of production on the data counter DT side according to the gaming situation. 31A to 31G show mainly the image display effect by the liquid crystal display device 36 and the effect content of the light effect by the decorative lamp 45 (surrounding LED 45) as the effect mode on the gaming machine 1 side.

In the present embodiment, as described above, in any of the normal state, the probable change state, and the time saving state, the symbol variation display game 1 according to the special figure 1 is the main effect (special figure 1 table change state). Appear as. Further, in the case of the latent state, the symbol variation display game 2 according to the special figure 2 is made to appear as the main effect (the variable state in the table of the special figure 2). Therefore, depending on what kind of game state and what kind of big hit is won, the effect during the big hit game (during the hit effect) may differ.

(Specific example at the time of the first hit: FIGS. 31A to 31B)
31A to 31B show the transition of the effect content on the gaming machine 1 side at the time of the first hit (the effect content of the screen of the liquid crystal display device 36 and the decorative lamp 45) and the effect content of the data counter DT at the time of the big hit (DT side). The transition of the jackpot notification mode) is shown. In FIGS. 31A to 31B, in order to facilitate the understanding of the present invention, in the situation where the number of the special figure 1 operation holding balls is 3 and the number of the special figure 2 operation holding balls is zero, the special figure 1 The big hit is won in the symbol variation display game 1 on the side, and the big hit is the first big hit after the opening of the hall (here, at the 634th rotation from the opening of the store, the big hit 1 (small hit rush transition is a normal latent big hit) )) Is represented as a representative case. That is, the current jackpot is the case of the jackpot on the special figure 1 side (the jackpot on the special figure 1 table) under the special figure 1 table fluctuation state (special figure 2 back fluctuation state).

FIG. 31A (1) shows an example of the effect at the time of the first hit. With reference to FIG. 31A (1), the symbol variation display game 1 according to the special figure 1 is displayed as the main effect (effect under the normal effect mode) on the liquid crystal screen (special figure 1 table variation state, special figure 1). (Fig. 2 Back fluctuation state), in the lower left corner, as a sub effect (sub display area) different from the main effect, there is a dedicated display area 160 regarding the number of reserved symbols 1 and 2 and the presence or absence of variation display. It is indicated by four small squares. In the figure, the dedicated display area 160 is exaggerated, and the screen occupancy rate of the actual dedicated display area 160 is lower than in the figure. Further, the seating J in the changing display area 78 and the holding K during game execution are omitted.

Of the four squares related to the dedicated display area 160, the upper left square is the first reserved number display area 156 for displaying the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 1, and the upper right square is variable display in Special Figure 1. It is the first variation presence / absence display area 157 that displays whether or not it is. Further, the lower left square is the second reserved number display area 158 for displaying the number of balls held in the special figure 2, and the lower right square is the second square for displaying whether or not the special figure 2 is in the variable display. The fluctuation presence / absence display area is 159. In the first reserved quantity display area 156 and the second reserved quantity display area 158, the reserved quantity is indicated by Arabic numerals, and in the first fluctuation presence / absence display area 157 and the second fluctuation presence / absence display area 159, it is indicated that the symbol is changing. ", And" X "indicates that the symbol is stopped. In FIG. 31A (1), the number of balls held in the special figure 1 is “3”, the number of balls held in the special figure 1 is “⇔”, the number of balls held in the special figure 2 is “0”, and the number of balls held in the special figure 2 is the non-variable state “X”. ". Regarding the display of the first fluctuation presence / absence display area 157 and the second fluctuation presence / absence display area 159, "X" indicates a lost symbol, "Δ" indicates a small hit symbol, and "○" indicates a stop display state in the big hit symbol. .. Therefore, when any of these "X", "Δ", and "○" is displayed, it indicates that the special symbol is in the non-variable state.

The images displayed in the first fluctuation presence / absence display area 157 and the second fluctuation presence / absence display area 159 are different from the three decorative symbols because they indicate whether or not the fluctuation display of the special figures 1 and 2 is in progress. As the fourth symbol of, it is called the "fourth symbol" of the special figure 1 or the special figure 2, and in some cases, the fourth symbol on the special figure 1 side is the "decorative symbol 1 fourth symbol" or the "fourth symbol 157". , The fourth symbol on the special symbol 2 side is also referred to as "decorative symbol 2 fourth symbol" or "fourth symbol 159". In addition, the dedicated display area 160 has four display areas 156 to 159 regardless of any of the special figure 1 front fluctuation state, the special figure 1 back fluctuation state, the special figure 2 front fluctuation state, and the special figure 2 back fluctuation state. The contents of are displayed.

In FIG. 31A (1), when the jackpot variation (symbol variation display game 1) of the special figure 1 is completed, the combination of decorative symbols related to the type of jackpot (decorative symbol 131) is stopped. Here, in the symbol variation display game 1 on the special figure 1 side, which is the main effect, "777 (small hit rush rush confirmation symbol)" indicating the winning of "big hit 1 (normal latent probability big hit)" is stopped and displayed. An example of this is shown. However, in the figure, the stage of the state immediately before the final display of the variation display of the special figure 1 is shown, and “777” of the decorative symbol 131 is the temporary stop display state (sway variation) immediately before the final display. The display content of the dedicated display area 160 for the sub-effect is that the number of balls on hold in special figure 1 is "3", the number of balls on hold in special figure 1 (4th symbol 157) is in the fluctuating state "⇔", and the number of balls on hold in special figure 2 is "0". , Special figure 2 (fourth symbol 159) is in a non-variable state (missing symbol stop display state) "X".

After that, the fluctuation of the special figure 1 ends (after the confirmed display time elapses), and a big hit occurs. As a result, the display content of the dedicated display area 160 in FIG. 31A (2) is a non-variable state (big hit symbol stop state) in the special figure 1 (4th symbol 157) in the special figure 1 operation pending number of balls "3". ◯ ”, the number of balls reserved for operation of special figure 2 is “0”, and special figure 2 (fourth symbol 159) is in a non-variable state (lost symbol stopped state) “X”. Since the special symbol variation display game (variation of the special symbol) is not executed during the jackpot game, the display content of the dedicated display area 160 does not change until the jackpot game ends.

FIG. 31A (2) shows the production status of the gaming machine side 1 (liquid crystal screen, decorative lamp 45) at the start of the big hit game and the data counter DT side.

On the gaming machine side 1, as a part of the hitting effect, a big hit start effect 132 is displayed in which a large "big hit" message is displayed in the center of the screen and the decorative lamp 45 (surrounding LED 45) is lit in rainbow colors. In addition to the jackpot start effect 132, a right-handed instruction effect 135 that instructs "right-handed" appears. The jackpot start effect 132 and the right-handed instruction effect 135 appear until the "combination gate effective waiting time (for example, 5 seconds)" until the combination gate sensor 57a is activated has elapsed. In addition, "777" of the decorative symbol (decorative stop symbol) 131 is displayed in a small retracted position in the upper left corner to indicate what kind of decorative symbol combination the current jackpot has stopped. In addition, as the hitting effect, the effect according to the game state at the time of winning and the hit type appears.

At this stage, the jackpot signal is not output (see time t1 in FIG. 32 (A)), and as shown in FIG. 32 (2), the jackpot notification by the data counter DT side is not executed (in the figure, the light emitting unit DTa). Is normally lit), and the display contents of the data counter DT are not updated. Therefore, the display contents of the data counter DT in FIG. 31A (2) are such that the display value of the jackpot count display unit DTd (hereinafter abbreviated as "big hit count DTd") is zero and the display value of the start count display unit DTb (hereinafter "start count DTb"). ”) Is“ 634 ”, the display value of the total rotation speed display unit DTc (hereinafter abbreviated as“ total rotation speed DTb ”) is“ 634 ”, and the display value of the consecutive villa number display unit DTe (hereinafter“ consecutive villa number DTe ”). Is abbreviated) is zero.

Then, when the effective waiting time (5 seconds) of the combination gate has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 31B (3), the gate instructing the combination gate 57 to aim at the combination gate 57 (to let the combination gate 57 pass the game ball). The winning instruction production 137 appears. As the gate winning instruction production 137, the message "Aim at the gate!" And the arrow image appear here.

(Right-handed instruction production 135 → About the appearance of gate winning instruction production 137)
Here, in the present embodiment, at the start of the big hit, instead of simply instructing to aim at the Yuren Gate 57, first, after giving a right-handed instruction in advance, an instruction is given to aim at the Yuren Gate 57. (After showing the right-handed instruction effect 135, the gate winning instruction effect 137 appears). The reason will be described below.

If you instruct to aim at the role-ream gate 57 immediately after the big hit starts, if you are a beginner in the game, you do not know where the role-ream gate 57 is, and you hit left or right. It is also assumed that the game ball may be launched appropriately without knowing. In the case of the present embodiment, since the combination gate 57 is formed on the right flow path 3c side, if the player hits the left side, the profit of the player is impaired. In view of such circumstances, in the present embodiment, first, after giving a right-handed instruction in advance (a right-handed instruction effect 135 appears for a predetermined time), an instruction is given to aim at the role-matching gate 57 (gate winning instruction effect). "Kind instruction production" such as 137) appears.

Then, when the player passes the game ball through the combination gate 57 in accordance with the gate winning instruction effect 137, the accessory continuous operation device is activated (the accessory continuous operation device flag is ON), and the external terminal board 21 for the frame is activated. A jackpot signal is output from (see time ta in FIG. 32 (A)). Then, after a predetermined interval time (for example, 20 ms) has elapsed, the first round game (opening of the upper prize opening 40 for big hit) is started (see time tb in FIG. 32 (A)).

FIG. 31B (4) shows the production status of the gaming machine 1 side and the data counter DT side when the gaming ball passes through the winning combination gate 57. On the gaming machine 1 side, the production 139 during the round is started with the start of the round game. In the production 139 during the round, in addition to the animation image of the alien coming down from the disk and the message "Aim for the upper attacker" instructing to win the upper prize opening 40 for the big hit, the current number of rounds and acquisition A notification effect 130 or the like that displays the number of balls appears.

On the data counter DT side, in response to the jackpot signal, the light emitting unit DTa emits light in rainbow colors or the like, an original jackpot notification is started, and the display content of the data counter is updated. Regarding the display contents of the data counter, since the number of big hits DTd is the first hit, it is updated to the value obtained by adding 1 for the current big hit (1 big hit, 0 consecutive villas due to this big hit). Although not shown, when the big hit game is finished, the big hit signal is turned off, and the data counter DT returns the value of the start count DTb to zero, assuming that the big hit is finished.

(Example of production during small hit rush (in latent state): Fig. 31C)
After the big hit game by the big hit 1 described with reference to FIG. 31C is completed, the player enters the latent state (see FIG. 4). 31C (5) shows an ending effect related to the jackpot 1 (normal latent probability jackpot), and FIGS. 31C and 31D (6) to (8) show an example of the effect in the latent state.

The ending effect is an effect content that notifies information about a game state that shifts after the end of the jackpot, and an ending effect according to the jackpot type appears. In this example, since the case where the jackpot 1 is won is described, the ending effect 175 is an effect content for notifying that the state is shifted to the latent state (small hit rush). FIG. 31C (5) includes an image of an alien and a message of "Alian Abduction Rush" indicating that the alien is entering a latent state (small hit rush).

The big hit game by the big hit 1 ends and the ending effect 175 ends, and the game state shifts to the latent state. In the latent state, the special figure 2 front fluctuation state (special figure 1 back fluctuation state) is set, and the symbol fluctuation display game 2 related to the special figure 2 is the main effect (the effect under the latent effect mode (small hit rush effect mode)). ) Is displayed.

FIG. 31C (6) shows an example of the effect when the game ball wins the lower large winning opening 50 for the small hit in the small hit game in the latent probability effect mode (small hit rush effect mode).

The increase effect 180 shown in FIG. 31C (6) notifies (displays) the number of acquired balls (10 prize balls of the lower prize opening 50) added to the number of acquired balls each time the lower prize opening 50 is won. At the same time, it is a production content that notifies the cumulative value of the current number of acquired balls in real time. As for the current number of acquired balls, the total number of acquired balls from the first hit to the end of the consecutive villa (shift to the normal state) is displayed in real time (see FIG. 31E (12) described later). ..

This increase effect 180 displays the number of acquired balls to be added to the current number of acquired balls each time the winning ball number notification effect 177 that notifies the current number of acquired balls (approximate value) and the lower large winning opening 50 is won. It includes an additional ball number notification effect 178, an abduction effect 179 in which the number of winnings is notified by a character image, and the like. In addition, the display contents of the dedicated display area 160 in FIG. 31C (6) are as follows: special figure 1 operation hold ball number "2", special figure 1 (fourth symbol 157) in a fluctuating state "⇔", special figure 2 operation hold. The number of balls is "4", and the special figure 2 (fourth symbol 159) is in a non-variable state (small hit symbol stop display mode) "Δ".

The production example of FIG. 31C (6) shows a case in which two game balls are continuously won while the lower large winning opening 50 is opened by the small hit game. When a prize is generated while the lower prize opening 50 is open, a numerical image of "+10" is continuously displayed on the liquid crystal screen by the additional ball number notification effect 178, and when this numerical image appears, The count value (current number of acquired balls) of the acquired ball number notification effect 177 is updated and displayed. Since the current count value is "Total 2180" (2180 acquired balls), the count value increases by "+10" in the order of "Total 2190" → "Total 2200". Further, in the abduction effect 179, one cow image 179a is displayed for each prize, and an effect image expressing the appearance of being taken away to the disk is displayed.

The difference between the increase effect 180 shown in FIGS. 31C (7) and 31C (6) is that the number image of "+10" by the addition ball number notification effect 178 is changed to a number image (emphasized number image 176) bordered by a predetermined color. In addition to the cow image 179a, the girl character image 179b is displayed in the abduction effect 179.

The emphasized number image 176 is one aspect of the look-ahead advance notice effect, and is an effect mode that suggests the degree of expectation of winning in the hold whether or not there is a big hit winning hold in the existing operation hold ball. The emphasized number image (additional ball number notification effect) 176 suggests a high or low degree of expectation of winning in the hold due to the difference in the border color. For example, look-ahead of the "acquired ball count display system" that changes to a normal white color (numerical image in Fig. 31C (6)), a special border color such as green, red, or rainbow color on the notice display, or a numerical image with a color pattern. It can be a notice production. Here, the green, red, and rainbow-colored border colors suggest that the expectation of winning in the hold is high in this order, and in particular, the rainbow-colored border indicates that there is a jackpot winning hold in the hold. Is definitely shown (on hold). It should be noted that the high or low degree of expectation of winning in the hold may be suggested by changing the display mode of the numerical image. For example, provide a number image that is represented by Arabic numerals ("+10"), Chinese numerals ("+10"), Roman numerals ("+ X"), etc., and suggest that the expectation of winning on hold is high in this order. Can be done.

Further, the character image 179b is also an aspect of the look-ahead notice effect, and when there is a winning hold in the hold, it shows the "winning type expectation degree" of what kind of winning type it is. For example, FIG. 31C (7) shows. The character image 179b of the girl shown is a preview image (specific jackpot high expectation pre-reading notice effect) suggesting that the expectation of the latent jackpot (big hit 5) that the small hit rush continues is high. In the present embodiment, in addition to the character images 179a and 179b, a plurality of types of character images are prepared, and an expectation of a latent probability jackpot (big hit 5) is expected depending on what kind of character image appears. It suggests the degree, the expectation of the probability variable jackpot (big hits 6 and 7), and the expectation of the latent time-shortening jackpot (big hit 8). Specifically, in the case of the cow image 179a, the latent probability time saving jackpot (big hit 8) is relatively higher than the other jackpots, and in the case of the boy character image (not shown), the latent probability The expectation of the time-probability variable jackpot (big hits 6 and 7) is relatively higher than that of other jackpots. In the case of the girl character image 179b, the latent-probability latent jackpot (big hit 5) is relative to the other jackpots. It is designed to notify that the degree of expectation is high (may be correct). The appearance rates of the various character images described above may be different or the same, and can be appropriately determined. However, the character image of the girl is positioned as a premium effect of continuously notifying the small hit rush, and it is preferable that the appearance rate is relatively lower than that of other character images.

In the case of the present embodiment, whether or not there is a jackpot winning hold in the existing operation holding ball based on the emphasized number image 176 and the character image displayed in the abduction effect 179, if there is a jackpot winning hold. It is possible to give a guess element of what kind of winning type is by the production of the number of acquired balls display system during the small hit rush. As a result, the production during the small hit rush becomes various, and the fun of the game can be improved.

(Modification example of production during small hit rush)
In the addition ball number notification effects 176 and 178 of FIGS. 31C (6) and 31C, a numerical image of “+10” is displayed each time a prize is won, but the display mode can be as follows. For example, if there is a prize in the lower prize opening 50 during one small hit game, "+10" is displayed for the first prize, and "+20" is displayed for the second prize. In the case of the third prize, "+30" can be displayed, and in the case of the fourth prize, the display mode can be "+40" (cumulative display type additional ball number notification effect). Then, the final value (+40 in this case) is added to the current value of the acquired ball number notification effect 177 to update the acquired ball number.

Further, the production content of the additional ball number notification effect may be changed according to the current number of acquired balls. For example, when the current number of acquired balls (total number of acquired balls) is 10,000 or less, the cumulative display type additional ball number notification effect of the above-described modification is used, and when it exceeds 10,000, the above-mentioned FIG. 31C (6) ( 7) The additional ball number notification effect.

Further, the above-mentioned increase effect 180 (at least one effect of 176 to 179) may be used to be configured to be able to notify (suggest) the lottery result on the back fluctuation side. For example, when the special figure 2 on the back fluctuation side is in the jackpot winning state (during the jackpot fluctuation) while the special figure 2 is in the latent state where the front fluctuation occurs, the numerical image 176 or 178 is "+ hit (back fluctuation). The side is a big hit) ”etc. are displayed.

The increase effect 180 is an effect content for notifying the number of acquired balls in the consecutive villas. Therefore, not only during the small hit rush (during the latent state, during the small hit rush effect mode), but also during the time saving state (during the time saving effect mode) and during the probability change state (during the probability change effect mode), the game state (effect mode). ) Can also be made to appear. In addition, during a specific gaming state (for example, during the probability change state (probability change effect mode) and / or during the time reduction state (time reduction effect mode)), an emphasized number image (additional ball number notification effect) indicating the expected degree of winning in the hold ) 176 and / or the character images 179a and b may not appear.

(Specific example at the time of consecutive villas: Fig. 31D)
Next, with reference to FIG. 31D, an example of production on the gaming machine 1 side and the data counter DT side in the “during consecutive villas” will be described. FIG. 31D shows the case where, in FIG. 31A described above, after winning the jackpot 1 in the normal state and shifting to the latent state, the “big hit 8 (latent time shortening jackpot)” is won in the latent state. It shows the transition of the effect content of the game machine 1 side (the effect content of the screen of the liquid crystal display device 36 and the decorative lamp 45) and the transition of the effect content of the data counter DT at the time of the big hit (the big hit notification mode on the DT side). Is. That is, FIG. 31D shows a case where the big hit this time is the big hit on the special figure 2 side (the big hit on the special figure 2 table) under the special figure 2 table fluctuation state (special figure 1 back fluctuation state). Regarding FIGS. 31D to 31G described below, substantially the same components as those of FIGS. 31A to 31B are designated by the same reference numerals, and the details thereof will be omitted as appropriate to avoid duplicate description. To do.

FIG. 31D (8) shows an example of the liquid crystal screen of the liquid crystal display device 36 when a big hit (here, big hit 8) is won by the lottery on the special drawing 2 side during the latent state. In the example shown in FIGS. 31D (8) to 31D, the number of special drawing 1 operation holding balls accumulated in the normal state is consumed by one, and there are two holdings. Shown is an example of the case where the jackpot 8 (latent time reduction jackpot) was won in the symbol variation display game 2 on the special figure 2 side at the 140th rotation from the previous jackpot under the situation where the number of is maximum 4. It is a thing.

With reference to FIG. 31D (8), the symbol variation display game 2 according to the special figure 2 is displayed as the main effect (effect under the latent effect mode) on the liquid crystal screen (special figure 1 back fluctuation state, The dedicated display area 160 is displayed in the lower left corner of the special figure 2 table (variable state). In the figure, when the hit variation (symbol variation display game 2) of the special figure 2 is completed, the decorative symbol 138 is stopped and displayed with a combination of symbols related to the type of big hit. Here, in the symbol variation display game 2 on the special figure 2 side, which is the main effect, an example is shown in which "222 (design corresponding to the time saving jackpot)" indicating winning is stopped and displayed for "big hit 8" which is the latent time saving jackpot. ing. However, in the figure, the stage of the state immediately before the final display of the variation display of the special figure 2 is shown, and “222” of the decorative symbol 138 is the temporary stop display state (sway variation) immediately before the final display. Therefore, the display contents of the dedicated display area 160 in FIG. 31D (8) are as follows: special figure 1 operation hold ball number "2", special figure 1 (fourth symbol 157) in a fluctuating state "⇔", special figure 2 operation hold ball. The number "4" and the special figure 2 (fourth symbol 159) are in the fluctuating state "⇔". Here, special figure 1 and special figure 2 are changing in parallel.

After that, the jackpot fluctuation of special figure 2 ends (confirmed display time elapses), and the fluctuation of special figure 1 (fourth symbol 157), which was in a fluctuating state in parallel, is forcibly stopped at the lost symbol (forced lost symbol). It is displayed and a big hit occurs. As a result, the display contents of the dedicated display area 160 in FIG. 31D (9) are: special figure 1 operation pending number of balls "2", special figure 1 in a non-variable state (lost symbol stopped state) "X", special figure 2 The number of balls on hold for operation is "4", and special figure 2 is in a non-variable state (big hit symbol stopped state) "○".

FIG. 31D (9) shows the liquid crystal screen at the start of the big hit game and the production status on the data counter DT side. On the game machine 1 side, the signal during the big hit at the time of variation is output, and the opening effect (big hit start effect) is started. On the LCD screen, as a part of the opening effect, a big hit start effect 132 that displays a "big hit" message on the background image of the rising sun flag and lights the decorative lamp 45 (surrounding LED 45) in rainbow colors appears. In addition to the jackpot start effect 132, a right-handed instruction effect 135 that instructs "right-handed" appears.

Further, on the data counter DT side, in response to the signal during the big hit at the time of variation, the light emitting unit DT is made to emit light in rainbow colors to start the big hit notification, and the display contents of the data counter DT are updated. Regarding the display contents of the data counter, the number of big hits DTd and the number of consecutive villas DTe are updated to the value obtained by adding 1 for the current big hit (2 big hits, 1 consecutive villas due to this big hit). .. Therefore, the display contents of the data counter DT in FIG. 31D (9) are that the number of big hits DTd is "2", the number of consecutive villas DTe is "1", the number of starts DTb is "140", and the total number of rotations DTc is "774 (previous). 634th rotation + 140th rotation this time, total 774 rotations) ". At the time of the consecutive villas, unlike the first hit, the big hit notification by the data counter DT is started before the game ball passes through the role-ream gate 57.

Then, when the winning combination gate effective waiting time (5 seconds) elapses, as shown in FIG. 31D (10), the gate winning instruction effect 137 appears on the liquid crystal screen. When the game ball passes through the role-ream gate 57, the round game is started and the effect during the round (not shown) appears. When the game ball passes through the combination gate 57, a jackpot signal is output, but the data counter DT side has already started the jackpot notification in response to the "short-time jackpot signal". Therefore, the jackpot notification caused by the jackpot signal is not executed (there is no problem even if it is re-executed). Then, when the big hit game of this time is finished, the signal during the big hit at the time of variation is turned off, and the data counter DT returns the value of the number of starts DTb to zero, assuming that the big hit is finished.

(End of big hit game-> time saving state-> normal state: Fig. 31E)
After the jackpot game with the jackpot 8 described with reference to FIG. 31D is completed, the player enters the time saving state B (time reduction number of times 7 times) (see FIG. 4). FIG. 31E (11) shows the ending effect related to the jackpot 8 (latent time reduction jackpot), and FIGS. 31E (12) to (14) show the transition of the effect content after the transition from the time reduction state to the normal state. is there.

The ending effect 143 is an effect content that notifies that the time is shifted to the time reduction state and the number of remaining time reductions. FIG. 31E (11) includes a time-saving transition notification image 141 including a disk image and a mission-like message of "Enter chance mode! Find the disk", and a time-saving number of times notification image 142 including a message of "7 more times". It has become.

The big hit game by the big hit 8 ends and the ending effect 143 ends, and the game state shifts to the time saving state. Although not shown, in the time saving state, the special figure 1 front fluctuation state (special figure 2 back fluctuation state) is set, and the symbol variation display game 1 according to the special figure 1 is the main production (the production under the time reduction production mode). Is displayed as. Further, the dedicated display area 160 is displayed in the lower left corner of the liquid crystal screen as in the normal state and the latent state.

FIG. 31E (12) shows an example of the liquid crystal screen at the start of the normal state (the first game after the end of the time saving state) after exiting the time saving state. In FIG. 31E (12), reference numeral 146 indicates a result effect. In general, this result effect is an effect content including information on the fact that the time saving state ends due to this fluctuation (the effect of shifting to the normal state) and the number of acquired balls acquired in a series of consecutive villas. Therefore, the "result effect" is usually an effect that should appear in the symbol variation display game of the final time (in this example, the seventh rotation of the final variation) at which the time saving state ends.

However, in the present embodiment, due to the simultaneous fluctuation type and its playability, etc., in the "time saving state", as the fluctuation pattern at the time of loss of the special figure 1, the fluctuation time is 1 second, and the fluctuation time is 1 second. 1s) is selected (see FIG. 35 (b)). Therefore, it is not possible to secure the effect time width of the result effect at the 7th rotation of the final variation.

Therefore, the result effect is not displayed during the time saving state, but is displayed at the first rotation after the transition from the time saving state to the normal state. In the "normal state", a fluctuation pattern of a minimum of 4 seconds can be selected. Therefore, the effect time width of the result effect itself is set to the effect scenario configuration within 4 seconds in consideration of selecting the shortest variation pattern of 4 seconds (normal variation 4 s). Of course, the above-mentioned result effect may appear in the symbol variation display game in which the time saving state ends, but in this case, the result is used as the final (final variation) variation pattern in which the time saving state ends. It suffices to configure so that a fluctuation pattern having a fluctuation time capable of sufficiently expressing the effect is selected.

Since the result effect 146 appears in the first rotation (first game) after the transition to the normal state, it does not notify that the time saving state ends with this fluctuation as in the general result effect. , It is preferable to use an effect that implies and suggests that the time-saving state has completely disappeared (the state has fallen to the normal state). For example, instead of a message such as "end of time saving mode", as shown in Fig. 31E (12), a message indicating that the mission to find the disk failed (type 1 close encounter failure) 143, or a series of consecutive villas (type 1 close encounter failure) It includes an acquired ball number notification effect 145 and the like indicating an approximate value (“GET + 3530”) of the acquired ball number acquired in (including the first hit). It should be noted that the first rotation after the transition to the normal state may be used as a result effect that pretends to be the final variation in the time saving state (7th rotation in this example). In this case, it is preferable that the right-handed instruction effect 135 is not displayed and the left-handed instruction effect 147, which will be described later, is not displayed because the normal state is pretended to be a time-saving state (FIG. 31E (12)).

Further, in the normal state, the symbol variation display game 1 according to the special figure 1 is displayed as the main effect (effect under the normal effect mode) as in the time saving state. Therefore, on the liquid crystal screen in FIG. 31E (12), in addition to the decorative symbol 131 corresponding to the special figure 1, the hold icon corresponding to the special figure 1 is displayed in the hold display area 76. Further, since the result effect 146 is displayed large on the liquid crystal screen, the decorative symbol of Special Figure 1 (the lost decorative symbol of "556") is displayed small in the lower right corner.

FIG. 31E (12) shows the stage of the state immediately before the final display of the variation display of the special figure 1, and the decorative symbol “556” is the temporary stop display state (sway variation) immediately before the final display. Further, the display content of the dedicated display area 160 in FIG. 31E (12) is that the number of balls on hold in special figure 1 is "3", the number of balls on hold in special figure 1 is "⇔", and the number of balls on hold in drawing 2 is "3". , Special figure 2 is in the fluctuating state "⇔". Here, the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 are changing in parallel, but in this example, the change of the special figure 1 is terminated first, and the change state of the special figure 2 is continued. To.

From FIG. 31E (13) onward, it is assumed that the player who is currently playing a game knows that he / she has exited the time saving state and has stopped launching the game ball at all and is preparing to leave.

FIG. 31E (13) shows the liquid crystal screen of the second rotation (second game) after the transition to the normal state. In the figure, vertical arrows drawn in a square frame (inside the screen of the liquid crystal display device 36) indicate that the decorative symbol 131 is changing. In the present embodiment, as described above, since the result effect is displayed in the first game after the transition to the normal state fall, the left-handed instruction effect 147 is displayed in the next second game. This left-handed instruction effect 147 is displayed when the current game (second game) starts, and ends after displaying for a predetermined time (for example, about 4 seconds).

Further, on the liquid crystal screen in FIG. 31E (13), one special figure 1 operation holding ball has been digested from the previous game, and two holding icons are displayed. Further, the display content of the dedicated display area 160 in FIG. 31E (13) is that the number of balls on hold in special figure 1 is "2", the number of balls on hold in special figure 1 is "⇔", and the number of balls on hold in special figure 2 is "3". , Special figure 2 is in the fluctuating state "⇔". Here, special figure 1 and special figure 2 are changing in parallel.

(About the case where the player leaves the seat when the back fluctuation is in the big hit fluctuation)
After that, all of the above two special figure 1 operation hold balls are digested, the symbol variation display game 1 related to the last operation hold ball ends, and special figure 1 is waiting with 0 special figure 1 operation hold balls. The player who has been playing the game until now confirms that the result of the last symbol change display game is "missing", and notices that the hold of special figure 2 remains or is changing. Imagine a case where you quit this game table instead. In addition, after this player leaves the seat, the explanation will proceed assuming that no one is playing at this game table.

In FIG. 31E (14), with respect to special figure 1, 0 special figure 1 operation holding balls and decorative symbol 131 are stopped and displayed (standby) with a lost symbol “135”, and with respect to special figure 2, 3 One of the number of special figure 2 operation hold balls is digested, a new change of special figure 2 (symbol change display game 2) is started, and the second operation hold ball used for this symbol change is , By chance, the case where the big hit was put on hold is shown. To put it simply, under the special figure 2 back fluctuation state, the special figure 2 is a game situation during the big hit fluctuation (big hit fluctuation during the back fluctuation (normal medium 4 minute fluctuation)). Therefore, the display contents of the dedicated display area 160 in FIG. 31E (14) are as follows: special figure 1 operation pending number of balls "0", special figure 1 in a non-variable state (lost symbol stopped state) "X", special figure 2 operation. The number of reserved balls is "2", and the special figure 2 is in a fluctuating state (here, the jackpot is fluctuating) "⇔".

When the operation holding ball of the special figure 2 is stored, as already explained, in the case of a loss fluctuation or a small hit fluctuation in the "normal state", the fluctuation time is 600 seconds (10-minute fluctuation in other than latent probability 1). ~ 6), even if it is a big hit, the symbol variation display game 2 will be played for a long time of 240 seconds (variation per 4 minutes in normal times).

During the normal state, there is a relationship of "special figure 1 front fluctuation state, special figure 2 back fluctuation state". Therefore, on the liquid crystal screen in FIG. 31E (14), the effect related to the symbol variation display game 2 on the special figure 2 side does not appear, and the result of the symbol variation display game 1 on the special diagram 1 side executed last. As a result, the decorative symbol 131 corresponding to the special figure 1 is in a state of being stopped and displayed at "135 (missing eye)" indicating a loss.

After that, as time elapses, the jackpot fluctuation during the back fluctuation (normally per 4 minutes fluctuation) ends. As a result, the display content of the dedicated display area 160 in FIG. 31F (15) is that the number of balls held in special figure 1 is "0", that special figure 1 is in a non-variable state (lost symbol stopped state) "X", and special figure 2 The number of balls on hold for operation is "2", and special figure 2 is in a non-variable state (big hit symbol stopped state) "○", indicating that special figure 2 with back fluctuation is a big hit.

FIG. 31F (15) shows a game situation in which the big hit fluctuation during the back fluctuation (variation per 4 minutes during normal operation) is completed and the “special figure 2 back jackpot” occurs. In the figure, on the liquid crystal screen, a'back right-handed instruction effect 135a'that instructs "right-handed" is displayed in the vicinity of the upper part of the dedicated display area 160 or in a partially overlapping display form. The back right-handed instruction effect 135a is displayed smaller than the dedicated display area 160. In addition, when a big hit game due to a back big hit occurs, it is a right-handed instruction effect that is displayed without any other related effect.

This back-right-handed instruction effect 135a ends after the elapsed time (5 seconds) of the effective waiting time for the combination gate. This point is the same as the case where the special figure 1 table big hit shown in FIGS. 31A (2) and 31B (3) is obtained. It should be noted that the effect control unit 24 can grasp whether or not the jackpot is due to the back fluctuation by the "big hit start command" transmitted from the main control unit 20 at the start of the jackpot game. This jackpot start command includes game status information at the time of winning and winning jackpot type information. When the effect control unit 24 receives the jackpot start command, if the information contained therein is, for example, the game state at the time of winning is the normal state, and the jackpot type is any of the jackpots 5 to 8, this time. It is possible to grasp that the big hit is a big hit due to back fluctuation. Of course, other commands may be used, or a dedicated command may be provided so that the effect control unit 24 can identify whether or not the hit is a big hit due to back fluctuation.

With reference to FIG. 31F (16), after the elapse of the valid waiting time (5 seconds) for the combination gate, the'back gate winning instruction effect 137a'instructing the passage of the game ball to the combination gate 57 appears. Like the back right-handed instruction effect 135a, the back gate winning instruction effect 137a is a gate winning instruction effect that is displayed without any other related effects. The back gate winning instruction effect 137a is displayed until the game ball passes through the winning combination gate 57. This point is the same as the case where the special figure 1 table big hit shown in FIG. 31B (3)) is obtained.

As for the decorative lamp 45 (surrounding LED 45), since the jackpot this time is the back jackpot in Special Figure 2, the light effect of the normal jackpot (for example, the decorative lamp 45 (big hit start) of the gaming machine 1 in FIG. 31A (2)). Production 132)) is not executed. In the present embodiment, the light effect and the sound effect are in the same effect state (for example, extinguished) as, for example, waiting for a customer. In this production state, wait for the game ball to pass through the role-ream gate 57.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the jackpot this time is the jackpot on the back of the special figure 2, the instruction effects 135 and 137 appear, but the display is executed properly, and the jackpot is as flashy as the jackpot on the front of the special figure 1. The big hit start effect (opening effect) does not appear, and as much as possible, it is secretly notified that the big hit is a big hit. In this way, by taking measures against back big hits in the hitting production, even if a big hit suddenly occurs from an empty game table, it is possible to prevent discomfort given to the surroundings and effectively prevent hyena acts. You can do it.

In FIG. 31F (17), when the game ball passes through the winning combination gate 57, a jackpot signal is output as usual as in FIG. 31B (4), and the first round game, the production during the round, etc. Is started. In addition, the data counter DT side also starts the jackpot notification and updates the data display content (big hit count DTd, etc.) (see the data counter DT in the lower part of FIG. 31B (4)).

(Special jackpot announcement production: Fig. 31F)
By the way, under the game situation of FIGS. 31F (15) and (16) above, the game ball is in the state of the big hit game (here, the big hit game by the back big hit in the special figure 2), but the game ball passes through the role gate 57 Until then, the back gate winning instruction effect 137a continues to appear and is in a state of waiting for the start of the round game. This back gate winning instruction effect 137a is a relatively small message displayed in the lower left corner and is difficult to notice. It is assumed that the player seated on the game table in such a state starts the game while aiming to win a prize in the middle start port 34 by hitting left as usual. In addition, in the simultaneous fluctuation type, when one special figure is a big hit, the fluctuation of the other special figure is stopped due to forced loss, or the fluctuation display is continued while the timing of the fluctuation movement time is interrupted, so that a new fluctuation is made. Even if the game ball wins a prize in the middle start opening 34, the variable display of the decorative symbol does not start, giving the player a sense of distrust. In such a case, it is preferable to promptly notify the player that a big hit (back big hit) is in progress.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the jackpot currently occurring is due to the winning of the jackpot (back jackpot) on the back fluctuation state side, it is notified that the jackpot is being played under the predetermined appearance conditions. It is configured so that "special jackpot announcement production" can be displayed. The conditions for the appearance of the special jackpot announcement effect can be, for example, the following conditions A and B.

(Condition A) A jackpot is won by a jackpot lottery on the special drawing side, which is a back fluctuation, and a predetermined time T has elapsed from the start of the jackpot fluctuation (satisfying the relationship of "variation time ≤ T").
(Condition B) There was a prize at the start port on the special drawing side, which would change the table.
On condition that the above conditions A and B are satisfied, the special jackpot announcement effect is displayed.

To explain with a specific example, the main control unit 20 wins a big hit on the special figure 2 side during the normal state (special figure 2 back big hit win), and is a big hit fluctuation pattern related to back fluctuation, "normal middle". When "variation per 4 minutes" is selected, a variation pattern designation command capable of specifying the variation is transmitted to the effect control unit 24, and the elapsed time from the start of the variation of the variation per 4 minutes during normal operation is measured. Then, as a predetermined time, for example, the fluctuation per 4 minutes during normal operation is completed. When 4 minutes have passed, a dedicated effect control command (back jackpot command) is transmitted to the effect control unit 24. Upon receiving the back jackpot command, the effect control unit 24 controls the effect state (effect mode) to the "special jackpot notification effect execution waiting state" and waits for a prize in the special figure 1 start port. Specifically, it waits for the hold addition command on the special figure 1 side to be sent. Waiting for the hold addition command is because, as described above, when one special figure is a big hit, a new fluctuation cannot be started by the other special figure, and the main control unit 20 gives a command related to the fluctuation display ( For example, it is not possible to send a fluctuation pattern specification command, etc.). For this reason, the hold addition command is optimal as a command that triggers the execution of the special jackpot notification effect.

When the effect control unit 24 receives the hold addition command on the special figure 1 side while waiting for the execution of the special jackpot notification effect, the effect control unit 24 displays the special jackpot notification effect. There are no particular restrictions on the content of the special jackpot announcement production, but the production content that shows that the back jackpot is in progress is preferable. For example, from the viewpoint of the above-mentioned kind instruction effect, at least the right-handed instruction effect 135 is greatly displayed on the LCD screen regardless of whether or not the waiting time for the role-ream gate is valid, and the player is given a right-handed instruction. It is preferable to encourage. It should be noted that, upon receiving the jackpot start command, it is possible to control the state of waiting for the execution of the special jackpot notification effect. In this case, it is possible to control the state of waiting for the execution of the special jackpot notification effect from the time when the back jackpot occurs.

(Backward fluctuation medium jackpot notice production: Fig. 31G)
Further, the same problem as in the game situation of FIGS. 31F (15) and (16) described above is the game situation of FIG. 31E (14), that is, when the back fluctuation is during the big hit fluctuation (during the fluctuation per 4 minutes during normal operation). Can also occur.

Specifically, in the game situation of FIG. 31E (14), the back fluctuation is a big hit fluctuation (normally, the fluctuation is per 4 minutes). In the game table in such a state, the main production target is the symbol variation display game 1, so the player normally strikes left and proceeds with the game while aiming for a prize in the middle start port 34. It is thought that it will continue. However, when the special figure 2 is a big hit fluctuation, the big hit lottery of the special figure 1 executed during the fluctuation becomes a "lottery without a big hit (loss lottery)", and no matter how much the middle start port 34 is won. Even if you let them win the big hit lottery, it will return to nothing. In such a case, it is preferable to promptly notify the player that the backside fluctuation currently being executed is a jackpot fluctuation.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the big hit related to the back fluctuation is in progress, it is possible to display the "back fluctuation medium big hit notice effect" that notifies that the back fluctuation is a big hit under a predetermined appearance condition. You can do it. The appearance condition of the big hit notice effect during the back fluctuation can be, for example, the following condition C.

(Condition C) A big hit (for example, one of 5 to 8 big hits) is won in the big hit lottery on the special figure side (for example, special figure 2 in the normal state) related to the back fluctuation (special figure 2 back big hit winning). When the special figure related to the jackpot is changing (when special figure 2 is changing (the symbol change display game 2 is running)), the starting port (for example, special figure 1) on the special figure side (special figure 1) related to table fluctuation , There was a prize in the middle start port 34) (condition C-1), or the change on the special figure side (special figure 1) related to the table change was started (condition C-2).
On condition that the above condition C is satisfied, a big hit notice effect during back fluctuation is made to appear. As for the above (condition C-1) and the above (condition C-2), either one of the conditions can be adopted.

To explain with a specific example, the main control unit 20 wins a big hit on the special figure 2 side during the normal state (special figure 2 back big hit win), and the "variation per 4 minutes during normal" related to the big hit winning. When is selected, a fluctuation pattern designation command capable of identifying the fluctuation is transmitted to the effect control unit 24. When the effect control unit 24 receives this fluctuation pattern designation command, the effect control unit 24 grasps that the current variation pattern is "variation per 4 minutes during normal operation", and "underside fluctuation" until the variation is completed. It is controlled to "waiting for execution of the jackpot notice effect". Then, when the above (condition C-1) is set as the appearance condition, the effect control unit 24 waits for the hold addition command on the special figure 1 side to be sent, and displays the above (condition C-2). If it is an output condition, wait for the fluctuation pattern specification command according to Special Figure 1 to be sent. The effect control unit 24 receives the hold addition command on the special figure 1 side (in the case of the above (condition C-1)) or the variation pattern specification command while waiting for the execution of the big hit notice effect during back fluctuation. In the case (in the case of the above (condition C-2)), a big hit notice effect during back fluctuation is made to appear. In addition, when the big hit notice effect during the back fluctuation is made to appear, it is possible to make the effect unexpected by the player by making it appear suddenly, and the degree of impact at the time of appearance is high. For example, after the liquid crystal screen is displayed in blackout (blackout effect), a big hit notice effect during back fluctuation is displayed.

(Specific example of big hit notice production during back fluctuation: Fig. 31G)
FIG. 31G shows an example of a production of a big hit notice effect during back fluctuation. Here, as in FIG. 31E (14), with respect to the special figure 1, 0 special figure 1 operation holding balls and the decorative symbol 131 are stopped and displayed (standby) with the lost symbol “135”. Regarding No. 2, it is assumed that the special figure 1 has two operation-holding balls and the special figure 2 is in a fluctuation per 4 minutes during normal times (a big hit fluctuation related to a back fluctuation). In FIG. 31G (14A), under this gaming situation, the middle start port 34 has a prize, and the above (condition C-1) or the above (condition C-2) is satisfied, and a big hit notice effect during back fluctuation appears. It shows the case. Therefore, the display contents of the dedicated display area 160 in FIG. 31G (14A) are as follows: special figure 1 number of operation-holding balls "0", special figure 1 in a fluctuating state "⇔", special figure 2 number of operation-holding balls "2". , Special figure 2 is in a fluctuating state (normally fluctuating per 4 minutes) “⇔”. Further, FIG. 31G (14B) shows a notice effect of a big hit in the back fluctuation when 30 seconds have passed from the state of FIG. 31G (14A).

Reference numeral 173 in FIG. 31G (14A) is a notice effect of a big hit during back fluctuation. The back-floating medium-big hit notice effect 173 is an effect content including a countdown timer 170, a message 171 and a plurality of disk images 133.

The countdown timer effect 170 displays the elapsed time (may be an approximate value) from the start of the jackpot fluctuation (variation per 4 minutes during normal operation) related to the back fluctuation (here, special figure 2), and how much it has ended at the present time. A countdown is displayed to notify the player of whether or not the player is there and when the fluctuation ends and the jackpot starts. In addition, the message 171 consists of "Super chance has arrived! Do not shoot the ball! Wait for the remaining 200 seconds without leaving your seat!" (A) The special symbol fluctuation display game currently being executed by the "Super chance has arrived!" Message. If 2 (back fluctuation) is a big hit and the winning expectation is high or correct, and (b) the ball is fired by the message "Don't fire the ball!", It may be a waste ball. It is possible to notify that (c) that if you leave your seat with the message "Don't leave your seat and wait for the remaining 200 seconds!", You may lose your jackpot right. In addition, a UFO (a plurality of disk images 133) of a large corps is displayed, and a cow image 134 is displayed in the UFO. This cow image 134 indicates that there is a high possibility that the jackpot 5 to 7 (normal time probability variation jackpot) has been won. In the present embodiment, when the cow image 134 appears in the UFO group, it is a jackpot. Indicates that one of 5 to 7 has been won.

In addition, the back fluctuation medium jackpot notice effect 173 is an aspect of the correct effect that notifies that the back variation is a jackpot variation (big hit winning state). Therefore, during the appearance of the big hit notice effect 173 during the back fluctuation, the notice effect (reach effect, etc.) and the look-ahead notice effect related to the symbol change display game 1 (front change side) on the special figure 1 side are not displayed, and the notice is given. Cancel all even if the production is running. However, the decorative symbol 131 according to the special figure 1 is hidden during the fluctuation, but at the end of the fluctuation, a small loss eye is stopped and displayed in the lower right corner, and the symbol variation display game 1 on the special figure 1 side is completed. It is designed to notify that (see FIG. 31G (14B)). Further, during the appearance of the big hit warning effect 173 during the back fluctuation, the "left-handed warning notification effect" and the "right-handed warning notification effect" are not executed.

<Processing on the main control unit side: FIGS. 8A to 30C>
Next, the game operation processing on the main control unit 20 side of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 8A to 30C. The processing on the main control unit 20 side is an infinite loop-shaped main processing (main control side main processing: FIGS. 8A and 8B) and a timer interrupt processing activated by a scheduled interrupt from the CTC (main control side timer interrupt). Processing: It is configured to include FIG. 13).

<10. Main control side main processing: FIG. 8A and FIG. 8B>
The main process on the main control unit 20 side (main process on the main control side) will be described with reference to FIGS. 8A and 8. 8A and 8 are flowcharts showing the details of the main processing on the main control unit 20 side. This main process is started when the system reset occurs when recovering from a power failure or power failure, or when the control program goes out of control, the watchdog timer (WDT) function is exerted and the CPU is activated. It may be forcibly reset (WDT reset). In any case, when the main process is started, the main control unit 20 (CPU201) first initially sets the register value of each unit including the CPU201, monitors the power supply state of the peripheral board, and the like. The initial setting process required for starting the game operation of (step S011) is executed. The initial setting process will be described later in FIG.

When the initial setting process of step S011 is completed, the information of the input port 1 (not shown) is acquired and set in the W register (step S012), the W register is subjected to a predetermined mask processing, and the "setting key switch 94 (not shown)" is applied. The input state (ON / OFF state) of the setting key signal), the RAM clear switch 98 (RAM clear signal), and the door open sensor 61 (door open signal) ”is acquired (step S013). The information of the input port 1 according to the present embodiment (information indicated by the lowest bit (b0) to the highest bit (b7)) is, as shown in the figure, an ON / OFF state (b0) of the setting key signal (setting key switch 94). ), ON / OFF state (b1) of RAM clear signal (RAM clear switch 98), ON / OFF state (b2) of door open signal (door open sensor 61), disconnection detection signal 1 (b3), disconnection detection signal 2 (B4), ON / OFF state (b5) of counting error signal (ball counting sensor 19b), ON / OFF state (b6) of supply shortage signal (supply shortage detection sensor 19a), power-on signal and payout communication confirmation signal. Is in the ON / OFF state (b7). For example, the RAM clear signal is a signal that determines whether or not to initialize a predetermined area of the RAM, and usually has a value corresponding to the ON / OFF state of the RAM clear switch 98 operated by the hall clerk. There is. The setting key signal is one of the signals for determining whether or not to shift to the setting change mode in which the set value can be changed, and like the RAM clear switch described above, the setting key normally operated by the hall clerk. It has a value corresponding to the ON / OFF state of the switch 94. Therefore, if the acquisition timing of the RAM clear signal or the setting change signal is delayed, the hall clerk releases the switch and misses the ON operation. However, in the present embodiment, in order to avoid such a situation. In addition, these signals are quickly acquired when the power is restored.

In the present embodiment, the combination of the ON / OFF state of the setting key switch 94, the RAM clear switch 98, and the door opening sensor 61, specifically, the bit pattern “W” of the lower 3 bits of the W register obtained in step S013. (X, y, z): “Setting change processing (step)” described later according to the transition processing state (branch determination condition) specified by “x, y, z = 1 (ON state) or 0 (OFF state)”. One of four types of processing is executed: "S022)", "setting confirmation processing (step S026)", "intra-area RAM clear processing (step S028)", and "backup recovery processing (step S027)". It has become like. The above transition processing state (branch determination condition) is as shown in FIG. 8C. In the case of W (1, 1, 1), it is the “setting change transition state”, and in the case of W (1, 0, 1 or 0). Specifies "setting confirmation transition state", "RAM clear transition state" for W (0, 1, 1 or 0), and "backup recovery migration state" for W (0, 0, 1 or 0). .. Since the setting key switch 94 and the RAM clear switch 98 are provided inside the gaming machine, the front frame 2 must be opened when operating these switches. Therefore, the door opening sensor 61 is usually used. , ON state (door open signal ON). Further, in the present embodiment, in order to reduce the control load, at least until the game start ready state is set (for example, before the process (CTC setting process) of step S035 described later is executed (main control side in FIG. 13). Even if the front frame 2 is in the open state (door open state), the door open error notification is executed (before the timer interrupt process is started) or at least before the loop process in steps S039 to S042 is executed). It is designed not to be done. However, when the door opening sensor 61 is in the ON state, information indicating that the door opening sensor 61 is ON is transmitted to the hall computer HC by a security signal.

(Setting change processing execution processing route: steps S020 to S023)
In the process of step S014, it is determined whether or not the bit pattern of the W register is W (1, 1, 1) corresponding to the setting change transition state (step S014). If it is W (1, 1, 1) (step S014: = W (1, 1, 1)), it is assumed that it is in the "setting change transition state", and first, it is specified that the setting is being changed. The setting changing command (BA5AH) ”is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 (step S020). When the effect control unit 24 receives the setting changing display command, the effect changing means is used to execute the setting changing effect to notify that the set value is being changed. For example, the decorative lamp 45 is turned on in all blue, the speaker 16 outputs an alarm sound of "setting is being changed ♪", and the liquid crystal display device 36 is displayed with the effect image of "setting is being changed".

Next, the in-region RAM initialization process (RAM clear process when the power is turned on) is executed (step S021). In this area RAM initialization process, of the area RAM for storing data used in normal game processing (game processing of a symbol variation display game, etc.), at least the entire area (normal data) excluding the set value storage area. The storage area) is initialized (cleared) to return the operating state of the game machine to the initial state (step S021). In the present embodiment, the program and storage area for processing related to performance display are different from the area (intra-area memory (first memory area)) accessed by the CPU 201 during normal game progress (out-of-area memory (second memory area)). Memory area)). Specifically, the main control unit 20 has a first RAM area (RAM in the area) that can store game data used in game processing related to normal game progress (for example, processing other than processing related to display of the performance display 99). ) And the second RAM area (out-of-area RAM) that can store the information display data used in the information display process (steps S033 and S040 in FIG. 8B, step S101 in FIG. 13, FIG. 28, etc.) that are not directly related to the progress of the game. ), The first ROM area (ROM in the area) for storing the game control program for executing the normal game process, and the information display control program for executing the information display process. It is configured to include a ROM 202 including two ROM areas (out-of-area ROM), and a CPU 201 that executes a game control operation based on a game control program and an information display control program. Here, the target of clearing is only the RAM area (RAM in the area) related to the memory in the area. Even if the data is in the RAM in the area, the data in the set value storage area (set value data) is not subject to clearing. Initialization and change of the set value data are performed in the setting change process (FIG. 11) described later.

In the above-mentioned "normal data storage area", various flags used mainly in step S039 of FIG. 8B and steps S081 to S085, S089 to S095, S097 to S100 and the like of the timer interrupt process of FIG. 13 to be described later. Various data such as operation timers and counters are stored (stored in a storage area corresponding to various data), and typical data include the following data.

Flags related to various functions for specifying the game state ("Public accessory open extension state flag" that specifies the operating state of the open extension function, "Normal symbol time saving state flag" that specifies the operating state of the normal symbol time saving function " , "Normal symbol probabilistic state flag" that specifies the operating state of the normal symbol probabilistic function, "Special symbol time saving state flag" that specifies the operating state of the special symbol time saving function, "Special symbol" that specifies the operating state of the special symbol probabilistic function Probability change state flag ")
"Special symbol time reduction counter" that counts the number of operations of the special symbol time reduction function, "Special symbol probability variation counter" that counts the number of operations of the special symbol probability change function,
Various data related to the big hit lottery result (big hit judgment flag, small hit judgment flag, special symbol judgment data, special stop symbol number, etc.)
"Various data related to the execution of the winning game (current number of rounds (number of special electric accessory operations), specified number of rounds, number of large winning openings, condition device operation flag, small hit medium flag, accessory continuous operation device operation flag"etc)",
"Parameters related to the operation state of the special symbol (special symbol stop 1 flag, special symbol stop 2 flag, changing flag, special symbol operation status, special symbol operation confirmation data, etc.)", "Various operation timers for managing the progress of the game (performance) (Excluding timers related to display) ",
"Game status data that can identify the current game status (game status number YJ)",
"Input / output data related to switches and sensors (excluding input data from sensors such as winning openings related to performance display)",
"Winning counter that counts the number of winning balls", "various error flags", etc.
In any case, when the in-region RAM initialization process (step S021) is executed, all data other than specific data (set value data, data used for displaying the base value) are set to the initial state. ..

Although details will be described later, a predetermined area of the RAM 203 related to the out-of-area memory (out-of-area RAM), that is, a RAM area related to performance information (measurement information storage area, performance display storage area, LED data setting related to the performance display 99). In the area, etc.)), the initialization process (out-of-area RAM clear process) is performed when a problem occurs in the RAM area in the performance display monitor process (step S101) of FIG. 28, which will be described later (step S101). See step S101 of FIG. 13, step S823 of FIG. 28, FIG. 30A, etc.). In this way, the work area of the RAM 203 is divided, and the RAM out of the area is not initialized (cleared) in the RAM initialization process at the time of turning on the power. As a result, even if the RAM initialization process is performed when the power is turned on, data such as the number of normal payouts, the number of normal outs, and the base value related to the performance display can be inherited across the power failure. It is possible.

Then, when the in-region RAM initialization process (step S022) is completed, the setting change process related to the change of the set value is then executed (step S022). Details of this setting change process will be described later with reference to FIG.

In addition, in order to determine that the setting change transition state (the setting key switch 94 and the RAM clear switch 98 are in the ON state (here, the door opening sensor 61 is in the ON state)), the gaming machine must be in the ON state. It is necessary to turn on the setting key switch 94 and the RAM clear switch 98 while turning off the power (main power supply) (power off), and turn on the power (power on) while the power is on. That is, in order to change the set value, the front frame 2 is opened, the setting key switch 94 is put into the set value change mode side (ON operation) while the power of the gaming machine is turned off, and the RAM clear switch 98 is used. It is necessary to turn on the power while keeping the ON operation. This is because when the setting key switch 94 or the RAM clear switch 98 is turned on after the power is turned on to the gaming machine, it takes at least several seconds from the power on to the ON operation, and during that time, the process of step S014 is performed. This is because it is determined that the setting key switch 94 or the RAM clear switch 98 is in the OFF state (step S014: ≠ W (1, 1, 1)), and the setting change process in step S022 is not executed. .. In this case, as shown in the figure, the processing route in which step S015 is executed is followed, and thereafter, the setting value change operation is prohibited. Therefore, when the setting value is to be changed and the power is turned on without turning on the setting key switch 94 or the RAM clear switch 98, the power is turned off and then the setting key switch 94 and the RAM clear switch 98 are turned on. The power may be turned on again while the operation is turned on. When the setting change process is executed, the allowable state of the setting change operation is maintained even if the RAM clear switch 98 is turned off.

When the setting change process (step S022) is completed, a customer waiting command (BA04H) is transmitted (step S023), and the process proceeds to step S032 shown in FIG. 8B described later. When the production control unit 24 receives the customer waiting command, the customer waiting standby production (customer waiting demo screen) for explaining the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and introducing it (demonstration) based on the predetermined appearance conditions. To appear. The processes after the process of step S032 will be described later for convenience of explanation.

Returning to the explanation of step S014, when the bit pattern of the W register is not W (1, 1, 1) corresponding to the setting change transition state (step S014: ≠ W (1, 1, 1)), then the RAM is abnormal. It is determined whether or not there is (step S015). The data of the RAM area to be determined here is the set value data of the set value storage area. In the present embodiment, six levels of setting values 1 to 6 are defined, and values of 00H to 05H are defined as data for specifying these set values 1 to 6. Therefore, the set value data (normal value) of any of 00H to 05H should be stored in the set value storage area. However, due to some trouble such as noise, the set value data may become an abnormal value other than 00H to 05H.

Therefore, in this process, the setting data is acquired from the setting value storage area, and when the acquired setting value is neither a value of 00H to 05H (when it is not a normal value), that is, the acquired setting value is set values 1 to 6. If none of the above applies (step S015: YES), it is assumed that an abnormality has occurred in the set value data (the set value data is not valid), and the process proceeds to step S018, and the power is turned on again as RAM error processing. The command (0B07H) is transmitted (step S018). When the effect control unit 24 receives the power re-on command, the effect means is used to execute the power re-on instruction effect. For example, the decorative lamp 45 is turned on in all red, an alarm sound is output from the speaker 16, and an effect image such as "Return the RAM error power and set the set value to 1" is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36. Display it. Then, the first power supply abnormality check process shown in FIG. 10A, which will be described later, is executed (step S019).

Further, in the determination process of step S015, when it is determined that the RAM is not abnormal (step S015: NO), it is determined whether or not the backup flag BF is a normal value (5AH) (step S016). The backup flag BF is set to 5AH (normal value) in the process of the second power supply abnormality check process (step S081 in FIG. 13) described later. When the power is turned on or when recovering from a power failure state, the content of the backup flag BF should be 5AH. However, when a problem occurs for some reason and the backup flag BF is not a normal value (00H, etc.) (step S016: ≠ 5AH), as in the case of the RAM abnormality described above (when the determination result in step S014 is YES). (Same as above), the process proceeds to step S018, the power supply re-on command (0B07H) is transmitted (step S018), and the first power supply abnormality check process is executed (step S019).

(10-2-1. First power supply abnormality check process: FIG. 10 (A))
The process of the first power supply abnormality check process (step S019) will be described. FIG. 10A is a flowchart showing the details of the first power supply abnormality check process.

In FIG. 10A, the CPU 201 first clears the WDT (step S056) and exits the first power supply abnormality check process unless it confirms the ON state of the power supply abnormality signal indicating a power failure (step S057: NO). .. That is, when an abnormality (RAM error) occurs in the stored contents of the RAM 203, the WDT clear process (step S056) and the power failure confirmation process (step S057) are repeated indefinitely under a power supply re-on wait state. Therefore, when a RAM error occurs, the process related to the game progress does not proceed thereafter, and the game is played until the power is turned on again (in the case of the present embodiment, until the setting change process of step S022 is executed). The operation will be stopped (game stop processing). When a RAM error occurs, the WDT clear process is executed until a power supply abnormality signal is confirmed, and the WDT reset does not occur at the timing when the infinite loop process is repeated.

When the ON state of the power supply abnormality signal is confirmed (step S057: YES), the process returns to the process of step S011 in FIG. 8A, and the processes after step S011 are sequentially executed in the same manner as when the power is turned on.

However, in the present embodiment, even if a RAM error such as a set value data error (RAM error) or a backup error (backup flag error) occurs, the contents of the RAM 203 are cleared in the subsequent processing (steps S018 to S019). No processing is performed. Therefore, if the set value data and backup data remain in the damaged state, even if the power is turned on again, the damaged data remains, and when the power is turned on, the setting change transition state (W register) = W (1, 1, 1))), steps S018 to S019 will be executed again. Therefore, once a RAM error occurs, the RAM error is not resolved even if the power is simply turned on again, and the RAM error is not resolved unless the setting change process in step S022 is executed. Therefore, in step S018, the power re-turning command is transmitted, and the effect control unit 24 that receives the command causes the liquid crystal display device 36 to "re-turn the RAM error power supply" as a RAM error notification (power re-power-on instruction effect). Please set the set value to 1 ”and display an effect image to prompt the hall clerk to resolve the RAM error.

Returning to the description of step S015 of FIG. 8A. If the RAM is not abnormal (step S015: NO) and the backup flag BF is a normal value (5AH) (step S016: = 5AH), the W register is subjected to a predetermined mask processing, and the setting key switch 94 (setting) is performed. The input information of the key signal) and the RAM clear switch 98 (RAM clear signal) is acquired (step S017).

(Backup restoration processing execution processing route: step S24 → S027)
Next, with reference to FIG. 8B, it is determined whether or not the bit pattern of the W register is W (0, 0) corresponding to the backup return transition state (step S024). When it is W (0,0) (step S024: = W (0,0)), it is assumed that it is a "backup recovery transition state (see FIG. 8C)", and it is based on the backed up game information immediately before the power is cut off. The backup restoration process for restarting the game is executed (step S27).

In this backup recovery process, first, the stack pointer before the power is cut off is restored based on the RAM storage contents (backup data saved at the time of power failure) saved by the backup function (not shown) at the time of power failure. , Performs the return processing necessary for starting the game from the processing state when the power is cut off, and restores the game operation when the power is cut off (game return means). Further, here, predetermined game information (for example, special figure 1 and special figure 2 operation hold ball (hold data) when the power is cut off, information on the winning game, game state information, etc.) is acquired from the backup data, and the information is obtained. One or a plurality of types of game return commands included are transmitted to the effect control unit 24. When the effect control unit 24 receives the game return command, it grasps the game progress state when the power is cut off and returns to the effect state when the power is cut off, based on the game information included in the command. Then, when the restoration process is completed, the power failure restoration display command (BA03H) is transmitted to the effect control unit 24, and the backup restoration process is completed. When the effect control unit 24 receives the power failure recovery display command, the effect means is used to display a "recovery completion effect" that notifies that the restoration is completed. For example, the liquid crystal display device 36 is displayed with an effect image such as "Resume from power failure. Please restart the game." When the backup restoration process is completed, the process proceeds to step S032 described later.

(RAM clear processing execution processing route: steps S25 → S028 to S030)
Returning to the description of step S024 of FIG. 8B, when the bit pattern of the W register is not W (0, 0) corresponding to the backup return transition state (step S024: ≠ W (0, 0)), then the W register It is determined whether or not the bit pattern is W (0, 1) corresponding to the RAM clear transition state (step S025). When it is W (0, 1) (step S025: = W (0, 1)), it is assumed that it is in the “RAM clear transition state (see FIG. 8C)”, and the in-region RAM processing process is executed (step S028). .. The in-region RAM processing process in step S028 is a process common to the in-area RAM processing process in step S021. Next, the RAM clear command (BA20H) and the customer waiting command (BA04H) are sequentially transmitted to the effect control unit 24 (step S029), and the fact that the RAM has been cleared is notified to the surroundings (including notification to the hall computer HC). A predetermined notification time (for example, 30 seconds) is set in the RAM clear notification timer as the time for this (step S030). When the effect control unit 24 receives the RAM clear command, the effect mode is set to the "normal effect mode" in the initial state, the effect state is returned to the initial state, and an error corresponding to the RAM clear is performed by using the effect means. The notification (RAM clear notification effect) is executed for 30 seconds, which is the same as the set time of the notification timer. For example, the decorative lamp 45 is turned on in all red, an alarm sound at the time of RAM clear is output from the speaker 16, and an effect image such as "RAM is being cleared" is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36. Further, in step S029, the RAM clear command is transmitted and the customer waiting command is transmitted. However, at this timing, the customer waiting standby effect is not executed, the RAM clear notification is executed for 30 seconds, and then the customer waiting standby is executed. Perform the production. For example, the alarm sound is faded out, and a customer waiting demo screen or the like is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36. In the present embodiment, the RAM clear notification effect (RAM clear notification) is executed with the highest priority.

As already described, in the in-area RAM initialization process (steps S021 and S028) according to the present embodiment, the set value storage area (set value data) in the in-area RAM is not initialized, and the set value data Initialization / change (including clearing of the backup flag BF) is performed by the setting change process (FIG. 11) described later. Therefore, if the in-region RAM initialization process of step S028 (the same applies when the set value is not changed after the initialization of step S021 (when the same setting is changed)) is simply executed, the setting is made. The value remains the same as when the power was cut off last time, but the game is started in the initialized state (normal state and initial state such as no hold data) such as the game state and hold data. .. As a result, for example, when it is desired to inherit only the set value from the business on the previous day, the clearing work can be completed by a simple operation of ON / OFF operation of the RAM clear switch 98 without having to perform the setting change operation with many work processes. There is an advantage.

(Setting confirmation processing execution processing route: step S24 → S026)
On the other hand, when the bit pattern of the W register is not W (0, 1) corresponding to the RAM clear transition state (step S025: = W (1, 0)), that is, "setting confirmation transition state (see FIG. 8C)". When it is W (1, 0) corresponding to (step S026), the setting confirmation process related to the setting value confirmation work is executed (step S026). The details of this setting confirmation process will be described later in FIG. When the above setting confirmation process is completed, the backup restoration process (step S027) is executed, and the process proceeds to step S032.

As described above, "setting change processing (step S022)" and "setting confirmation processing (step S026)" are performed according to the combination of the ON / OFF state of the setting key switch 94, the RAM clear switch 98, and the door opening sensor 61. , "Intra-area RAM clear processing (step S028)" or "backup recovery processing (step S027)" is executed, and when the processing is completed, the contents of all the registers are saved (step S032). The operation confirmation timer setting process (FIG. 8D) described later is executed (step S033), and the contents of all the saved registers are restored (step S034).

(10-2-2. Operation check timer setting process: Fig. 8D)
The process of the operation confirmation timer setting process (step S033) will be described. FIG. 8D is a flowchart showing the details of the operation confirmation timer setting process. In this operation confirmation timer setting process, the initial setting required for the confirmation operation when the power of the performance indicator 99 is turned on is performed. In the present embodiment, in order to check the operation of the performance indicator 99 as part of the process at the time of power-on, the four 7-segment LEDs are fully lit for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) after the power is turned on. The "operation confirmation display" that blinks all the lights and turns off periodically is performed. The process related to the operation check display of the performance indicator 99 (operation check process) is performed during the performance display monitor process in the main control side timer interrupt process (FIG. 13) described later (step S101 in FIG. 13, FIG. 28, step S833, FIG. 30B).

Here, after completing a series of power-on processes in steps S011 to S030, the timer interrupt process (FIG. 13) is started in step S035, but when the power is turned on to detect a switch input or the like. When the timer interrupt process is started from, the performance display monitor process is also executed from the time the power is turned on, and if the operation check timer setting process is executed in the dark clouds, the operation check display is displayed while checking the settings or changing the settings. Is executed and the operation check becomes sparse. In addition, when the power is turned on or the system is reset, various power-on processes such as setting confirmation processing, setting change processing, and backup restoration processing can be executed, so the operation is confirmed in the dark clouds. If the timer setting process is executed, the process becomes complicated and there is a possibility that the game start state cannot be smoothly adjusted. It may also lead to a control burden. Further, in the present embodiment, the time interval of the timer interrupt process is about 4 ms, but depending on the control program, the interrupt time interval may be executed in an extremely short time such as about 1 ms. If is executed, the base value may be displayed in advance of the operation confirmation display, and the operation check may become complicated. In consideration of these various circumstances, it is preferable to execute the operation confirmation timer setting process at least before the timer interrupt process is started (before step S035), and when the power is turned on in a series of steps S011 to S030. It is more preferable to execute the timer interrupt process in step S035 after the process is completed and before the timer interrupt process is started. Therefore, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 8B, after a series of power-on processing including setting confirmation processing, backup restoration processing, setting change processing, in-area RAM clear processing, etc. is completed, the timer interrupt processing is started. The operation confirmation timer setting process is performed before the CTC setting process related to the above.

Returning to the description of FIG. 8D, the CPU 201 first stores a stack pointer that identifies the stack area in a predetermined area (step S881). Next, an initial value (for example, 5000 ms) is set in the operation confirmation timer that counts the operation confirmation time of the performance indicator 99 (step S882), and the blinking timer that counts the blinking cycle of the performance indicator 99 is cleared to zero (blinking). Timer ← 0) (step S883). Then, the stack pointer is returned and the operation confirmation timer setting process is exited.

After completing the processes of steps S032 to S034 related to the operation check, the CTC setting process for generating the timer interrupt periodically every 4 ms is then performed (step S035). After that, the interrupt request signal to the interrupt controller is periodically output, and the main control side timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 13 is executed. Details will be described later, but in the timer interrupt processing on the main control side, input management processing for monitoring the ON / OFF state of switches, LED management processing for LED display control, control processing for a symbol variation display game, and control of a winning game Various processes related to the progress of the game, such as processes, are executed.

Next, assuming that the game start ready state is ready, the launch control signal (launch permission signal ES) is set from the OFF state to the ON state (step S036). Specifically, a launch control signal that permits the launch operation of the launch device 32 is output to the payout control board 29. When the payout control board 29 receives the launch control signal, it determines that the launch is permitted, outputs the launch control signal to the launch control board 28, and allows the launch operation by the launch device 32. As a result, it is controlled from the firing operation prohibited state to the firing operation allowable state, and the game ball can be launched by the launch operation handle 15. In the present embodiment, the payout control board 29 receives the launch control signal from the main control unit 20 to allow the launch operation, that is, the launch permission instruction information from the main control unit 20 is transmitted through the payout control board 29. Although it is configured to be indirectly sent to the launch control board 28, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the launch control signal by the main control unit 20 may be directly output to the launch control board 28 to allow the launch operation.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 8A and 8B, the launch control signal is not output before the process of step S035 is executed (the launch permission signal is controlled to the OFF state during the initial setting process of step S011). (See step S046 of FIG. 9 described later)), that is, the firing is prohibited. Therefore, for example, when performing the setting change operation, the launch control signal is not output until the setting change process (step S022) is completed (controlled to the OFF state), and the launch control signal is output after the setting change process is completed. (Control the launch permission signal to the ON state) and control the launch permission state.

Next, the game start command (BA77H) is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 (step S037). When the effect control unit 24 receives the game start command, it executes an initial operation (initialization operation) at the time of turning on the power of the movable body accessory such as the clock-type accessory 80 and the flower-shaped accessory 90. Then, when a series of power-on processing (S011 to S038: game start pre-processing at power-on) is completed, the process proceeds to the normal game progress-related game processing (loop processing in steps S038 to S041). It will be controlled so that the progress of the game is possible.

Next, various random number update processes are executed (step S039) with the CPU set to the interrupt disabled state (step S038). In this various random number update process, various software random numbers (random numbers circulating in a predetermined numerical range by increment processing) used in the special symbol variation display game and the normal symbol variation display game are updated. For example, a special symbol judgment random number used for a symbol lottery, a random number related to an auxiliary hit lottery (auxiliary hit judgment random number used for a winning lottery per auxiliary, and a normal symbol judgment used for a symbol lottery per auxiliary). Random numbers used to change the initial value (start value) of random numbers (random numbers) (initial value random numbers for special symbol judgment, initial value random numbers for auxiliary hit judgment, etc.), random numbers for fluctuation patterns used for selecting fluctuation patterns, etc. Update.

After completing the various random number update processes (step S039), the performance display monitor aggregation division process is then executed (step S040). In this performance display monitor aggregation division process, a base value calculation process for displaying on the performance display 99 is executed.

As described above, the program and storage area for processing related to performance display are stored in an out-of-area memory (second memory area) different from the in-area memory (first memory area) accessed by the CPU 201 during normal game progress. It is stipulated. Therefore, the CPU 201 first saves the stack pointer on the memory side in the area and sets the stack pointer on the memory side outside the area.

Next, after executing the out-of-area RAM check process shown in FIG. 30A described later, it was obtained during the performance display monitor process during the timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 13 (see step S101 and step S828 of FIG. 28 described later). Based on the input data of the middle start port sensor 34a, the right start port sensor 33a, the lower right start port sensor 35a, the upper prize opening sensor 42a, the lower prize opening sensor 52a, the general winning opening sensor 43a, and the OUT monitoring switch 49a. , Check whether there is a prize in each winning opening, whether there is a game ball discharged, etc.

When the current game state is the normal state, if winning is confirmed in any of the winning openings, the number of winning balls of the winning opening that has won is added to the number of payouts at the normal time (during the normal state). (Prize ball addition process), the number of outs in the normal state and the number of outs in all states are added by 1 (out ball number addition process), and the current count values are updated respectively. However, if the winning is not confirmed and the input to the OUT monitoring switch 49a is confirmed, 1 is added only to the number of outs in the normal state and the number of outs in all states, and these count values are updated (out ball in the normal state). Number addition processing). On the other hand, if the current game state is not the normal state (if it is in the probability change state, the time saving state, or the latent state), even if the winning is confirmed in any of the winning openings, the number of payouts in the normal time will be calculated. Without adding the number of prize balls, only the number of outs in all states is added by +1. Also, if the winning is not confirmed and the input to the OUT monitoring switch 49a is confirmed, only the number of outs in all states is added by 1. Out ball number addition processing in the abnormal state).

Then, the base value is calculated based on the updated normal payout number and normal out number, that is, the latest normal payout number and normal out number, and the value is stored in the measurement information storage area of the RAM 203. .. Whether or not it is in the normal state is determined by whether or not the normal state determination flag (see steps S827 to S828 during the performance display monitor processing in FIG. 28), which will be described later, is in the ON state (5AH). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the game state number YJ managed by the in-region RAM may be directly acquired and the current game state may be determined from the value of YJ.

Here, "during a big hit game" is basically the same "low accuracy / no electric support" as in the normal state, but since it is a game state different from the normal state, it is above in measuring the base value. The number of prize balls in the grand prize opening 40 is excluded from the counting target (the detection information of the upper winning opening sensor 42a is excluded from the measurement target). On the other hand, the normal state includes the small hit game. This is because there is no internal transition control of the gaming state when a small hit is won, and the gaming state during the small hit game continues as it is at the time of the winning. Therefore, if the current gaming state is the normal state, the normal state remains during the small hit game, and the number of prize balls of the lower prize opening 50 in the normal state is included in the counting target of the base value (lower prize). The detection information of the mouth sensor 52a is not excluded from the measurement target). In the case of the present embodiment, the big winning opening and the small hit have different large winning openings to be opened. However, for example, when a common large winning opening is used (for example, there is one large winning opening). In the case), in order to exclude the winning of the big winning opening during the big hit game, it is sufficient to judge whether or not it is in the normal state depending on whether or not the condition device is activated. Specifically, when the condition device is operating, even if the winning to the large winning opening is confirmed, this is excluded from the counting target, and when the condition device is not operating (normal state and small hit). (Applicable during the game) When it is confirmed that a prize has been won in the large prize opening, this may be counted and the number of prize balls may be added to the number of payouts at normal times.

In addition, from the time when the power is turned on for the first time or when the out-of-area RAM is all cleared, until the total number of out-of-areas reaches a predetermined number (for example, 299), only the number of out-of-areas is counted as a test section, and the base value, etc. Does not measure. This is because when a game machine is installed in a pachinko hall for the first time, as an operation test, for example, a game ball may be maintained at the starting port to check the operation or a trial hit may be performed. This is to exclude the prize balls and out balls from the measurement target. Therefore, the first measurement (first measurement) starts after the end of the test section.

If the total number of out-of-state data reaches a predetermined specified number (60,000 in this case) after the first (first) measurement is started, the base value (first base value) at this point is displayed as the performance of the RAM 203. It is stored in the storage area, and the current number of payouts during normal operation, the number of outs during normal operation, and the number of outs in all states are cleared to zero for the second measurement (measurement data initialization process). That is, every time the specified number of 60,000 is counted, the current base value is stored, and for the next measurement of the base value, the normal payout number, the normal out number, and the total state out number during measurement are stored. Clear to zero.

(Specific example of display mode of performance display 99)
A specific example of the display mode of the performance display 99 will be described. For example, when the total number of out states reaches 60,000, in the case where the base value this time is '35', when displaying the real-time base value, 4-digit character information (identification display unit (identification segment) + "BL.00" is displayed as the base display unit (ratio segment)) (the base value is 0 here because it is cleared to zero by the above-mentioned measurement data initialization process), and when displaying the history base value, " b6.35 ”will be lit and displayed.

(During the test section)
In the above test section, when displaying the real-time base value in order to notify that the current measurement is the test section, "bL." Is blinked on the identification display unit and "bL." Is displayed on the base display unit. --- "is lit and displayed. When displaying the history base value, "b6." Is blinked on the identification display unit and "---" is lit on the base display unit.

(At the time of initial measurement: N = 1)
At the time of the first measurement, the history base value is not saved, so when displaying the real-time base value, "bL. **"('**' is the base value currently being measured) is displayed. When displaying the history base value, "b6 .--" is displayed. However, the identification display unit "b6." Is blinking to notify that it is the first measurement.

(When measuring from the next time onward: N ≧ 2)
In addition, for the measurement after the next time (N ≧ 2), the real-time base value varies from the time when the zero is cleared until the number of all state outs reaches a predetermined number (for example, 6000) for the next measurement. When displaying the real-time base value, "bL." Is blinked on the identification display unit, and the real-time base value is lit and displayed on the base display unit as it is. When displaying the history base value, "b6. **"('**' is the previous base value) is displayed. However, in the case of the first time (N = 1), the history base value is not saved, so when displaying the history base value, "b6 .--" is displayed, but "b6." In the identification display unit is displayed. Is designed to blink.

When the performance display monitor aggregation division process (step S041) is completed, the interrupt enabled state is set (step S042), the process returns to the process of step S039, and the processes of steps S039 to S042 are repeated thereafter (main loop process). .. The CPU 201 repeatedly executes various random number update processes and performance display monitor aggregation / division processes, except during the timer interrupt process that is intermittently executed.

(10-1. Initial setting process: Fig. 9)
Next, the initial setting process (step S011) in FIG. 8A will be described. FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing the details of the initial setting process.

In FIG. 9, when a system reset or WDT reset occurs, the CPU 201 first sets itself to the interrupt disabled state (step S043) and sets the stack pointer (step S044) as the initial setting at startup. Next, the protected and prohibited areas of the RAM are invalidated in preparation for the use of the stack in the first power supply abnormality check process (S045). RAM protection is a function for preventing rewriting of RAM due to malfunction or erroneous operation. The operation of RAM protection is as follows. After the system reset or WDT reset occurs, RAM protection is enabled (RAM protect state). Data can be read from the RAM when RAM protection is enabled, but data cannot be written to the RAM. Therefore, when writing data to RAM, it is necessary to disable RAM protection. In addition, when the prohibited area is valid, if there is an access to a preset address range (for example, a program related to the change setting of the set value), it is assumed that the access is outside the specified area, and the IAT generation signal is generated from the IAT circuit. Is output and an IAT reset occurs (running prohibition function outside the designated area (IAT function)), but this IAT reset does not occur when the setting of the prohibited area is invalidated. When an IAT reset occurs, only the CPU core is reset and the internal functions are not reset, but when a system reset or WDT reset occurs, all internal functions including the CPU core are reset. That is, even if an IAT reset occurs, the RAM is not protected, and the CTC and WDT are not initialized, but when a system reset or WDT reset occurs, the RAM is protected (RAM is protected). It is set and the CTC and WDT are initialized. However, even if any of the system reset, the WDT reset, and the IAT reset is performed, the stored contents of the RAM do not change. In addition, when an IAT reset occurs, the system may be reset on the assumption that an invalid program has been executed.

Next, in consideration of the possibility that the power is turned off / on during the setting change process described later, the security signal output from the frame external terminal board 21 is turned off, and the set value on the setting display 97 is set. In order to clear the display data related to the display and prevent an inadvertent launch control signal (launch permission signal) from being output, the launch permission signal is also set to the OFF state (step 046).

Next, the first power supply abnormality check process (FIG. 10 (A)) is executed (step S047). This first power supply abnormality check process is the same process as in step S019 already described.

Next, various initial setting processes are executed (step S048). Here, the setting process for initializing the register value inside the CPU including each part of the microcomputer, the interrupt mode setting process for setting the predetermined interrupt mode (interrupt mode 2), the interrupt priority setting process, and the internal hard random number. Executes various setting processes at power-on, such as internal hard random number setting process that activates the circuit.

Next, the start-up waiting time of the sub control board (effect control unit 24) is set (step S049). Then, until the sub-board start-up waiting time elapses (step S052: = 0), the sub-board start-up wait time subtraction process (sub-board start-up wait time -1) (step S050) and the first power supply abnormality check process (step S051) ) Is repeatedly executed (step S052: ≠ 0). The activation of the effect control unit 24 is completed by the elapse of the sub-board activation waiting time.

When the waiting time for starting the sub-board has elapsed (step S052: = 0), the standby screen display command (BA01H) is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 (step S053). When the effect control unit 24 receives the standby screen display command, the effect means is used to display the standby effect when the power is turned on. For example, the liquid crystal display device 36 is made to display an effect image such as "Please Wait".

Next, while executing the first power supply abnormality check process (step S054), it waits for the power-on signal from the payout control board 29 to be sent (steps S054 to S055). This power-on signal is a signal that is output when the payout control board 29 starts up normally, and the CPU 201 waits until the payout control board 29 starts up normally. As a result, if the payout control board 29 is not functioning normally due to some trouble, the game operation is not started only by repeating the processes of steps S054 to S055. Then, when the above power-on signal is confirmed (step S055: ON), the initial setting process is exited, and the process of step S012 of the main control side main process of FIG. 8A is executed.

(10-3. Setting change process: Fig. 11)
Next, the setting change process (step S024) in FIG. 8A will be described. FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing the details of the setting change process. This process is executed when the setting key switch 94, the RAM clear switch 98, and the door open sensor 61 are all in the ON state of the setting change transition state (in the case of W (1, 1, 1)). ..

In FIG. 11, the CPU 201 first executes the input data creation process (step S901). In this input data creation process, input information of the RAM clear switch 98, the setting change switch 95, the setting key switch 95, etc. is acquired. For example, it is called from the input data creation process (S082 in FIG. 13) in the timer interrupt process. It has become like.

Next, the set value Nc (current set value data) stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 203 is acquired (in the present embodiment, the value of the set value data is acquired in a predetermined register as the setting work value). , It is determined whether or not the set value Nc is a normal value (any value of 00H to 05H) (step S903). When the acquired set value Nc is neither a value of 00H to 05H (when it is not a normal value), that is, when the acquired set value Nc does not correspond to any of the set values 1 to 6 (step S903: NO). , Assuming that an abnormality (RAM abnormality) has occurred in the set value data, the set value data is initialized (step S904). Here, 00H (setting 1) corresponding to setting 1 is set to the set value Nc (setting work value) (set value Nc ← 00H).

When the set value Nc is a normal value (step S903: YES), or after executing the initialization process (set value Nc ← 00H) for the set value data in step S904, then, in FIG. 10 (A), The first power supply abnormality check process is executed (step S905).

Next, the security signal is output from the frame external terminal board 21 (step S906), and then the chattering prevention waiting time (for example, about 0.12 ms) is set (step S907). Then, while executing the subtraction process of the chattering prevention waiting time (step S908), it waits for the chattering prevention waiting time to elapse (step S909: NO). In the setting change processing of the present embodiment, the processing of steps S905 to S916 is repeated at high speed until the setting completion change switch 96 is turned off (step S916: YES), and whether or not there is a setting change operation each time, that is, whether or not there is a setting change operation. Although it is determined whether or not the setting change switch 95 has changed from OFF to ON, erroneous detection due to chattering of the setting change switch 95 can be prevented by providing a chattering prevention waiting time in steps S907 to S909. ..

If the chattering prevention waiting time becomes 0 (step S909: YES), the input data creation process is executed (step S910), and whether or not the setting change switch 95 is in the ON state, that is, whether or not there is a setting change operation. Is determined (step S911). In the present embodiment, when the ON edge of the setting change switch 95 is detected, it is determined that the setting change operation has been performed. In the present embodiment, the input data creation process for acquiring the input information of the setting change switch 95 is executed not only in step S910 immediately before step S911 but also in step S901 at the start of the setting change process. This is because when the setting change process is started while the setting change switch 95 is being pressed, even if the ON edge of the setting change switch 95 suddenly stands up, it is detected empty in step S910. This is to prevent the determination process in step S911 from being affected.

If the setting change switch 95 is not in the ON state (step S9111: NO), it is assumed that there is no setting change operation, and the process proceeds to step S915. On the other hand, when the setting change switch 95 is in the ON state (step S9111: NO), the current set value Nc is changed (updated) on the assumption that the setting change operation has been performed (step S912). As described above, the set value at the time of the change operation is switched so as to circulate in the range of the settings 1 to 6 each time the setting change switch 95 is operated. Then, when the processing of step S912 is completed, it is determined again whether or not the set value data is a normal value (step S913), and if it is not a normal value (step S913: NO), the set value Nc is set to 1 00H (setting 1) corresponding to is set (set value Nc ← 00H) (step S914).

Next, based on the current set value Nc, the setting display data to be displayed on the setting display 97 is created and output (step S915). As a result, the setting display 97 displays the current setting value during the setting change operation. The setting value displayed during the setting change operation is not the setting information (value of the setting value data in the setting value storage area) at that time, but a provisional setting value before the setting is confirmed.

When the process of step S915 is completed, it is determined whether or not the setting change completion switch 96 is in the ON state, that is, whether or not the setting change operation is completed (step S916). If the setting change completion switch 96 is not in the ON state (step S916: NO), it is assumed that the setting change operation has not been completed, the process proceeds to step S905, and thereafter, step S905 until the setting change completion switch 96 is in the ON state. -The process of step S916 is repeatedly executed.

When the setting change completion switch 96 is turned on (step S916: YES), assuming that the set value is confirmed, the current set value Nc (setting work value held in the register) is saved in the set value storage area of the RAM 203. At the same time (step S917), the set value confirmation display process is executed (step S918). In this setting value confirmation display process, the current setting display data is cleared and the setting confirmation LED lighting display data is output. The setting confirmation LED of the present embodiment has the function of the DP section (decimal point) of the setting display 97, which is a 7-segment LED, and when the setting change completion switch 96 is turned on, the set value being displayed disappears. , The DP unit lights up, and it is notified that the set value has been confirmed.

Next, the backup flag BF is cleared (step S919), the output of the security signal is stopped (step S920), and the setting change completion command (BA09H) is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 (step S921). When the effect control unit 24 receives the setting change completion command, the effect during setting change being executed is terminated, and the effect for completing the setting change is executed for a predetermined time (here, 30 seconds). For example, the decorative lamp 45 is turned on in all red, the setting change completion sound (voice such as "setting has been changed ♪") is output from the speaker 16, and the liquid crystal display device 36 has "setting changed" or the like. Display the effect image (setting change completion screen). Since the in-area RAM clear process (step S021 in FIG. 8A) is executed when the setting change operation is performed, an error notification (RAM clear notification effect) corresponding to RAM clear is performed instead of the setting change completion effect. You may go. For example, the setting change completion effect may be the same effect mode as the RAM clear notification effect (error notification mode when the in-region RAM clear process of step S028 is executed). Further, the RAM clear notification effect and the setting change completion effect may be performed in duplicate. For example, the liquid crystal display device 36 can simultaneously display displays such as "settings have been changed" and "RAM is being cleared".

Then, wait until the setting key switch 94 is turned off (step S922: NO), and when the OFF state of the setting key switch 94 is confirmed (step S922: YES), turn off the setting confirmation LED (DP unit). , Exit the setting change process. This completes a series of setting change operations. In the present embodiment, the setting change completion effect is displayed for a predetermined time (30 seconds) regardless of whether or not the setting key switch 94 is in the OFF state. After that, the process returns to the main process on the main control side of FIG. 8A, and the customer waiting command is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 (step S023).

After the setting key switch 94 is turned off, the front frame 2 is simply opened. Therefore, if the door opening error is configured to be able to be notified in the processing at the time of power-on (at least before entering the loop processing of S038 to S041), the door opening error notification (for example, after the setting change completion effect is completed) is completed. , The decorative lamp 45 blinks in red, and the door opening alarm sound is output from the speaker 16). This is because it is preferable to notify the setting change completion effect with priority over the door opening error in order to notify that a new setting value has been selected and determined (including switching to the same setting value). .. In addition, since the setting change completion effect notifies that the setting change operation has been completed (the setting value has been changed), the effect is different from these so as not to be confused with the door opening error notification or the setting changing effect. It is preferable to use the mode (notification mode).

By the way, after the setting change operation is completed, the customer waiting command is transmitted following the setting change completion command (step S921, step S023 in FIG. 8A), but the effect control unit 24 ends the setting change completion effect. The customer waiting standby effect (customer waiting demo screen, etc.) is not executed until it is done. In the case of the present embodiment, after the setting change completion effect is completed, the screen at the normal time is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36 (for example, the background image of the normal effect mode corresponding to the normal state is displayed, and the decorative design is displayed. A specific combination of symbols (for example, "7", "3", "1") is displayed), and when a predetermined time has passed without starting the game without winning a prize at the starting port from this display state. (For example, 180 seconds have passed), the customer waiting standby effect (customer waiting demo screen) is executed.

Although the dedicated setting change switch 95 is provided in the present embodiment, the RAM clear switch 98 may be configured to be usable as the setting change switch. Further, in the present embodiment, the dedicated setting change completion switch 96 is provided, but the setting key switch 94 may be configured to be usable as the setting change completion switch. In this case, it is not necessary to provide the process of step S922, which leads to reduction of the control load. Further, a sensor for detecting a game ball (for example, sensors 33a, 34a. 35a, 42a, 52a, 43a, 49a, etc.) may function as a setting change completion switch. In this case, it may be determined that the set value has been determined when the sensor detects the game ball (ON state) by, for example, maintaining the game ball in the winning opening in the determination process of step S916. ..

(10-4. Setting confirmation process: Fig. 12)
Next, the setting confirmation process (step S026) in FIG. 8B will be described. FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing the details of the setting change process. This process is a process executed when the setting key switch 94 is in the setting confirmation transition state (in the case of W (1, 0)) of the setting key switch 94 and the RAM clear switch 98.

In FIG. 12, the CPU 201 first transmits a setting confirmation command (E021H) to the effect control unit 24. When the effect control unit 24 receives the command during setting confirmation, the effect during setting confirmation is executed by using the effect means (step S931). For example, an effect image such as "setting is being confirmed" is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36. By the way, when confirming the set value, first the front frame 2 is opened and then the setting key switch 94 is turned ON (ON state). Here, when the door opening error is configured to be notified, the door opening error notification occurs prior to the setting confirmation effect. On the other hand, when the confirmation of the set value is finished, conversely, the setting key switch 94 is first turned off (OFF state), and then the front frame 2 is closed (even if the setting confirmation is completed, the front frame is closed. A door opening error has occurred until 2 is closed). That is, in any case, a door opening error occurs from the start of confirmation of the set value to the completion of the confirmation. Therefore, the notification priority of the setting confirmation effect is set higher than the door opening error notification, only the setting confirmation effect is displayed while the setting key switch 94 is ON, and after the setting key switch 94 is OFF, it is displayed again. , A door open error may appear. Of course, in order to clarify the door opening error and the fact that the setting confirmation work is in progress, the fact that the setting is being confirmed and the fact that the door is being opened may be notified in duplicate.

Next, the set value data is acquired from the set value storage area of the RAM 203 (step S932).

Next, the first power supply abnormality check process (FIG. 10 (A)) is executed (step S933), and it is determined whether or not the setting key switch 94 is in the ON state (step S934). When the setting key switch 94 is in the ON state, the setting is being confirmed. In this case (step S934: YES), a security signal is output (step S935), set value data is acquired from the set value storage area of the RAM 203, and setting display data based on the set value data is created (step). S936), the setting display data is output (step S937). As a result, the current set value (here, the set value being confirmed, which is different from the setting change process) is displayed on the setting display 99. After that, the processes of steps S933 to S937 are repeatedly executed until the setting key switch 94 is turned off, that is, until the setting confirmation is completed.

Then, when the setting key switch 94 is turned off (step S934: NO), the setting display data is cleared and the setting value displayed on the setting display 99 is displayed as the setting confirmation end process. The light is turned off (step S938), the output of the security signal is stopped (step S939), and the setting confirmation end command (E022H) is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 (step S940). When the effect control unit 24 receives the setting confirmation end command, the effect during setting confirmation is terminated. As a result, a series of setting confirmation periods have ended.

<13. Main control side timer interrupt process: FIG. 13>
Next, the timer interrupt process on the main control side will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process on the main control side. This main control side timer interrupt process is started by an interrupt from the CTC at regular time intervals (about 4 ms), and is interrupted and executed during the execution of the main control side main process.

In FIG. 13, when a timer interrupt occurs, the CPU 201 immediately executes the second power supply abnormality check process without saving the contents of the register (step S081). In this power supply abnormality check process, as shown in FIG. 10B, the power supply level supplied from the power supply board is monitored, and if an abnormality such as a power failure occurs, the game is restored without any trouble when the power is restored. A backup process or the like for storing a predetermined game information at the time of power failure in the RAM is performed so that it can be performed. Therefore, the power supply abnormality check process functions as a backup means. The details of the second power supply abnormality check process will be described later.

Next, the switch input data creation process is executed (step S082). Input data is created from various sensors and switches based on input information (ON / OFF signal and rising state (ON edge, OFF edge)). The detection information by the various sensors here includes, for example, a winning detection switch (right starting port sensor 33a, middle starting port sensor 34a, lower right starting port sensor 35a, normal symbol starting port sensor 37a, upper large winning port sensor 42a, etc. ON / OFF information (winning detection information) of switch signals output from the lower prize opening sensor 52a, general winning opening sensor 43a, OUT monitoring switch 49a, and combination gate sensor 57a, and switches related to setting change operations. ON / OFF information (operation information) of the switch signal output from (setting key switch 94, setting change switch 95, setting change completion switch 96, etc.) and status signal from the payout control board 29 (door open sensor 61 or full). ON / OFF information of the detection sensor 60) and the like.

Next, the error management process is executed (step S083). In this error management process, it is monitored whether or not an error has occurred based on the input data related to various sensors and the status signal from the payout control board 29, and if an error occurs, error processing according to the error type is performed. To execute. Error handling includes sending an error command according to the error type and sending an error clearing command when the error is resolved. When the effect control unit 24 receives an error command, it executes error notification according to the error type, and when it receives an error release command, it ends the executing error notification.

Next, a timer management process for managing the timer used for game operation control is executed (step S084). The timer values of various timers (for example, special symbol accessory operation timers described later) used for game operation control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 are updated (subtracted) here. Details of this timer management process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, a random number management process in the timer interrupt that periodically updates the random numbers related to each variable display game is executed (step S085). Here, in order to make the count value of the random number counter random, the random number is updated (+1 is added for each interrupt) for the special symbol judgment random number and the auxiliary hit judgment random number, and each time the random number counter goes around. In addition, the process of changing the start value of the random number counter is performed. Since the internal lottery random number (big hit determination random number) is generated by the above random number generation circuit, it is not updated here.

In the input management process of step S089, based on the input data created in the switch input data creation process (step S082), a winning counter for counting the number of winnings and an OUT ball monitoring for counting the number of out balls are provided for each winning opening. Update the counter value etc.

Next, the prize ball management process is executed (step S090). In this prize ball management process, the winning counter is confirmed, and if there is a winning, a payout control command for specifying the number of prize balls is transmitted to the payout control board 29. When the payout control board 29 receives the payout control command, the payout control board 29 controls the game ball payout device 19 based on the prize ball number information included in the payout control command to execute the payout operation for the designated number of prize balls.

Next, the normal symbol management process is executed (step S091). In this normal symbol management process, processing necessary for executing the normal symbol variation display game is performed. Here, whether or not a game ball is detected by the normal symbol start port sensor 37a is monitored, and if the game ball is detected, predetermined game information (random number for determining auxiliary hit, etc.) required for the auxiliary hit lottery is input. Acquire (Public figure random number acquisition process), and store the game information as hold data (operation hold ball related to normal symbol (Public figure operation hold ball)), and hold and store the maximum number of hold balls up to the upper limit (Public figure hold storage process). .. Then, when a predetermined variation display start condition for the normal symbol is satisfied, a lottery for the auxiliary hit based on the normal figure operation holding ball is performed, the variation pattern of the normal symbol is selected based on the lottery result for the auxiliary figure, and the stop display mode of the normal symbol. (Normal stop symbol) is decided. Further, here, in order to operate the normal symbol in a fluctuating display operation, the LED display data for the fluctuating display is created if it is fluctuating, and the LED display data for the stop display is created if it is not fluctuating (normally). Design display data update processing).

Next, the normal electric accessory management process is executed (step S092). In this ordinary electric accessory management process, the process necessary for executing the normal electric accessory management process is performed. Specifically, when the lottery result of the auxiliary hit lottery is a win, the solenoid control data setting process for the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 41c is performed. Based on the solenoid control data set here, an excitation signal is output to the normal electric accessory solenoid 41c in the solenoid management process of step S100 described later, thereby controlling the opening / closing operation pattern of the movable piece 47. Will be done.

Next, the special symbol management processes 1 and 2 are executed (steps S093 and S094). In the special symbol management processes 1 and 2, the processes necessary for executing the special symbol variation display game are mainly performed. The details of the special symbol management process 1 will be described later in FIG. 15, and the details of the special symbol management process 2 will be described later in FIG.

Next, the special electric accessory management process is executed (step S095). In this special electric accessory management process, processing necessary for executing and controlling the winning game is performed. Specifically, when the big hit lottery result is a big hit 1 to 8 or a small hit, the winning game (big hit game or small hit game) corresponding to the winning type is executed and controlled. In the case of a big hit, the start processing of the round game based on the detection signal of the combination gate sensor 57a, the execution control of the round game, the transition control of the game state after the end of the big hit game, and the like are included.

Further, here, a plurality of types of effect control commands are transmitted according to the progress of the winning game. In the case of a big hit, the "big hit start command" is issued at the start of the big hit game, and the "round start" at the start of the round game (when the game ball passes through the role-ream gate 57 in the 1st round and when the big winning opening is opened in the 2nd and subsequent rounds) "Command", "Round end command" at the end of each round game (when the big prize opening is closed), "Big hit end command" at the end of the specified number of rounds (at the end of the final round game), "Big hit end command" at the end of the big winning opening The "large winning opening winning command" is transmitted to the production control unit 24. Further, in the case of a small hit, a "small hit start command" is transmitted at the start of the small hit game, and a "small hit end command" is transmitted at the end of the small hit game to the effect control unit 24. In response to these commands, the effect control unit 24 controls the appearance of a target effect (a hit effect) according to the progress of the hit game.

For example, the above-mentioned jackpot start command includes information on the current hit type and the game state at the time of winning the hit, and the effect control unit 24 side according to the front jackpot, the back jackpot, and the current jackpot type. It is used to determine a series of hit-and-hit production scenarios that will be developed during the jackpot game. Further, the round start command includes the current number of rounds information, and is used when the effect control unit 24 side displays the effect according to the number of rounds. In addition, the jackpot end command includes information on the current hit type and the game state at the time of winning the hit, and the effect control unit 24 starts the ending effect or specifies the game state after the end of the hit game. It is used when determining the production mode after the hit game.

When the big hit game ends (in the present embodiment, when the ending effect period ends (the same applies to the small hit game)), the condition device operation flag, the accessory continuous operation device operation flag, and the continuous number counter (the number of rounds). (Counting counter), special symbol stop 1 flag, etc. are cleared. When the small hit game is completed, the small hit middle flag and the special symbol stop 2 flag, which will be described later, are cleared.

Next, the right-handed notification information management process is executed (step S097). In this right-handed notification information management process, the LED for lighting the right-handed display device 39b is in a "right-handed advantageous" gaming state (during a hit game, latent state, time saving state, probability change state). Data is created, and when the game is in a "left-handed advantageous" gaming state (normal state), LED data for turning off the right-handed display device 39b is created.

Next, the LED management process is executed (step S098). In this LED management process, the output control of the control signal (dynamic lighting data) for the normal symbol display device 39a, the special symbol display devices 38a, 38b, the composite display device 38c, and the right-handed display device 39b is performed. The control signal based on the LED display data created by the above-mentioned normal symbol management process (step S091) or special symbol management process (step S093) is output by this LED management process. As a result, a series of variable display operations (variable display and stop display) of special symbols and ordinary symbols are realized.

Next, an external terminal management process is performed (step S099). In this external terminal management process, various outer end signals including a big hit middle signal and a variable / short time big hit middle signal are created through the frame external terminal board 21 and used as an external device such as a data counter DT or a hall computer HC. On the other hand, output control is performed.

Next, the solenoid management process is performed (step S100). In this solenoid management process, the normal electric accessory solenoid 41c and the large winning opening solenoid 42c, based on the solenoid control data set in the ordinary electric accessory management process (step S092) or the special electric accessory management process (step S094), The output control of the excitation signal for 52c and the like is performed. As a result, the movable piece 47 and the large winning openings 40 and 50 can be opened and closed.

Next, the performance display monitor process is executed (step S101). In this performance display monitor processing, processing necessary for displaying performance information on the performance display 99 is performed. Details of the performance display monitor processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 28.

Next, the count value of the WDT is cleared (step S102). As a result, the WDT is reset and the count value is returned to the initial value.

After completing the processes of steps S081 to S102 above, the interrupt enabled state is set (step S103). As a result, the timer interrupt process is terminated, the process returns to the main control side main process before the interrupt, and the main control side main process is performed until the next timer interrupt occurs.

<10B. Second power supply abnormality check process: Fig. 10B>
Next, with reference to FIG. 10B, the second power supply abnormality check process (step S081) in FIG. 13 will be described. FIG. 10B is a flowchart showing the second power supply abnormality check process.

In FIG. 13B, the CPU 201 first acquires a power supply abnormality signal (voltage drop signal) supplied from a power supply board (not shown) through an input port (not shown) (step S951). Then, it is determined whether or not the levels of the power supply abnormality signals match twice in succession (step S952), and the processes of steps S951 to S952 are repeated until they match (step S952: NO). When the levels of the power supply abnormality signals match (step S952: YES), it is determined whether or not the power supply abnormality signal has an abnormality level (step S953).

When the power supply abnormality signal is not at an abnormality level (step S953: NO), the backup flag BF is cleared (step S956), the value of the power supply abnormality confirmation counter is cleared (step S957), and the second power supply abnormality check process is exited.

On the other hand, when the power supply abnormality signal is at an abnormal level (step S953: YES), 1 is added to the value of the power supply abnormality confirmation counter (step S954), and has the value of the power supply abnormality confirmation counter after addition reached the upper limit value Y? It is determined whether or not (step S955). This takes into consideration that the data acquired from the input port may be garbled due to the influence of noise, etc., and the acquired data continuously maintains an abnormal level and has an upper limit value Y (for example,). , Y = 2), it is determined that the AC power supply is actually cut off.

When the value of the power supply abnormality confirmation counter reaches the upper limit value Y (step S955: YES), it is assumed that a power supply abnormality has occurred, and backup processing is performed. Specifically, the power supply abnormality confirmation counter is cleared to zero (step S958), the firing control signal is set to the OFF state (step S959), and the backup flag BF is set to the ON state (5AH) (step S960). Then, a power off command indicating that a power failure has occurred is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 (step S961). The power off command is composed of a power cut A command and a power cut B command each having a length of 16 bits, and is continuously transmitted every 8 bits in this order. The reason for adopting such a configuration is to prevent the power failure status from being erroneously notified to other control units due to the influence of noise or the like.

Next, RAM protection is enabled, the prohibited area is set to invalid (step S962), and the output data of all output ports is cleared (step S963). As a result, writing data to the RAM is prohibited in the subsequent processing. This prevents the RAM from being abnormally rewritten due to reading of an invalid address of the RAM due to a voltage drop, and causes the payout control board 29 to start the same type of power supply abnormality check process later than the main control unit 20. On the other hand, irrational data can be prevented from being transmitted. Then, after the above backup process is completed, the generation of the interrupt signal is prohibited by the setting process for the CTC, the CPU is set to the interrupt disabled (step S964), and the power supply voltage drops while repeating the infinite loop process. Wait for the CPU to go into an inactive state.

<14. Timer management process: FIG. 14>
Next, the timer management process (step S084) in FIG. 13 will be described. FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing the details of the timer management process.

In FIG. 14, the CPU 201 first performs a 2-byte timer subtraction process (timer update process) (step S531).

In the present embodiment, as a 2-byte timer, an ordinary symbol electric accessory operation timer that manages the operation time of the ordinary variable winning device 41 (movable piece 47), and an ordinary symbol electric accessory operation timer for type testing (ordinary electric for test signals). (Timer during operation of accessory), special symbol 1 operation timer 2 that manages the fixed display time of special symbol 1, special symbol 2 operation timer 2 that manages the fixed display time of special symbol 2, special variable winning devices 42, 52 (open) It deals with a special electric accessory operation timer that manages the operation time of the doors 42b and 52b), an error timer that manages a predetermined error notification time, and the like. Here, it is checked whether or not the timer value of these 2-byte timers is zero, and if there is a non-zero timer, the timer value is subtracted by 1.

Next, the special symbol 2 operation timer 1 is acquired (step S532). The "special symbol 2 operation timer 1" is a timer that manages the fluctuation time of the special symbol 2, and is composed of 3 bytes (3-byte timer). As a timer having the same 3-byte configuration as the special symbol 2 operation timer 1, a "special symbol 1 operation timer 1" that manages the fluctuation time of the special symbol 1 is provided. In this embodiment, an ultra-long fluctuation pattern having a fluctuation time of 600 seconds (600,000 ms) is adopted as a fluctuation pattern related to a special symbol that cannot be measured by a 2-byte timer. Therefore, a 3-byte timer is used as a timer for managing the fluctuation time of the special symbol. The fluctuation time is set in step SS457 during the special symbol variation pattern creation process of FIG. 22 (step S417 during the special symbol variation start process of FIG. 18), which will be described later.

Next, it is determined whether or not the acquired special symbol 2 operation timer 1 is zero (step S533). If the special symbol 2 operation timer 1 is zero (step S533: = 0), the process proceeds to step S535, and if the special symbol 2 operation timer 1 is not zero (step S533: ≠ 0), the special symbol 2 operation timer 1 is operated. 1 is subtracted by 1 (step S534).

(Special figure 2 fluctuation time measurement interruption processing at the time of winning special figure 2 small hit: S535-S538)
Next, it is determined whether or not the special symbol stop 2 flag is in the ON state (5AH) (step S535). This "special symbol stop 2 flag" is a flag for designating whether or not the special symbol is "small hit symbol stop and small hit game", and the flag is in the ON state (= 5AH). In the case, it indicates that "the small hit symbol is stopped and the small hit game is in progress", and when the flag is in the OFF state (= 00H), it indicates that it is not "the small hit symbol is stopped and the small hit game is in progress". (For example, see steps S483 to S484 in FIG. 24 described later). Here, during the ON state period of the special symbol stop 2 flag, the final display time (500 ms) is set after the fluctuation time of the special symbol ends and the symbol display mode (small hit symbol) corresponding to the small hit is stopped and displayed. After that, it refers to the period until the small hit game is completed. The special symbol stop 2 flag is cleared at the end of the small hit game in the above-mentioned special electric accessory management process (step S095) ((special symbol stop 2 flag ← 00H). However, the special symbol stop 2 flag is in the OFF state. Even so, the small hit symbol remains stopped and displayed on the special symbol display device until the variable display of the special symbol is newly started. However, in this case, the special symbol stop 2 flag is OFF. Since it is in a state, it is treated as when the small hit symbol is not stopped. In this way, the ON / OFF state of the special symbol stop 2 flag is from the fixed display time (500 ms after the end of the fluctuation time) to the small hit game. In terms of whether or not it is a game period, it is referred to as "small hit symbol stopped and small hit game in progress". Hereinafter, small hit symbol stop and small hit game in progress are abbreviated as "small hit symbol stopped". In the case of the present embodiment, the small hit is a big hit lottery target type only on the special figure 2 side (see FIG. 4), but the same applies when the small hit is also provided on the special figure 1 side.

Further, in the present embodiment, in addition to the above-mentioned special symbol stop 2 flag, the "special symbol stop 1 flag" is handled as a flag for designating whether or not a big hit is being made. It is a flag for specifying whether or not the special symbol is "big hit symbol stop and big hit game", and when the flag is ON state (= 5AH), it is "big hit symbol stop and big hit game". When the flag is in the OFF state (= 00H), it indicates that "the jackpot symbol is stopped and the jackpot game is in progress" (see, for example, steps S493 to S494 in FIG. 25 described later). Here, in the ON state period of the special symbol stop 1 flag, after the fluctuation time of the special symbol ends and the symbol display mode (big hit symbol) corresponding to the jackpot is stopped and displayed, the final display time (500 ms) is passed. Refers to the period until the jackpot game ends. Similar to the above-mentioned "special symbol stop 2 flag", this "special symbol stop 1 flag" is also cleared at the end of the jackpot game in the special electric accessory management process (step S095) (after the end of the specified number of round games). , Cleared when the ending production time ends: Special symbol stop 1 flag ← 00H). However, even if the special symbol stop 1 flag is turned off, the jackpot symbol remains stopped and displayed on the special symbol display device until the variable display of the special symbol is newly started. However, in this case, since the special symbol stop 1 flag is in the OFF state, it is treated as the jackpot symbol is not stopped. In this way, the ON / OFF state of the special symbol stop 1 flag is referred to as "big hit symbol stop and big hit game in progress" in terms of whether or not the ON / OFF state is from the fixed display time to the game period during the big hit game. In the following, the jackpot symbol stop and the jackpot game are abbreviated as "big hit symbol stopped".

When the special symbol stop 2 flag is in the ON state (5AH) (step S535: = 5AH), the timer management process is exited without doing anything.

On the other hand, when the special symbol stop 2 flag is not in the ON state (5AH) (step S535: ≠ 5AH), the special symbol 1 operation timer 1 is acquired (step S536), and is the acquired special symbol 1 operation timer 1 zero? It is determined whether or not (step S537). As described above, the special symbol 1 operation timer 1 is a 3-byte timer that manages the fluctuation time of the special symbol 1.

If the special symbol 1 operation timer 1 is zero (step S537: = 0), the timer management process is exited without doing anything. If the special symbol 1 operation timer 1 is not zero (step S537: ≠ 0), the special symbol 2 operation timer 1 is subtracted by 1 to update the timer value (step S538), and the timer management process is exited.

In the present embodiment, in the determination process of step S535, when the special symbol stop 2 flag is in the ON state (5AH) (step S535: = 5AH), that is, when the small hit is in progress, the special symbol 1 operation timer 1 The timer management process can be exited without performing the timer subtraction process for. Therefore, during the period during which the ON state of the special symbol stop 2 flag is maintained, the measurement of the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 is interrupted, and the variable display state is maintained without displaying the stop display of the special figure 1 (during the measurement interruption). , It will be treated as'during variable display'). As a result, a "small hit measurement interruption type" simultaneous fluctuation type gaming machine has been realized. In the present embodiment, when one special figure is a big hit, the other special figure is stopped and displayed with a forced loss symbol. Therefore, during the big hit game, the special symbol 1 operation timer 1 or the special symbol 2 operation timer is displayed. The timer subtraction (update) process for 1 is not provided.

<15. Special symbol management process 1: Fig. 15>
Next, the special symbol management process 1 (step S093) in FIG. 13 will be described. FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing the details of the special symbol management process 1.

Here, in order to facilitate understanding of the processing contents of the special symbol management process 1, first, regarding the special symbol operation confirmation data and the special symbol operation status (special symbol 1 operation status, special symbol 2 operation status) in the figure. I will explain.

The "special symbol operation confirmation data" is data for designating the special symbol type to be processed in each of the special symbol management processes 1 and 2 (steps S093 and S094), and the special symbol operation confirmation data is ". If it is "zero (00H)", "special figure 1" is designated as the processing target, and if the special symbol operation confirmation data is "1 (01H)", "special figure 2" is designated as the processing target. .. The values of the special symbol operation confirmation data are changed to 00H and 01H according to the processing state (see steps S301 and S306).

What is "special symbol operation status"? It is a status value that specifies the behavior of a special symbol, and this status value is changed according to the processing status. In the present embodiment, a "special symbol 1 operation status" indicating the behavior of the special figure 1 and a "special symbol 2 operation status" indicating the behavior of the special figure 2 are provided. The special symbol operation status has four status values, "waiting for customers (00H)", "waiting (01H)", "changing (02H)", and "confirming (03H)", as status values indicating the behavior of the special symbol. Is prepared. The above "waiting for customers (00H)" and "waiting (01H)" indicate that the behavior of the special symbol is in a waiting state for the next fluctuation, and "changing" means that the behavior of the special symbol fluctuates (varies). (Display) indicates that the display is in progress, and the above-mentioned "confirmed" indicates that the change of the special symbol is completed and the stop (confirmed) display is in progress (during the special symbol confirmation time).

Here, (α) processing of steps S304 and S309 (processing during special symbol fluctuation), (β) processing of steps S305 and step S310 (processing during special symbol confirmation time), (γ) step S331 shown in FIG. 16 described later. And the process of step S334 (special symbol change start process) are configured as common processes in order to reduce the control load. In the present embodiment, the special symbol operation confirmation data, the special symbol operation status, and the like are well linked to perform the following control regarding the variable display operation control of the special symbol.

(Processing of the first half in FIG. 15 (processing on the special drawing 1 side): steps S301 to S305)
In the processing of steps S301 to S305 in the first half shown in FIG. 15, as the processing for realizing the variable display operation of special drawing 1, the special symbol operation confirmation data is first updated (set) to 00H, and "special drawing 1" is set. After designating as a processing target (step S301), if the operation status of the special symbol 1 is "changing (02H)", "special symbol changing processing (step S304)" is executed and "determining (03H)". In the case of ", the process during the special symbol confirmation time (step S305)" is executed.

Further, in the special symbol management process 2 shown in FIG. 16 described later, when the fluctuation start permissible condition is satisfied, the special symbol operation confirmation data is updated to 00H, and “special symbol 1” is designated as the processing target (step S329). When the operation status of the special symbol 1 is "waiting (00H, 01H)", the "special symbol variation start process (step S331)" in the special symbol management process 2 shown in the figure is executed.

(Processing of the latter half (processing on the special drawing 2 side): Steps S306 to S310)
In the processing of steps S306 to S310 in the latter half shown in FIG. 15, as the processing for realizing the variable display operation of the special figure 2, the special symbol operation confirmation data is first updated to 01H, and the special symbol operation confirmation data is set as the processing target. After the designation (step S306), if the operation status of the special symbol 2 is "changing (02H)", "special symbol changing processing (step S309)" is executed and "determined (03H)". In that case, the "special symbol confirmation time processing (step S310)" is executed. Then, the process exits the special symbol management process 1 and proceeds to the special symbol management process 2 in step S094 of FIG.

Further, in the special symbol management process 2 shown in FIG. 16 described later, when the fluctuation start permissible condition is satisfied, after updating the special symbol operation confirmation data to 01H and designating "special symbol 2" as the processing target (step S332). When the operation status of the special symbol 2 is "waiting (00H, 01H)", the "special symbol change start process (step S334)" in the special symbol management process 2 shown in the figure is executed.

Note that FIG. 18 is used for the details of the special symbol change start processing (steps S331 and S334), and FIGS. 23 to 25 are used for the details of the special symbol change processing (steps S304 and S309). Details of the intermediate treatment (steps S305 and S310) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 26A to 26B.

<16. Special symbol management process 2: Fig. 16>
Next, the special symbol management process 2 (step S094) in FIG. 13 will be described. FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing the details of the special symbol management process 2. This special symbol management process 2 mainly includes a process related to hold memory when a game ball wins at the start port, a start port check process related to a look-ahead notice (hold addition command), and a special symbol change related to the start of change of the special symbol. It is mainly composed of start processing.

In FIG. 16, the CPU 201 first has or does not win a prize in the right start port 33 which is the special figure 1 start port, the middle start port 34 which is the special figure 1 start port, and the lower right start port 35 which is the special figure 2 start port. Are sequentially checked (steps S321, S323, S325).

When the right start port 33 has a prize (step S321: YES), the right start port check process is executed (step S322), and when the middle start port 34 has a prize (step S323: YES), the middle start port has a prize. When the check process is executed (step S324) and the lower right start port 35 wins a prize (step S325: YES), the lower right start port check process is executed (step S326). Details of the “right start port check process” in step S322, the “middle start port check process” in step S324, and the step S326 “lower right start port check process” will be described later in FIG. It should be noted that the “right start port check process” in step S322 and the step S324 “middle start port check process” for which special drawing 1 is to be processed are common processes.

When the processing of steps S321 to S326 is completed, the ON / OFF state of the special symbol stop 1 flag and the ON / OFF state of the special symbol stop 2 flag are sequentially determined (steps S327 to S328).

When neither the special symbol stop 1 flag nor the special symbol stop 2 flag is in the ON state (5AH) (step S327: ≠ 5AH and S328: ≠ 5AH), that is, even when the special figure 1 and the special symbol 2 are stopped by the small hit symbol. If the jackpot symbol is not stopped, it is assumed that the new special symbol variation start allowable condition (execution condition) is satisfied, and the processing necessary for starting the variation display of the special symbol in steps S329 to S334 is executed. It should be noted that steps S329 to S331 are processes for special figure 1, and steps S332 to S334 are processes for special figure 2.

On the other hand, if either the special symbol stop 1 flag or the special symbol stop 2 flag is in the ON state (step S327: = 5AH or S328: = 5AH), the new special symbol fluctuation start allowable condition is not satisfied. As a result, the process related to the start of the change of the special symbol (the process of starting the change of the special symbol) is not executed, the special symbol display data update process of step S335 described later is executed, and the special symbol management process 2 is exited.

In the present embodiment, when the fluctuation time of one special symbol ends and the stop display is performed with the small hit symbol or the big hit symbol by the processing of steps S327 to S328, the other is from the start of the final display time to the end of the winning game. It is possible to prohibit the start of the variable display of the special symbol of. As a result, the variable display of the other special symbol is not started during the final display time of the winning symbol, and the variable display operation of the other is started even though the winning symbol is stopped. It is possible to surely prevent an inappropriate display state (display operation) such as the end. After the winning game is completed, the special symbol stop 1 flag or the special symbol stop 2 flag in the ON state is cleared, and the start of the new special symbol variation display is allowed.

Next, 00H is set in the special symbol operation confirmation data (step S329), and it is determined whether or not the special symbol 1 operation status is "waiting (00H, 01H)" (step S330). When the special symbol 1 operation status is "waiting (00H, 01H)" (step S330: YES), the special symbol fluctuation start process is executed (step S331), and the special symbol 1 operation status is not waiting (step S330: YES). Step S330: NO), the process proceeds to step S332. In the special symbol variation start process, the process required to start the variation display of the special figure 1 is executed. The details of the special symbol fluctuation management process will be described later in FIG.

Next, 01H is set in the special symbol operation confirmation data (step S332), and it is determined whether or not the special symbol 2 operation status is "waiting (00H or 01H)" (step S333). When the special symbol 2 operation status is waiting (00H or 01H) (step S333: YES), the special symbol fluctuation start process is executed (step S334), and the special symbol 2 operation status is not waiting (step S333). : NO), the process proceeds to step S335. In the special symbol variation start processing, the processing necessary for starting the variation display of the special figure 2 is executed. In addition, step S331 and step S334 (special symbol change start processing) are common processing.

Proceeding to the process of step S335, the special symbol display data update process is executed. In this special symbol display data update process, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is changing, and if it is changing, the data of the special symbol (during special symbol change) that repeats blinking at predetermined time (for example, 128 ms). (Display data) is created, and if the special symbol is not changing, stop display data (special symbol stop display display data) is created. The control signal based on the display data of the special symbol created here is output in the LED management process (step S098) of FIG. 13, and the variation display and stop display of the special symbol on the special symbol display devices 38a and 38b are realized. .. As a result, the process exits the special symbol management process 2 and proceeds to the special electric accessory management process in step S095 of FIG.

<17. Start port check process (lower right start port check process, right start port check process, middle start port check process: Fig. 17>
Next, the lower right start port check process, the right start port check process, and the middle start port check process (steps S322, S324, S326) in FIG. 16 will be described. FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing the details of the start port check process. These start port check processes serve as prize-winning processes executed based on the establishment of predetermined start conditions.

Here, the lower right start port check process (step S326) is a process for the special figure 2 (design variation display game 2), and is a right start port check process (step S322) and a middle start port check (step S324). ) Is a process for the special figure 1 (design variation display game 1). However, all of them have substantially the same processing contents except that the special symbol type to be processed is different. Therefore, FIG. 17 typically describes the start port check process (right start port check process, middle start port check process) for the special figure 1 and the start port check process for the special figure 2. (Lower right start port check process) Detailed explanation will be omitted to avoid duplicate description unless otherwise required.

In FIG. 17, the CPU 201 first updates the special symbol operation confirmation data to 00H (special symbol operation confirmation data ← 00H), specifies the processing target in the special figure 1, and then specifies the number of balls on hold for operation, that is, the operation of the special figure 1. It is determined whether or not the number of reserved balls is the maximum number of reserved balls (here, the upper limit is 4) (step S351). In the lower right start port check process in step S322, first, the special symbol operation confirmation data is updated to 01H (special symbol operation confirmation data + 1), the processing target is specified in special figure 2, and then the special figure 2 operation hold ball. It is determined whether or not the number is the maximum number of reserved memories (here, the upper limit is 4). As described above, the case where the special symbol operation confirmation data is 00H, that is, the case where the processing target is the special figure 1 side will be described below.

When the number of balls held in the special figure 1 is the maximum number of stored balls (step S351: = MAX), the process of step S363 described later (command transmission process for over winning) is executed, and the number of balls held in the special figure 1 operation is held. If is not the maximum number of reserved balls (less than 4) (step S351: ≠ MAX), 1 is added to the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 1 (step S352).

Next, various random numbers used in the special symbol variation display game 1 related to the special figure 1 operation holding ball generated this time are acquired (step S353). Specifically, the current values of the jackpot determination random number, the special symbol determination random number, and the fluctuation pattern random number are acquired from various random number counters, and the acquired random number values are stored in the hold storage area of the RAM 203. This hold storage area is an area for storing predetermined game information related to the symbol variation display game as an operation hold ball (hold data), and in this hold storage area, the above-mentioned various random value values as hold data are special. Until the symbol 1 is subjected to the variable display operation (until the special symbol variable display game 1 is executed), the start conditions are held and stored in the order of establishment (winning order). The reserved storage area is provided with a reserved storage area corresponding to the special symbol 1 side and the special symbol 2 side, that is, a special figure 1 reserved storage area and a special figure 2 reserved storage area. These hold storage areas are provided with hold 1 storage area to hold n storage area (n is the maximum number of hold storages: n = 4 in the present embodiment), and each holds hold data for the maximum number of hold storages. It is possible.

Next, as the "winning command data 1" on the lower byte side (EVENT) of the hold addition command, the look-ahead prohibition data (EVENT: "9FH") that prohibits the look-ahead determination (prohibits the look-ahead notice) is acquired (step S354). Then, it is determined whether or not the "look-ahead prohibition condition" is satisfied (step S355). The above-mentioned "look-ahead prohibition condition" is a condition for prohibiting the look-ahead determination for the operation-holding ball. Here, since the special figure 1 side is the processing target, it is determined whether or not the read-ahead prohibition condition (special figure 1 look-ahead prohibition condition) for the special figure 1 operation holding ball is satisfied.

When the above-mentioned read-ahead prohibition condition is satisfied (step S355: YES), the processes of steps S358 to S359 related to the look-ahead determination are skipped, the look-ahead determination for the current special figure 1 operation holding ball is not executed, and the look-ahead determination is performed. A hold addition command with prohibited data (EVENT: "9FH") will be created (see step S360 described later). As a result, the pre-reading notice effect is not executed either. In other words, the read-ahead prohibition data can be said to be data that specifies that the look-ahead determination process (step S358) has not been executed.

Regarding the look-ahead prohibition condition, in the present embodiment, it is determined whether or not the look-ahead is prohibited based on the current gaming state. Specifically, in the case of the normal state and the probable change state in which the winning frequency to the special figure 1 start port is high, the look-ahead judgment on the special figure 2 side is prohibited, the look-ahead judgment on the special figure 1 side is allowed, and the special figure 2 start. In the case of a latent state in which the winning frequency of the mouth 35 is high, the look-ahead determination on the special figure 1 side is prohibited and the look-ahead judgment on the special figure 2 side is allowed. Further, during the time saving state and the big hit game, the look-ahead determination of both the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is prohibited. The reason why pre-reading is prohibited in the time-saving state is that a prize is frequently given to the special figure 1 starting port during the time-saving state, but a high-speed fluctuation pattern in which the fluctuation pattern at the time of loss is "time-saving medium normal fluctuation 1s" is selected. Therefore (FIG. 35 (b)), it is of little significance to generate a look-ahead notice. Therefore, during the time saving state, the look-ahead determination of both the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is prohibited.

Returning to the description of step S355, when the special figure 1 look-ahead prohibition condition is not satisfied (step S355: NO), the setting abnormality check process is executed (step S356).

<27. Setting error check process: Fig. 27>
Here, for convenience of explanation, first, the setting abnormality check process will be described. FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing the details of the setting abnormality check process in step S356.

In the setting error check process of FIG. 27, the CPU 201 first determines whether or not the setting error flag is in the ON state (= 5AH: setting error error in progress) (step S061). When the setting error flag is in the ON state (step S062: = 5AH), the setting abnormality check process is exited without doing anything. However, when the setting error flag is not in the ON state (step S062: ≠ 5AH), the set value is acquired from the set value storage area of the RAM 203, and the set value is a normal value (00H to 05H corresponding to the set values 1 to 6). It is determined whether or not it is (any value) (step S062). This determination process is the same as the content of the determination process in steps S903 and S913 during the setting change process of FIG. 11, and is a common process. If the acquired set value is not any of 00H to 05H (step S062: NO), it is assumed that an error (set value data error (RAM error)) has occurred in the set value data, and the setting error flag is turned ON (5AH). ) (Step S063). Then, the set value abnormality command (0E33H) is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 (step S064), and the setting abnormality check process is exited. In addition. When the effect control unit 24 receives the set value abnormality command, the effect means is used to execute the setting abnormality error notification. For example, the decorative lamp 45 is turned on in all red, and the liquid crystal display device 36 is displayed with a message such as "RAM is abnormal. Please call a staff member." The setting abnormality error (RAM error) is resolved by performing the setting change operation as described above.

(Modification example of setting error check processing)
The above setting abnormality check process may be executed during the timer interrupt process on the main control side. In this case, it is preferable to execute at least before the special symbol management process of step S093. For example, it is preferable to execute it before the error management process.

When the above-described setting abnormality check process is completed, it is determined whether or not the setting error flag is in the ON state (= 5AH) (step S357). When the setting error flag is in the ON state (step S357: = 5AH), assuming that a set value data error (RAM error) has occurred, the look-ahead determination process (step S358) is not executed, but the process of step S360 described later is performed. move on. Therefore, when the set value data abnormality occurs, the hold addition command having the read-ahead prohibition data (EVENT: “9FH”) is created (see step S360 described later).

Although details will be described later, when a set value data error occurs in the start port check process (process at the time of winning), a hold addition command including read-ahead prohibition data (9FH) is transmitted without performing RAM error processing in particular. Therefore, it is possible to exit this start port check process. When an abnormality occurs in the set value data, RAM error processing is performed in the subsequent special symbol fluctuation start processing (processing at the start of fluctuation) in FIG. 18 (see step S411 in FIG. 18).

On the other hand, when the setting error flag is not in the ON state (step S357: ≠ 5AH), that is, when the set value data is a normal value, the look-ahead determination process is executed (step S358). In this look-ahead determination process, the jackpot lottery result executed at the start of fluctuation is determined to be look-ahead, and the look-ahead fluctuation pattern is determined based on the lottery result. For details, the contents of the fluctuation pattern at the start of the fluctuation are described as "pre-reading winning judgment processing" for pre-reading the winning lottery result at the start of fluctuation, "pre-reading symbol judgment processing" for pre-reading the symbol lottery result at the start of fluctuation, and A series of processes related to pre-reading determination are executed, including "pre-reading variation pattern determination processing" for pre-reading determination.

((A) Big hit random number judgment process at the time of winning (look-ahead win / loss judgment process))
In the look-ahead determination process of step S358, first, the look-ahead win / loss determination process is executed. In this look-ahead hit determination process, first, the hit random number determination table corresponding to the special symbol operation confirmation data is acquired, and then the big hit determination random number value acquired in the process of step S353 is acquired. Then, based on the acquired random number value for jackpot determination and the winning random number determination table, a winning lottery (look-ahead winning determination) is performed for the current operation pending ball. That is, the winning lottery result at the start of fluctuation, which is executed when the current operation holding ball is subjected to the fluctuation display operation (described later, "big hit determination process (S413 in FIG. 18 described later)" and "small hit determination process (described later). The result of "S414)" in FIG. 18) is pre-read and determined, and the result (pre-reading winning result) is acquired.

The hit random number determination table includes a random number determination table for special figure 1 (not shown) related to the special symbol variation display game 1 and a random number determination table for special figure 2 related to the special symbol variation display game 2 (Fig.). Not shown) and are included. In this process, either the random number determination table for special figure 1 or special figure 2 is selected according to the value of the special symbol operation confirmation data. In these hit random number judgment tables, judgment values (winning areas according to high probability and low probability) for determining the distinction between big hit, small hit (only for special figure 2 in this embodiment), and loss are displayed. It is defined (there is no judgment value (winning area) in which the big hit and the small hit are won at the same time), and it is judged which judgment value (winning area) the random number value for big hit judgment belongs to. Therefore, the winning type is determined according to the current jackpot lottery probability (high probability, low probability). The jackpot lottery probability is, in other words, the operating probability of the conditional device.

In the case of the present embodiment, the hit random number determination table is provided with a table corresponding to the set value (a table in which at least the lottery probability of the big hit is different depending on the set values 1 to 6). Further, the ratio of the jackpot lottery probability at the time of high probability to the jackpot lottery probability at the time of low probability (probability increase ratio) is the same at each set value. In the case of this embodiment, the ratio is set to a value not exceeding 10. For example, in the case of setting 6 related to the random number determination table for special figure 1, a big hit is won at 1/320 at low probability and about 1/137 at high probability, and at setting 5, 1 at low probability. / 332, when the probability is high, it is about 1/142 and it is a big hit. It should be noted that a table that is common to some of the set values may be used instead of the hit random number determination table that differs for each set value. For example, a table that is common to settings 1 and 2 and has different jackpot lottery probabilities in settings 3 to 6. In addition, when referring to the common hit random number judgment table with some set values, the profit degree (ball output rate) will be the same performance, but in the symbol table described later, the symbol selection rate of the hit type is set. The probability may be different for each value. The hit random number determination table is also used for processing at the start of fluctuation (FIG. 18).

Here, in the present embodiment, the pre-reading winning result is not stored in the RAM 203 while being captured in a predetermined general-purpose register built in the CPU. This is because the pre-reading winning determination result is immediately used in the subsequent pre-reading symbol determination processing, and this data is not required and does not need to be stored in the RAM.

((B) Special stop symbol creation process at the time of winning (look-ahead symbol determination process))
In the look-ahead symbol determination process, first, a step of "design table (big hit symbol table, small hit symbol table, or lost symbol table: not shown)" according to the above-mentioned look-ahead winning result (different from big hit, small hit, and lost). The special symbol determination random value acquired in the process of S353 is acquired. Next, based on the acquired symbol table and the random value for special symbol determination, a symbol lottery (look-ahead symbol determination) is performed for the current operation pending ball. That is, the pre-reading determination is made based on the symbol lottery result (result of "special stop symbol creation process (see S415 in FIG. 18)" described later) at the start of fluctuation, which is executed when the operation holding ball is subjected to the fluctuation display operation. Then, the result (look-ahead symbol result) is acquired.

The above-mentioned big hit symbol table, small hit symbol table, or lost symbol table includes a symbol table for special symbol 1 related to the special symbol variation display game 1 and a symbol for special symbol 2 related to the special symbol variation display game 2, respectively. Contains tables. Judgment values (winning areas) for determining the winning type are defined in each symbol table, and special symbol determination data and special stop are determined depending on which determination value the special symbol determination random value belongs to. The symbol number is determined. The symbol table is also used in the special stop symbol creation process (step S415 in FIG. 18), which is a process at the start of fluctuation.

The above-mentioned "special symbol determination data" is data that identifies the type of winning, that is, the winning type (symbol type), and specifically, the big hit 1 to 8, the small hit, and the loss A to C are all won. It is the data to identify whether it was done. Further, the above-mentioned "special stop symbol number" is data for designating a special stop symbol mode to be stopped and displayed on the special symbol display devices 38a and 38b, and when the main control unit 20 side specifies the stop symbol type of the special symbol. It will be used. In the present embodiment, for example, even in the case of the same "loss A", the display mode (7-segment display mode) of the special stop symbol displayed on the special symbol display devices 38a and 38b may be different (for example, the display mode of the 7-segment display). , "-." In the case of the loss A of the special figure 1, "1." in the case of the loss A of the special figure 2 and the like).

In this embodiment, since "small hit" is excluded from the big hit lottery target on the special figure 1 side (no small hit win), the small hit symbol table for special figure 1 is not provided. Therefore, regarding the special figure 1, in the big hit symbol table for the special figure 1, one of the big hit 1 to the big hit 4 is determined by a predetermined symbol lottery rate (see FIG. 4), and the lost symbol table for the special figure 1 is used. Is determined by any of the loss A to C at a predetermined symbol lottery rate (for example, loss A is 95%, loss B is 4%, loss C is 1%). Regarding the special figure 2, in the big hit symbol table for the special figure 2, one of the big hit 5 to the big hit 8 is determined by a predetermined symbol lottery rate (see FIG. 4), and in the small hit symbol table for the special figure 2. , The small hit is determined by 100%, and in the loss symbol table for special figure 2, the loss A is determined by 100%. Since the type of loss is one type of loss A on the special figure 2 side, the loss A may be simply determined without providing the loss symbol table (without performing the symbol lottery).

Further, for a part or all of the above-mentioned symbol tables, a symbol table in which different symbol selection rates are set according to the set value may be provided. For example, for the jackpot symbol table, a table having a different selection rate for the jackpot type (in this case, 6 types of jackpot symbol tables corresponding to 6 levels of set values) can be provided for each set value 1 to 6 (small hit). The same applies to the design table and the lost design table). For example, if the hit type on the special figure 1 side is typically explained, the symbol lottery rate of jackpots 1 to 4 is set to "3%, 7%, 55%, 35%" in the case of setting 1, and setting 6 In the case of, it can be set to "8%, 12%, 45%, 35%" (the higher the setting, the more the probability of winning 1 jackpot, which triggers the transition to the small hit rush (latent state), and the probability of winning 2 jackpots (2). 16R probability change) winning probability is relatively high). Further, the probability variation inrush rate may be constant regardless of the set value, but may be different depending on the set value. For example, in the example of FIG. 4, the probability variation inrush rate is 65% (35% is a time saving jackpot), but in the case of setting 1, the probability variation inrush rate is 60%, and in the case of setting 6, the probability variation inrush rate is 65%. Depending on the situation, the probability variation inrush rate may be different depending on all or part of the set value. Similarly, the time saving inrush rate may be constant regardless of the set value, or may be different in all or part of the set value. The symbol lottery rate, the probability variation rush rate, and the time saving rush rate can be determined so that the ball ejection performance becomes more advantageous to the player as the set value becomes higher.

Then, the pre-reading symbol result is not stored in the RAM 203 as it is being taken into the predetermined general-purpose register built in the CPU, as in the case of the pre-reading winning determination described above. This is because the look-ahead symbol result is immediately used in the subsequent look-ahead variation pattern determination, and this data is not required and does not need to be stored in the RAM.

((C) Random number judgment processing at the time of winning the start opening (look-ahead fluctuation pattern judgment processing))
In the look-ahead variation pattern determination process, first, a look-ahead variation pattern distribution table (not shown) is acquired according to the look-ahead symbol result, and a random number value for the variation pattern acquired in the process of step S353 is acquired. Next, a variation pattern lottery (pre-reading variation pattern determination) based on the acquired look-ahead variation pattern distribution table and the random value for the variation pattern is performed to determine the look-ahead variation pattern. That is, the fluctuation pattern at the start of fluctuation (result of the special symbol fluctuation pattern creation process described later (see S417 in FIG. 18 described later)), which is determined when the operation holding ball is subjected to the fluctuation display operation, is pre-read. Judgment is made, and the result (look-ahead fluctuation pattern) is acquired. In the look-ahead fluctuation pattern distribution table, the winning command data 1 (hold addition command (EVENT)) corresponding to the look-ahead fluctuation pattern is determined. That is, the content of the look-ahead fluctuation pattern (excluding the reserved ball number information) is specified by the winning command data 1 determined in the look-ahead fluctuation pattern determination process. As a result, the winning command data 1 is updated from the "9FH" set in step S354 to the data value corresponding to the look-ahead fluctuation pattern (step S359).

In the above-mentioned look-ahead fluctuation pattern distribution table, there are a plurality of types of look-ahead fluctuations according to the game state and the winning type (for loss A (for both special figure 1 and special figure 2), loss B, loss C, jackpot 1 to 8). A pattern distribution table is provided, and the table configuration is such that the look-ahead fluctuation pattern (winning command data 1) can be determined by lottery using random values for fluctuation patterns. For example, in the case where "normal SP reach A" (see the column of loss B in FIG. 35 (a)) is determined as the fluctuation pattern at the start of fluctuation when the operation holding ball is subjected to the fluctuation display operation. In the look-ahead fluctuation pattern determination as well, the look-ahead fluctuation pattern information (for example, "03H" as the winning command data 1) that specifies "normal medium SP reach A" can be obtained. When determining the look-ahead fluctuation pattern, the same fluctuation pattern distribution table as at the start of fluctuation is not used. This is because the number of operation-holding balls at the time of pre-reading determination does not always match the number of operation-holding balls at the start of fluctuation, so that the exact fluctuation pattern at the start of fluctuation cannot be pre-read and determined. Therefore, in the pre-reading fluctuation pattern determination stage, the fluctuation pattern is determined without considering the number of balls on hold. However, even if the look-ahead fluctuation pattern is determined without considering the number of balls on hold, it is possible to determine a look-ahead fluctuation pattern in which the contents of the look-ahead fluctuation pattern and the fluctuation pattern at the start of fluctuation do not deviate as much as possible. .. In this embodiment, since the fluctuation pattern distribution table (FIGS. 34 to 36) corresponding to the set value is provided, the above-mentioned look-ahead fluctuation pattern distribution table is also a table corresponding to each set value. Is provided. Of course, it may be a common table for each setting value.

The pre-reading variation pattern information (winning command data 1 (EVENT)) is immediately used in the hold addition command creation process in step S359, and this data is not required thereafter. Therefore, here as well, the process is completed without storing the result of the look-ahead fluctuation pattern determination in the RAM 203 and taking it into the register.

After completing a series of look-ahead determination processes in steps S358 to S359, the winning command data 1 (EVENT) on the lower byte side obtained by the above-mentioned look-ahead fluctuation pattern determination process, the current number of pending balls, and the special symbol are subsequently completed. Based on the winning command data 2 (MODE) on the upper byte side based on the type, a "hold addition command" is created (step S360), and this is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 without being stored in the RAM 203 (step). S361). For the data on the MODE side, for example, "B6H to B9H" are set according to 1 hold of special figure 1 to 4 hold of special figure 1, and 1 hold of special figure 2 to hold of special figure 2. "BBH to BEH" are set according to the four. Regarding the data on the EVENT side, if the read-ahead prohibition condition is met or a set value data abnormality occurs, the look-ahead prohibition data (9FH) acquired in step S354 is not updated in the process of step S359. It is maintained as it is, and the hold addition command "** 9FH ('**' is a value of any of B6H to B9H and BBH to BEH)" having read-ahead prohibition data is transmitted.

Further, in the determination process in step S351, when the number of pending balls is the maximum number of reserved balls (4) (step S351: = MAX), it is assumed that an over-winning has occurred, and an over-winning command is issued to the effect control unit. It is transmitted to 24 (step S363). Specifically, when the special symbol operation confirmation data is 00H, that is, when an over-winning occurs at the special drawing 1 starting port (middle starting opening 34 or right starting opening 33), the over-winning for special drawing 1 is used. The command "B006H" is transmitted. Further, when the special symbol operation confirmation data is 01H, that is, when an over-winning occurs at the special drawing 2 starting port (lower right starting port 35), the over-winning command "B106H" for special drawing 2 is transmitted. Will be done.

After the above-mentioned hold addition command or over winning command is sent from the main control unit 20 to the effect control unit 24, when the effect control unit 24 side displays the "look-ahead notice effect" related to the operation hold ball this time. It is only used, not used in subsequent processing. Therefore, these commands also exit the start port check process without being stored in the RAM 203.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the start port check process is completed without storing the various data obtained in the series of look-ahead determination processes in step S358 in the RAM one by one. As a result, the memory capacity of the ROM or RAM can be reduced, and the control load can be reduced.

Further, in the start opening check process (process at the time of winning), the hold addition command is transmitted regardless of whether or not an abnormality occurs in the set value data, but this hold addition command has look-ahead prohibition data (9FH). Since it is a command, the effect control itself related to the look-ahead notice is prohibited. Therefore, the look-ahead notice due to the defect does not appear. If a hold addition command related to the set value is created or a look-ahead notice effect based on the command is configured to be able to appear, and if an abnormality occurs in the set value data, the look-ahead notice is allowed. If this is the case, there is a risk that a defective look-ahead notice effect, for example, a high-expectation look-ahead notice or a correct look-ahead notice, which is lost, may appear indiscriminately due to an abnormality in the set value data. However, in the case of the present embodiment, if the set value data is abnormal, the pre-reading notice itself is completely prohibited, so that such a problem does not occur. Further, even if a high-expected look-ahead notice effect appears due to a defect, the player cannot determine whether it is due to an abnormality. Therefore, when the game progress is forcibly stopped by the subsequent RAM error processing (step S411 during the special symbol variation start processing shown in FIG. 18 described later) and the high-expected look-ahead notice effect disappears. , The feeling of expectation for winning that the player has had disappears at once, which causes a great distrust of the gaming machine, but in the case of this embodiment, such a problem does not occur.

<18. Special symbol change start processing: Fig. 18>
Next, the special symbol variation start processing (steps S331, S334) in FIG. 16 will be described. FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing the details of the special symbol variation start processing.

In FIG. 18, the CPU 201 first determines whether the current special symbol operation confirmation data is "00H (special figure 1 is the processing target)" or "01H (special figure 2 is the processing target)" ( Step S401). When the special symbol operation confirmation data is 00H, the processing target of this time is the special figure 1. In this case, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 operation holding ball is zero (step S403), and the special figure 1 operation is determined. FIG. 1 If the operation holding ball is zero (step S403: YES), the "customer waiting command transmission process" of step S420 described later is executed, and if the operation holding ball is not zero (step S403: NO). ), The processing at the start of the fluctuation (steps S404 to S419) for the special figure 1 operation holding ball used for the current fluctuation display is executed.

On the other hand, when the special symbol operation confirmation data is 01H, the processing target this time is special figure 2, and in this case, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 operation holding ball is zero (step S402). If the special figure 2 operation holding ball is zero (step S402: YES), the "customer waiting command transmission process" of step S420 described later is executed, and if the special figure 2 operation holding ball is not zero (step S402). : NO), the process at the start of the fluctuation (steps S404 to S419) for the special figure 2 operation holding ball used for the current fluctuation display is executed.

(Customer waiting command transmission process: step S420)
In step S420, when the special figure 1 is the processing target (special symbol operation confirmation data “00H”), the processing described below is performed. First, it is determined whether or not the special symbol 1 operation status is "waiting for customer (00H)". When the operation status of the special symbol 1 is "waiting for customers (00H)", it is already in the waiting state for customers, so that the customer waiting command transmission process is exited and the special symbol variation start process is exited without doing anything. On the other hand, when the special symbol 1 operation status is not "waiting for customer (00H)", the customer waiting waiting process when the special figure 1 operation holding ball becomes zero is executed. In this customer waiting waiting process, 00H is set in the special symbol 1 operation status, and the special figure 1 side shifts to the waiting state without holding (first customer waiting state), and the "special figure 1 hold zero time command (BA14H)" is used. Is transmitted to the effect control unit 24. Next, it is determined whether or not the special symbol 1 operation status and the special symbol 2 operation status are "waiting for customers (00H)", and if both are "waiting for customers (00H)", all hold is held. Assuming that the state has shifted to the zero customer waiting state (third customer waiting state), the "all hold zero time command (BA04H)" is transmitted to the effect control unit 24, and the customer waiting command transmission process is exited. In the case of the present embodiment, this command at zero hold is the same command as the customer waiting command (BA04H) transmitted when the power is turned on (see steps S023 and S029 in FIG. 8A).

Further, when the special figure 2 is the processing target, the processing content is almost the same as that in the case of the special figure 1 described above. In step S420, when the special symbol 2 is the processing target (special symbol operation confirmation data “01H”), it is first determined whether or not the special symbol 2 operation status is “waiting for customer (00H)”. When the operation status of the special symbol 2 is "waiting for customer (00H)", the customer waiting command transmission process is exited and the special symbol variation start process is exited without doing anything. On the other hand, when the special symbol 2 operation status is not "waiting for customer (00H)", the above-mentioned customer waiting waiting process when the special figure 2 operation holding ball becomes zero is executed. In this customer waiting waiting process, 00H is set in the special symbol 2 operation status, and the special figure 2 side shifts to the waiting state without holding (second customer waiting state), and the "special figure 2 hold zero time command (BA24H)" is used. Is transmitted to the effect control unit 24. Next, it is determined whether or not the special symbol 1 operation status and the special symbol 2 operation status are "waiting for customers (00H)", and if both are "waiting for customers (00H)", all hold is held. Assuming that the state has shifted to the zero customer waiting state, the "all hold zero time command (BA04H)" is transmitted to the effect control unit 24, and the customer waiting command transmission process is exited.

Here, in the case of "waiting for customer (00H)" which is the special symbol operation status, the reason for exiting the special symbol change start processing without doing anything is to issue the customer waiting command without any condition when the number of pending balls is zero. When transmitted, the demo display command is repeatedly transmitted at a cycle of 4 ms while the number of pending balls is zero, and unnecessary transmission occurs. Therefore, in the case of the above "no operation hold ball" state, if the special figure 1, special figure 2, and all hold zero time commands are transmitted once, and the demo display command has already been sent, This special symbol change start process can be exited without transmitting the demo display command to the effect control unit 24.

When the effect control unit 24 receives the special figure 1 hold zero time command, the current game state is a normal state, a time saving state, or a probabilistic state, that is, a special figure 1 table fluctuation state (see FIG. 7 (b)). If the special symbol fluctuation display game 1 on the table fluctuation side has not been played for the first predetermined time (for example, 59 seconds) or more, the game shifts to the first demo state (first normal customer waiting effect mode), and the customer Display the waiting demo screen. At this time, the first demo screen is displayed even if the special figure 2 is changing (behind the scenes). The first demo state (first demo screen) is continued at least until the special figure 1 operation holding ball is generated (may be until the variable display of special figure 1 is started).

Further, when the effect control unit 24 receives the special figure 2 hold zero time command, the current game state is the latent state, that is, the special figure 2 table fluctuation state (see FIG. 7 (b)), and the second predetermined time. If the special symbol variation display game 2 on the table variation side has not been played for (for example, 60 seconds) or more, the game shifts to the second demo state (second normal customer waiting effect mode) and the demo screen is displayed. At this time, the second demo screen is displayed even if the special figure 1 is changing (behind the scenes). The second demo state (second demo screen) is continued at least until the special figure 2 operation holding ball is generated (may be until the variable display of special figure 2 is started).

Further, when the effect control unit 24 receives the command at the time of all hold zero, in this case, since all the operation hold balls are zero, the effect control unit 24 extends for a third predetermined time (for example, 61 seconds) or more regardless of the game state. When the symbol variation display games 1 and 2 are not performed, the process shifts to the third demo state (third normal customer waiting effect mode), and the demo screen is displayed. The third demo state (third demo screen) is continued in the current game state until at least the operation holding ball related to the table fluctuation side is generated.

Further, when a predetermined time (for example, 120 seconds) elapses after the display of the third demo screen (after the transition to the third demo state) relating to no all hold, the mode shifts to the "power saving mode (special customer waiting effect mode)". This power saving mode is a "power saving customer waiting state" in which the gaming machine 1 is controlled to have low power consumption. In the case of this embodiment, as a power saving mode transition condition, after the third demo screen is displayed (after the transition to the third demo state), a predetermined time elapses (for example, 120 seconds) without switching to the menu screen (game setting screen). In addition, it is designed to shift to the power saving mode. When the power saving mode transition condition is satisfied, the effect control unit 24 controls the liquid crystal display device 36 to display a power saving screen (for example, the character display of "power saving" is displayed on the liquid crystal screen), and is decorated except for the button LED 13b. It is controlled to turn off a part or all of the lamp 45 and other effect LEDs. Since the mode is shifted to the power saving mode via the demo screen, the button LED 13b is already informed that the operation is valid in the power saving mode. However, in the main control side main processing shown in FIGS. 8A and 8B, after the game start command (see step S034 in FIG. 8B) is transmitted, the mode shifts to the "power saving mode" when a predetermined time elapses. It has become. This is because it is determined that the game start ready state is not ready until the game start command is transmitted from the main control unit 20.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the operation of the effect button 13 or the direction key 75 is detected during the display period of the demo screen (during the demo screen), the "menu screen (game setting)" that allows the game to be set such as the volume and the amount of light. It is possible to switch to "Direction)" and display it. The timing at which the menu screen can be switched, that is, the button valid period (operation valid period) in the demo screen is notified by the button LED 13b. In the case of this embodiment, the button LED 13b lights or blinks in a notification mode (for example, orange) different from the normal notification mode (for example, white) as an operation valid notification in the demo screen, and is a period during which the menu screen can be switched. Is notified.

The first predetermined time, the second predetermined time, and the third predetermined time may be the same time, respectively, or some of them (for example, the first predetermined time and the second predetermined time) are at the same time. There may be. Further, the display contents of the first demo screen, the second demo screen, and the third demo screen may be the same or different from each other. Further, in the case of the first demo screen and the second demo screen, the dedicated display area 160 may be preferentially displayed with respect to the demo screen to clarify the fluctuation display operation of the special figure during the back fluctuation.

In the following description of steps S404 to S419, when the special symbol operation confirmation data is 00H (in the case of, processing for the special figure 1 operation holding ball), and 01H (special figure 2 is the processing target), the special figure 2 operation is suspended. Although the processing is for spheres, the processing method is substantially the same. Therefore, unless there is a particular need, in order to avoid duplicate description, the case where Special Figure 1 is the processing target will be explained. The case where 2 is the processing target will be omitted.

Proceeding to the process of step S404, the number of operation-holding balls is subtracted by 1 (the number of operation-holding balls in the special figure used for the current fluctuation display operation-1: step S404), and the "holding" including the operation-holding ball number information after the subtraction is included. A "subtraction command" is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 (step S405). By this hold subtraction command, the effect control unit 24 side grasps the remaining number of operation hold balls after the current number of operation hold balls is digested, and shifts the hold display currently being displayed.

Next, the hold data stored in the hold storage area of the RAM 203 is shifted (step S406), and the hold 4 storage area is cleared to zero (step S407). In the processing of steps S406 to S407, the hold data (big hit determination random number, special symbol determination random number, and fluctuation pattern) stored in the hold storage area (hold 1 storage area) corresponding to the hold storage number n = 1 are used. (Random number) is read and stored in the determination random number storage area of RAM 203, and the hold storage area (hold 2 storage area, hold 3 storage area, hold 4 storage) corresponding to the hold n storage area (n = 2, 3, 4) is stored. The hold data stored in the area) is stored in the hold storage area corresponding to'n-1', and the hold 4 storage area is cleared to zero to provide a free area. As a result, the start order of the special symbol variation display game matches the order of the number of operation-holding balls n (n = 1, 2, 3, 4), and the operation-holding balls acquired at the time of winning the start opening are stored in any of the holdings. While it is specified whether it corresponds to the area, it becomes possible to hold and store a new operation holding ball.

Next, the game state information transmission process is executed (step S408). The details of the game state information transmission process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, the setting abnormality check process is executed (step S409), and it is determined whether or not the setting error flag is in the ON state (= 5AH) (step S410). The setting abnormality check process in step S409 is a process common to the setting abnormality check process (FIG. 27) in step S356 during the start port check process of FIG. 17, and the process content of step S410 is the step during the process. This is a process common to S357.

(If no setting error has occurred (normal): Processing route from S410 to S413)
First, the case where the setting error flag is not in the ON state (in the case of normal operation) will be described, and the case where the setting error flag is in the ON state (when the RAM is abnormal) will be described later.

When the setting error flag is not in the ON state (step S410: = 5AH), a setting value command is transmitted to determine whether or not a big hit has been won, and a small hit determination process for determining whether or not a small hit has been won. The hit determination process is sequentially executed (steps S413 and S414). The above-mentioned set value command includes information that can specify the current set value, and is used when the effect control unit 24 side appears and controls a notice effect, a setting suggestion effect, and the like based on the set value. The details of the big hit determination process will be described later in FIG. 20 and the details of the small hit determination process will be described later in FIG.

(About the production mode related to the set value)
Since the above-mentioned set value command includes the set value information, the effect control unit 24 can grasp and manage the current set value from the set value command. In the present embodiment, in the notice effect (including the look-ahead advance notice) and the hit effect, the effect related to the current set value (for example, the setting suggestion effect described later) can be displayed. As a result, the player can be given a guessing element for estimating the internal set value, and the player can enjoy the game while guessing what the internal set value is. In addition, by realizing the effect according to the set value, it is possible to make various variations of the effect.

Examples of the "setting suggestion effect" include a "low setting suggestion effect" that suggests a low setting (settings 1 to 3), an "even number setting suggestion effect" that suggests an even number setting (settings 2, 4, and 6), and an odd number setting. "Odd number setting suggestion effect" suggesting (settings 1, 3 and 5), "high setting suggestion effect" suggesting high setting (settings 4 to 6), and "setting 6" of the highest setting value are deterministically notified. There are a "setting 6 final effect", a specific range suggestion effect that suggests a set value of a specific range (for example, setting N or more (N <6))). For example, it is possible to suggest a current setting value by displaying a specific item image or character image, or displaying a specific sound effect or a specific light effect. Such a setting suggestion effect can be made to appear in association with various advance notice effects such as reach effect, pseudo-ream, player participation type effect, and look-ahead advance notice effect.

In addition, as an effect related to the set value, the appearance rate of one or more specific notice effects (for example, normal medium SP reach B, SP reach with pseudo 3) at each set value or some set values. Can be different. For example, even when the same fluctuation pattern (for example, normal SP reach A) is selected between setting 1 and setting 6, a setting estimation element is generated due to a difference in appearance rate. In addition, for decorative symbols, the appearance rate of a specific lost symbol mode (decorative stop symbol at the time of loss: for example, "2", "2", "4") shall be different for each set value or a part of the set values. Can be done. The appearance rate can be determined as appropriate. For example, the appearance rates are set to high probabilities in the order of settings 1 to 6, settings 1 to 3 are set to different appearance rates from settings 4 to 5 and settings 6, and settings 1 to 3 are set to the same appearance rate from 4 to 4. 6 can have different appearance rates.

It is also possible to perform a setting suggestion effect using the look-ahead notice effect. For example, the hold display (hold icon) can be changed to an item image for setting suggestion, or a hold icon using a hold color other than the special hold display mode can be displayed (special hold display mode). In this case, the above-mentioned low setting suggestion effect to specific range suggestion effect can be displayed by using the special hold display mode. In addition, the appearance rate of the special hold display mode can be different for each set value or a part of the set values. Further, the appearance rate of a specific special hold display mode (for example, blue hold color) may be different for each set value or a part of the set values without using the special hold display mode.

In addition, the setting suggestion effect may appear when the symbol variation display game reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, 128 games) after the power is turned on, or within a specific number of games range (for example, between 128 games and 150 games). The appearance rate can be set to a high probability. Further, not only after the power is turned on, but also after the end of the big hit game, or after the end of the big hit by a specific big hit. Further, the hitting effect during the big hit game that triggers the transition to the probability change state or the time saving state (non-transition of the latent probability state) and the number of executions of the symbol variation display game after the end of the big hit game may be targeted. In particular, if the transition to the small hit rush cannot be obtained even if it becomes a big hit (when the big hit (see Fig. 4) that does not shift to the latent probability state is won), the setting suggestion effect is set to excite the player. It is preferable that the game appears with a higher probability (including 100%) than when the jackpot is won (the appearance rate may be 0%). On the contrary, as a privilege to acquire the transition to the small hit rush (when the jackpot for the transition to the latent state (see Fig. 4) is won), the setting suggestion effect is won when the jackpot for the non-transition to the latent state is won ( It is preferable that it appears with a higher probability (including 100%) than (the appearance rate may be 0%).

After completing the winning lottery in steps S413 to S414, the special stop symbol creation process is then executed (step S415). This special stop symbol creation process is a process of executing a symbol lottery, and the winning type (winning type) is determined by this process. Specifically, the special symbol determination data (winning type (symbol type)) and the special stop symbol number are determined. The special stop symbol creation process is substantially the same as the "special stop symbol creation process at the time of winning (look-ahead symbol determination process)" described in the look-ahead determination process (step S358) during the start port check process of FIG. This is the processing content, and here, the symbol lottery at the start of fluctuation is performed.

Next, the game state transition preparation process is executed (step S416). In this game state transition preparation process, in the case of a big hit, necessary setting processing for designating the game state after the end of the big hit game is performed based on the big hit type and the current game state (see FIG. 4).

Next, the special symbol variation pattern creation process is executed (step S417). In this special symbol variation pattern creation process, the variation pattern (FIGS. 33 to 36) at the start of the variation related to the operation holding ball used for the current variation display operation is determined. Details of this special symbol variation pattern creation process will be described later with reference to FIG. 22.

Next, the command transmission process (step S418) at the start of fluctuation is performed. In the command transmission process at the start of fluctuation, a "variation pattern specification command" capable of specifying the content of the fluctuation pattern determined in the special symbol fluctuation pattern creation process (step S417) is created, and this is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 side. To do. In this fluctuation pattern specification command, as fluctuation pattern information, for example, game state information, winning lottery result information, fluctuation time of a special symbol, presence / absence of pseudo-ream (if there is pseudo-ream, the number of pseudo-ream), reach effect Information about the presence or absence of (if there is a reach effect, the type of the reach effect) is included, and is used when the effect control unit 24 determines various advance notice effects to be displayed during the decorative symbol variation display game. To.

Further, following the variation pattern designation command, a "decorative symbol designation command" is created based on the symbol lottery result obtained in the special stop symbol creation process (step S415), and this is transmitted to the effect control unit 24. This decorative symbol specification command is composed of two bytes, a high-order byte (MODE) for specifying a special symbol type and a low-order byte (EVNET) for specifying a big hit type, a small hit type, and a loss type. Therefore, the "decorative symbol designation command" includes information on the special symbol type and the winning type (symbol lottery result). Since the winning type information is included in this decorative symbol designation command, the effect control unit 24 mainly displays the combination of decorative symbols (reach symbol) when forming the reach state and the decorative symbol that is finally stopped and displayed. It is used when determining the combination of (decorative stop symbols). Since the variation pattern designation command includes at least the winning result information and the variation pattern information, the effect control unit 24 uses the variation pattern designation command as the basis for the advance notice effect mode related to the current symbol variation display game. It is also possible to determine a stop decoration symbol and execute a symbol variation display game.

Then, as the setting process at the start of fluctuation, the special symbol operation status is switched to "changing (02H)" (02H is stored in the special symbol operation status), and the changing flag of the special symbol type to be processed this time is turned ON (5AH). Set to (store) and clear the determination random number storage area to zero (step S419). The above-mentioned "changing flag" is a flag indicating whether or not the special symbol is changing, and when the flag is in the ON state (= 5AH), it indicates that the display operation of the special symbol is changing. , When the flag is in the OFF state (= 00H), it indicates that the special symbol is being stopped and displayed. In this embodiment, the "special symbol 1 changing flag" corresponding to the special figure 1 and the "special symbol 2 changing flag" corresponding to the special figure 2 are dealt with. Since the special symbol 1 is described here, the special symbol 1 changing flag is turned ON, and the special symbol 1 operation status is switched to "changing (02H)".

(When a setting error error occurs (RAM error): Processing route from S410 to S415)
Returning to the explanation of step S410, when the setting error flag is in the ON state (step S357: = 5AH), it is assumed that an abnormality in the set value data has occurred, the processing of steps S413 to S414 related to the winning lottery is skipped, and step S415 Executes the special stop symbol creation process of.

In the present embodiment, the winning lottery is not executed when the set value data abnormality occurs. When a big hit or a small hit is won in the previous symbol variation display game, the big hit judgment flag and the small hit judgment flag indicating the winning are cleared (00H) at the end of the symbol variation display game. (See steps S505 and S511 of FIG. 26A described later). Therefore, if the winning lottery processing of steps S413 to S414 is not executed in the current symbol variation display game, the winning lottery result is always "missing".

In the special stop symbol creation process in step S415, the symbol lottery is executed based on the result of the winning lottery being "missing". In the case of a setting abnormality error, the loss type may be determined using the loss symbol table as usual, but the error-specific loss may be determined. For example, in the present embodiment,'Loss A to C'are provided, but'Loss D', which is not normally selected, can be provided as a loss (loss type for error) for a setting abnormality error.

Next, the special symbol variation pattern creation process is executed (step S417). The details of the special symbol variation pattern creation process at the time of a setting abnormality error will be described later with reference to FIG. When the special symbol variation pattern creation process is completed, the processes of steps S418 and S419 are executed to exit the special symbol variation start process.

When the special symbol variation start process is exited as described above, the special symbol display data update process (step S335) of FIG. 16 is performed, and thus the variation display of the special symbol is started.

(Modification example when a setting error occurs)
In the above embodiment, when a setting abnormality error occurs, the winning lottery (big hit judgment processing, small hit judgment processing) is skipped, but not only the winning lottery but also the symbol lottery (step S415) and the variable pattern lottery (step). It is also possible to skip steps S415 to S419 including S416) and exit the process without doing anything. In other words, the special symbol management process is exited without starting the symbol variation display game. In this case, since the variation pattern designation command and the decorative symbol designation command are not transmitted to the effect control unit 24, it is preferable to control the game so that the game cannot be executed even if a RAM error occurs. For example, when a RAM error occurs, data to be transmitted to at least the special symbol display devices 38a and 38b in order to explicitly notify that the game progress has stopped (the special symbol variation display game is not executed). To clear. Further, during this RAM error, it is preferable not to execute at least the processes of the normal symbol management process (step S091) to the special electric accessory management process (step S095) as the processes related to the symbol variation display game. Since the performance display monitor process (step S101) is a process belonging to the out-of-area memory side, the process may be configured to be executed even if a RAM error occurs.

<19. Game status information transmission process: Fig. 19>
Next, the game state information transmission process (step S408) in FIG. 18 will be described. FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing details of the game state information transmission process.

In FIG. 19, the CPU 201 first executes the changing command transmission process (step S425). In this changing command transmission process, first, the current special symbol 1 operation status and the special symbol 2 operation status are acquired, a changing command is created, and this is transmitted to the effect control unit 24.

The above "changing command" is composed of 2 bytes, and the data (EEH: MODE) on the upper byte side that specifies that the command is changing, and the special figure that can specify the behavior of special figure 1 and special figure 2. It is composed of lower byte side data (EVENT) including behavior information. As for the data of the lower byte (EVENT), the upper 4 bits are the special figure behavior information of special figure 2 ("1 * H" to "3 * H": * are 1 to 3), and the lower 4 bits are the special figure 1 special. The figure behavior information (“* 1H” to “* 3H”: * is 1 to 3), and the behavior of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is specified by a combination of these. For example, "EE11H" indicates "waiting for special figure 2 and waiting for special figure 1", "EE12H" indicates "waiting for special figure 2 and waiting for special figure 1", and "EE13H" indicates If there is, it indicates "waiting for special figure 2 and confirming special figure 2". The special symbol behavior information included in the changing command is the effect display of the fourth symbol 157 and the fourth symbol 159 in the dedicated display area 160 on the effect control unit 24 side, and the effect display between the front variation state and the back variation state. It is used when switching between.

Next, the state command transmission process is executed (step S426). The state command includes at least game state information that can identify the current game state, but in the case of this embodiment, in addition to the current game state, jackpot count information (first hit / jackpot count information during consecutive villas), A status command including information on the number of remaining time reductions and information on the number of remaining ST times is transmitted. The information included in the state command is used on the effect control unit 24 side for the effect mode transition control and the advance notice effect lottery, and is used for displaying the remaining time reduction number of times and the number of consecutive villas information on the liquid crystal screen. Then, when the state command transmission is completed, the game state information transmission process is exited.

<20. Jackpot determination process: Fig. 20>
Next, the jackpot determination process (step S413) in FIG. 18 will be described. FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing the details of the jackpot determination process.

In FIG. 20, the CPU 201 first sequentially determines the states of the special symbol 1 jackpot determination flag and the special symbol 2 jackpot determination flag (steps S431 and S432). The special symbol 1 jackpot determination flag and the special symbol 2 jackpot determination flag are flags for designating whether or not a jackpot has been won, and if the flag is in the ON state (= 5AH), the jackpot winning is won. Indicates (during the jackpot winning state), and when the flag is in the OFF state (= 00H), it indicates that the jackpot has not been won (during the jackpot non-winning state). The special symbol 1 jackpot determination flag or the special symbol 2 jackpot determination flag is set to 5AH (winning) or 00H (non-winning) based on the winning lottery result (winning lottery result regarding the jackpot) in step S436 described later. When the special symbol 1 jackpot determination flag or the special symbol 2 jackpot determination flag is ON (5AH), the symbol variation display game ends (to be exact, the final display time elapses after the special symbol variation display ends. Hour) Zero clear (special symbol jackpot determination flag ← 00H) (see step S505 in FIG. 26A described later).

When either the special symbol 1 jackpot determination flag or the special symbol 2 jackpot determination flag is in the ON state (5AH) (the determination result in step S431 or S432 is'= 5AH'), that is, when the fluctuation of the special figure 1 starts. If FIG. 2 is a big hit, or if special figure 1 is a big hit at the start of fluctuation of the special figure 2, the big hit determination process is exited without doing anything.

On the other hand, when both the special symbol 1 jackpot determination flag and the special symbol 2 jackpot determination flag are in the OFF state (00H) (the determination result in step S431 or S432 is'≠ 5AH'), the above according to the special symbol operation confirmation data. Acquire a hit random number determination table (not shown) (step S433). This hit random number table is the same as the table used in the winning jackpot random number determination process (look-ahead win / loss determination process) during the look-ahead determination process (step S358 in FIG. 17).

Next, the jackpot determination random number value stored in the determination random number storage area is acquired (step S434), and a winning lottery is performed based on the jackpot determination random number value and the hit random number determination table (step S435: random number determination process). The result is stored in the jackpot determination flag area of the RAM 203 (step S436). However, here, the winning of the big hit is determined, and the winning of the small hit is performed in the subsequent small hit determination process (step S414). As a result, the big hit determination process is exited, and then the small hit determination process is executed.

(Regular lottery (with big hit lottery), no big hit lottery (no big hit lottery))
In addition to the above jackpot determination process, if the determination target this time is a special figure 1 operation pending ball, and the other special figure 2 is already in the jackpot winning state when the jackpot determination process is executed (step). S432: The special symbol 2 jackpot determination flag = 5AH) and the own jackpot winning determination (step S435) are not executed, and the current jackpot determination process is exited. Similarly, when the processing target of this time is the special figure 2 operation holding ball, if the other special figure 1 is already in the big hit winning state (step S431: special symbol 1 big hit determination flag = 5AH), it is its own. The jackpot determination process is exited without executing the jackpot winning determination (step S435). That is, when one of the special symbols is determined to be a big hit (when the result of the symbol variation display game is a big hit), when the winning lottery related to the other special symbol is executed, the big hit is drawn. It is controlled to be excluded from the target, that is, the "big hit no lottery state (special lottery state: hereinafter abbreviated as" no lottery ")" in which the winning judgment as to whether or not it is a big hit is not executed. Therefore, as for the result of the other symbol variation display game under the big hit no lottery, a result other than the big hit, that is,'missing'or'small hit' is derived. In the case of this embodiment, when the winning lottery on the special drawing 1 side is executed, if the winning lottery on the special drawing 2 side is a big hit, the winning lottery result on the special drawing 1 side becomes "missing", and the winning lottery on the special drawing 2 side becomes "missing". When the winning lottery is executed, if the special drawing 1 side is a big hit winning, the winning lottery result on the special drawing 1 side is "small hit or loss".

<21. Small hit determination process: Fig. 21>
Next, the small hit determination process (step S414) in FIG. 18 will be described. FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing the details of the small hit determination process.

In FIG. 21, the CPU 201 first determines the special symbol operation confirmation data (step S441). When the special symbol operation confirmation data is 00H (step S441: = 00H), the small hit determination process is exited without doing anything. This is because the big hit lottery target on the special figure 1 side does not include the small hit. Therefore, when the big hit lottery target on the special figure 1 side includes a small hit, the processes of steps S442 to S445 described later may be executed.

When the special symbol operation confirmation data is 01H (step S441: = 01H), the hit random number determination table for special figure 2 is acquired (step S442), and the random number value for jackpot determination stored in the random number storage area for determination is acquired. (Step S443).

Then, a winning lottery is performed based on the big hit determination random number value and the hit random number determination table (step S4444: random number determination process), and the result is stored in the small hit determination flag area of the RAM 203 (step S445). Here, as part of the winning lottery, the winning of a small hit is determined. If neither the big hit nor the small hit is won, the result of this winning lottery will be a loss.

<22. Fluctuation pattern creation process: Fig. 22>
Next, the variation pattern creation process (step S417) in FIG. 18 will be described. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing the details of the variation pattern creation process.

In FIG. 22, the CPU 201 first acquires the “variable pattern distribution table selection table” shown in FIG. 33 (step S451), and then the current special symbol operation confirmation data is 00H (special figure 1 is the processing target). It is determined whether the data is present or 01H (special figure 2 is the processing target) (step S452). As shown in FIG. 33, the variable pattern distribution table selection table of the present embodiment includes the current game state (YJ), winning type (special symbol determination data), and special symbol jackpot determination flag (normal lottery or no lottery). (Used to identify), and the fluctuation pattern distribution table (FB1 to FB16 (for jackpot), FH1 to 3) associated with the number of operation-reserved balls (the number of operation-reserved balls after subtracting the digested amount this time: hold 0 to 3). FH25 (for loss)) is defined.

When the current special symbol operation confirmation data is 00H, that is, when special drawing 1 is the processing target (step S452: = 00H), the current gaming state is referred to with reference to the variation pattern distribution table selection table shown in FIG. (YJ), winning type (special symbol judgment data), special symbol 2 jackpot judgment flag status, special figure 1 variable pattern distribution table according to the number of pending balls, etc. (for jackpot in FIG. 34 or special in FIG. 35) (Loss for FIG. 1) is acquired (step S453B).

On the other hand, when the current special symbol operation confirmation data is 01H, that is, when the special figure 2 is the processing target (step S452: = 01H), the current variation pattern distribution table selection table shown in FIG. 33 is referred to. Game state (YJ), winning type (special symbol judgment data), special symbol 1 jackpot judgment flag status, and special figure 2 variable pattern distribution table according to the number of pending balls (FIG. 34 (for jackpot), FIG. 36). (Loss for special figure 2 / small hit)) is acquired (step S453A).

Next, a random number for a variation pattern (magnitude of random number value: 10000) is acquired, and a variation pattern is selected with reference to the variation pattern distribution table acquired in the process of step S453A or step S453B (step S455). As shown in FIGS. 34 to 36, judgment values (winning areas) corresponding to fluctuation patterns are defined in the fluctuation pattern distribution table, and one of the fluctuation patterns is determined at a predetermined selection rate. It has become so. For example, in the fluctuation pattern distribution table FB1 of FIG. 34, the selection rate of "normal fluctuation direct hit hit" is 200/10000, normal medium N reach 1 is 80/10000, ..., RUSH direct hit reach is 2600/10000. Then, one of the fluctuation patterns from the normal fluctuation direct hit hit to the RUSH direct hit reach is determined by lottery. When the fluctuation pattern is determined, the command data on the upper byte side (MODE) and the lower byte side (EVENT) for constructing the "variation pattern specification command" are determined. The variation pattern designation command itself is created in the subsequent process of step S418 in FIG. 18 and transmitted to the effect control unit 24.

Further, along with the determination of the fluctuation pattern, a fluctuation time table (not shown) corresponding to the fluctuation pattern is also determined (step S456). In this "fluctuation time table", the fluctuation time of the special symbol is defined, and the fluctuation time is determined with reference to the fluctuation time table.

Then, the fluctuation time determined in step S456 is set in the special symbol operation timer 1 according to the current special symbol operation confirmation data (step S457). If the special symbol operation confirmation data is 00H, the fluctuation time is set in the special symbol 1 operation timer 1 of the special figure 1, and if the special symbol operation confirmation data is 01H, the special symbol 2 operation timer 1 of the special figure 2 is set. Set the fluctuation time.

As described above, the command transmission process (step S418) at the start of the variation in FIG. 18 is executed without passing through the special symbol variation pattern creation process.

(22-1. Fluctuation pattern distribution table selection process for Special Figure 2: Step steps S453A to S455)
Here, the variable pattern distribution table selection table and the variable pattern distribution table, which are characteristic elements of the present invention, will be described. Here, for convenience of explanation, first, a case where the special symbol operation confirmation data is 01H (step S452: = 01H), that is, a case where the processing target this time is the special figure 2 operation holding ball will be described.

In the process of step S453A, the fluctuation pattern distribution table is determined with reference to the fluctuation pattern distribution table selection table of FIG. 33. In particular, the symbol lottery is performed in the'latent state'where the special figure 2 is the table fluctuation state. When the result is "Loss A (Special Figure 2 Hold 0 Loss A, Special Figure 2 Hold 1-3 Loss A) or Small Hit (Special Figure 2 Hold 0 Small Hit, Special Figure 2 Hold 1-3 Small Hit)" The variable pattern distribution table that can be selected differs depending on the ON / OFF state of the special symbol 1 jackpot determination flag. In other words, the variable pattern distribution table that can be selected differs depending on whether or not the special figure 1 side has won the big hit.

Specifically, referring to the fluctuation pattern distribution table selection table of FIG. 33, when the special symbol 1 jackpot determination flag is not in the OFF state (00H), that is, the other special figure 1 has not won the jackpot. In the case of "in the jackpot non-winning state (special figure 1 loss fluctuation)", one of the fluctuation pattern distribution tables "FH9 to FH12" in the "normal lottery" column shown in the figure is selected. It has become. On the other hand, when the special symbol 1 big hit determination flag is in the ON state (5AH), that is, when the other special figure 1 is in the big hit winning state (special figure 1 big hit fluctuation), the same applies. One of the fluctuation pattern distribution tables "FH13 to FH16" in the "No lottery" column shown in the figure is selected ('Hold 0 Loss A in the special symbol type column "Special Figure 2". ~ Hold 1-3 See the variable pattern distribution table corresponding to the small hit'). In addition, in the case of the'normal state, time saving state and probability change state' in which the special figure 2 is in the back fluctuation state, the common fluctuation pattern distribution table "FH7" is selected regardless of the state of the special symbol 1 jackpot judgment flag. It is supposed to be done.

In this way, when the processing target of this time is the special figure 2, whether or not the other special figure 1 has won the big hit (ON / OFF state of the special symbol 1 big hit determination flag: the big hit winning lottery of the special figure 1). The reason why the result) is set as one of the selection conditions of the fluctuation pattern is as follows.

If the processing target is the special figure 2 side and the other special figure 1 has already won the big hit, the big hit lottery of special figure 2 (step S435 in FIG. 20) is not executed. Therefore, the winning lottery result this time is forcibly either "missing" or "small hit" (see FIGS. 20 and 21), and the symbol lottery result (step S415 in FIG. 18) is "missing A" or It will be one of the "small hits". In the following, the case where the big hit winning lottery is executed will be referred to as "normal lottery", and the case where the big hit winning lottery is not executed will be referred to as "no lottery" or "forced loss".

Here, in order to facilitate the understanding of the present invention, the current gaming state will be described as "in a latent state (variable state in Table 2 of Special Figure 2)" in which a small hit rush occurs.

During the latent state, a high-speed fluctuation pattern (normal fluctuation 2s to normal fluctuation 4s) in which the fluctuation time width of the special symbol is 2 to 4 seconds is selected with high probability (see FIG. 36). Such a "high-speed fluctuation state" is a game state that emphasizes the playability of "increasing the average digestion speed of the game and increasing the time efficiency related to the progress of the game (increasing the ball ejection speed)". It is useful. In particular, in the latent state where a small hit rush occurs, many players want to quickly accumulate balls in a short time and enjoy the feeling of increasing ball output, and the high-speed fluctuation state is suitable for such a game state. Is.

On the other hand, when selecting a fluctuation pattern, in order to fuel the expectation of winning a big hit, the reach variation that specifies the reach effect and the pseudo-ream variation that specifies the pseudo-ream are appropriately interwoven, and the fanning effect becomes monotonous. It is necessary to devise so that it does not become. Therefore, in the conventional gaming machine, for example, in the fluctuation pattern distribution table "FH9 to FH12" (see the column of "latent probability (normal lottery)") for the normal lottery shown in FIG. As described above, a variation pattern that specifies a notice effect having a high degree of fanning (for example, a high expectation notice effect) is included in the selection target. Specifically, the fluctuation time is relatively long, "latent medium weak SP reach (variation time 30 seconds)", "latent medium strong SP reach (variation time 40 seconds)", and "fall avoidance reach (variation time 20 seconds)". ) ”And other high-expectation notices (for example, high-expectation notices such as SP reach, and special notices that encourage whether or not to reach with 7 symbols (small hit rush transition confirmed symbols) (fall avoidance reach)) , Player participation type production, etc.) is included in the selection target.

However, under the situation when there is no lottery, if a fluctuation pattern that specifies a notice effect with a high degree of fanning is included in the selection target as in the conventional fluctuation pattern selection technique described above, only a loss or a small hit will be won. Nevertheless, a fluctuation pattern with a long fluctuation time is selected indiscriminately, leading to a game situation in which the progress of the game is unnecessarily delayed. In addition, under the circumstances when there is no lottery, the high-expectation notice production only arouses the player's tension and the like meaninglessly, and there is little significance in making the production appear.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, with respect to the variable pattern distribution table selection table shown in FIG. 33, the variable pattern distribution table can be selected depending on whether the lottery is normal or not. Here, since it is explained that the current game state is the latent state, if the other special figure 1 is in the'big hit non-winning state (special figure 1 loss fluctuating)', the "normal lottery time (normal lottery time) Special figure 2 The variable pattern distribution table "FH9 to FH12 (see the column of" latent probability, normal lottery "in the figure)" for big hit winning lottery is selected, and the big hit winning state (special figure 1) is selected. In the case of'big hits are changing)', the variable pattern distribution table "FH13 to FH16 (see the column of" latent, no lottery "in the figure)" is selected for no lottery (special figure 2 no big hit lottery). Will be done.

(22-1-2: Features of variable pattern distribution table for no lottery)
As shown in FIG. 36, the above-mentioned "variable pattern distribution table FH9 to FH12 for no lottery" has the following features as compared with "variable pattern distribution table FH13 to FH16 for normal lottery". I'm letting you. In the following, when it is referred to as "not selected", it may be either a case of "performing a variable pattern lottery but its selection rate is 0%" or a case of "excluding from the lottery target".

(W) At least the reach fluctuation pattern is not selected. In the case of the present embodiment, the reach fluctuation pattern and the fluctuation pattern with pseudo-ream are not selected, and only the normal fluctuation pattern having a relatively low winning expectation is selected (see, for example, tables FH13 to FH16). Therefore, a player participation type production and a reach production that require a relatively long production time width, and other notice productions with a high degree of aggravation of the expectation of winning a big hit, that is, a high expectation degree notice production does not appear. In particular, when the reach variation pattern is not selected, the appearance rate of the reach effect can be set to zero. The selection rate of the reach fluctuation pattern may be set to a relatively low probability. (F) The selection rate of the "short fluctuation pattern" (for example, normal fluctuation 2s, normal fluctuation 3s, etc.) with a relatively short fluctuation time is high. In other words, the selection rate of the "long fluctuation pattern" with a relatively long fluctuation time is low. Therefore, in this case as well, as in the case of (W) described above, the high-expectation notice effect does not appear or is difficult to appear. Further, in the case of the present embodiment, the selectivity of the shortest normal fluctuation 2s is high (for example, comparison with "FH10 and FH14" or "FH12 and FH16"). Therefore, in the configuration of switching the variable pattern distribution table between the non-lottery and the normal lottery, the configuration of switching the variable pattern distribution table between the non-lottery and the normal lottery is better than the form of referring to the variable pattern distribution table common to the non-lottery and the normal lottery. The average digestion speed per game will be faster.
To put it simply, the fluctuation pattern distribution table for non-lottery has a relatively lower expectation of winning a big hit than the fluctuation pattern distribution table for normal lottery. Is a table structure that is easy to select. As a result, when there is no lottery, it becomes easier for a low expectation notice effect with a relatively low winning expectation to appear (the appearance rate is high), and a high expectation notice effect etc. appears. It becomes difficult to be done (the appearance rate is low).

(Modification example of variable pattern distribution table for no lottery)
In the case of no lottery, as described above, paying attention to the technical idea of "making it difficult to make the high expectation notice effect appear" or "not making the high expectation notice effect appear", the following It may be a table structure.

(Y) In the case of no lottery, the fluctuation pattern specified by N reach is selected, but the fluctuation pattern specified by SP reach is not selected as in (W) above. The table configuration may be such that no selection is made (at least the reach variation pattern specified by SP reach is not selected from the reach variation patterns). This is because the N reach type (for example, N reach during latent probability) has a shorter fluctuation time and a lower expectation of winning than the SP reach type (for example, weak SP reach during latent probability). In this case, even among the high-expectation notice effects (for example, SP reach), the "extreme heat notice effect (for example, strong SP reach)" with a relatively high expectation will not appear.
(Yo-1) Further, among the fluctuation pattern types at the time of loss, at least the fluctuation pattern having the highest expectation of winning may not be selected. For example, in the case of latent probability, "normal fluctuation 2s to latent medium weak SP reach, fall avoidance reach" other than latent medium strong SP reach can be selected. In this case, the intense heat notice effect does not appear or is difficult to appear. That is, this example is a form that does not exclude even the appearance of the intense heat notice effect.

(T) Further, in the case of no lottery, the "variable pattern distribution table for no lottery" may be used in both the case of loss and the case of small hit. For example, "FH13 (when the number of holds is zero) and FH14 (when the number of holds is 1 to 3)" for loss A is not provided, and "FH15 (when the number of holds is zero) and FH16 (when the number of holds is 1 to 3)" for small hits are not provided. Case) ”can also be used.

(Re) Further, when there is no lottery, a table that does not depend on the number of balls on hold may be used. For example, regardless of the number of pending operations in FIG. 2, "FH14" may be used in the case of loss A, and "FH16" may be used in the case of small hits. In this case, the loss A and the small hit may be combined with "FH14" or "FH16".

(S) Further, as shown in FIG. 36, the “variable pattern distribution table FH11 to FH12 for non-lottery” according to the present embodiment has the same variation as the “variable pattern distribution table FH13 to FH16 for normal lottery”. Although the pattern is defined, the present invention is not limited to this. The "variable pattern distribution table for normal lottery" and the "variable pattern distribution table for non-lottery" can determine a variation pattern of a part different type or a variation pattern of a completely different type. Specifically, the following configurations (So-1) to (So-2) can be used.
(So-1) In the “normal lottery fluctuation pattern distribution table”, as shown in FIG. 36, a fluctuation pattern of “normal fluctuation 2s to fall avoidance reach” is defined. However, in the "variable pattern distribution table for non-lottery", it is possible to determine a type of variation pattern that is partially or completely different from these. For example, one or a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns can be defined as fluctuation patterns dedicated to non-lottery. Specifically, the fluctuation patterns "normal fluctuation 2s for no lottery (variation time 2 seconds)" and "N reach for no lottery" that do not correspond to any of the normal fluctuation 2s to the fall avoidance reach are prepared, and "no lottery" is prepared. In the "variable pattern distribution table for lottery", four types of normal fluctuation 2s to normal fluctuation 4s (common to normal lottery) and non-lottery normal fluctuation 2s (non-lottery only) may be specified, or no lottery. Only the normal variation of 2 s may be set. In addition, when the reach variation pattern is configured to be selectable, "N reach for no lottery" may be further included. In any case, the variable pattern distribution table for non-lottery is easier to select a variable pattern with a relatively low expectation of winning a big hit than the variable pattern distribution table for normal lottery. can do.
(So-2) When a fluctuation pattern dedicated to non-lottery is selected, a notice production that suggests or definitively notifies that the result of the symbol fluctuation display game on the back fluctuation side is a big hit appears as a notice effect. Can be made to. That is, the main effect side of the front variation side can display the advance notice effect regarding the game result of the back variation side.

(T) In addition, when there is no lottery, there will always be a loss or a small hit, so in any of the above cases (wa) to (so-2), the big hit will be definitively notified. The winning effect does not appear, but the winning effect that notifies the small hit winning can appear.

(About other reasons for setting up a variable pattern distribution table for non-lottery)
By the way, the above-mentioned "a configuration in which the variable pattern distribution table is switched between the non-lottery time and the normal lottery time has a faster average digestion speed per game" has the following advantages. The details will be described below.

When the processing target of this time is special figure 2 and the other special figure 1 wins a big hit, "variation per 4 minutes during latency" is selected as the fluctuation pattern of special figure 1 (game of FIG. 34). Refer to the "FB5" column of "Special Figure 1, Common A (meaning common (combined) for jackpots 1 to 4)" corresponding to the state type "latent probability" column). Therefore, it takes a maximum of 240 seconds until the jackpot fluctuation of the special figure 1 is completed.

Here, the fact that the special figure 1 is won as a big hit means that if the big hit type is big hit 1 (selection rate 5%) or big hit 2 (selection rate 10%), it re-enters the latent state and re-enters. , It will be a small hit rush, but there is a high possibility that you have won 3 big hits or 4 big hits (in the case of this embodiment, the probability of falling from the latent state is 85% (the selection rate of 3 big hits is 50%). , The selection rate of jackpot 4 is 35%), which is a high probability (see FIG. 4)). In the latent state, the special figure 1 side is in a back-floating state (see FIG. 7), and in terms of production, it is not notified which of the big hits 1 to 4 is won, and the player side. For, there is no clue as to whether the fluctuation in Special Figure 1 is a jackpot fluctuation or a loss fluctuation.

However, in terms of the game situation, in any case, there is a crisis situation in which the "small hit rush" ends due to the big hit winning in Special Figure 1. In particular, if the jackpot 3 or jackpot 4 is internally won, since it is not a jackpot that triggers a latent transition, more jackpot lottery is received in special figure 2 until the fluctuation of special figure 1 is completed. , The future profits of the player will be greatly influenced by whether or not more small hits can be won.

However, even though the special figure 2 side is in a non-lottery state, if a long fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time on the order of several tens of seconds to a minute is selected as the fluctuation pattern of the special figure 2, the lottery on the special figure 2 side is performed. The chance to receive is lost for the fluctuation time, which greatly affects the profit received by the player during the small hit rush.

However, as in the present embodiment, if the variable pattern distribution table (FH13 to FH16) dedicated to the non-lottery in FIG. 36 is selected at the time of no lottery, the short variable pattern is selected, so that the player Will not suffer any disadvantages and will be given a useful game development for the player.

(22-2. Fluctuation pattern distribution table selection process for Special Figure 1: Step steps S453B to S455)
Next, a case where the special symbol operation confirmation data is 00H (step S451: = 00H), that is, a case where the processing target this time is the special figure 1 operation holding ball will be described.

In the process of step S453B, the fluctuation pattern distribution table is determined with reference to the fluctuation pattern distribution table selection table of FIG. 33, as in the case of the above-mentioned special figure 2. However, here, the special symbol 2 jackpot determination flag is turned ON. -The variable pattern distribution table that can be selected differs depending on the OFF state. In other words, the variable pattern distribution table that can be selected differs depending on whether or not the special figure 2 side has won the big hit.

Specifically, referring to FIG. 36, in the'probability change state'where special figure 1 is one of the table fluctuation states, when the symbol lottery result is "loss A to C", the special symbol 2 jackpot determination flag Is not in the OFF state (00H), that is, when the other special figure 2 is in the big hit non-winning state (special figure 2 loss fluctuation), "for normal lottery (with special figure 1 big hit winning lottery) The variable pattern distribution table "FH17 to FH20 (see the column of" probability variation, normal lottery "in the figure)" is selected, while the special symbol 2 jackpot determination flag is ON (5AH), that is, the other. When the special figure 2 is in the big hit winning state (special figure 2 big hit fluctuation), the fluctuation pattern distribution table "FH21 to FH24 (shown in the figure" "for non-lottery (no special figure 1 big hit winning lottery)" shown in the figure. "Probability change, no lottery" column) "is to be selected. In addition, in the case of the "latent probability state" in which the special figure 1 is in the back fluctuation state, the common fluctuation pattern distribution table "FH8" is selected regardless of the state of the special symbol 2 jackpot determination flag. ing.

In this way, even when the processing target of this time is special figure 1, the ON / OFF state (big hit winning lottery result) of the special symbol 2 big hit judgment flag of the other special figure 2 is set as one of the selection conditions of the fluctuation pattern. The reasons for the determination are as follows.

If the processing target of this time is special figure 1 and the other special figure 2 wins the big hit, the big hit winning lottery of special figure 1 is not executed, and the winning lottery result is forcibly lost. (See FIGS. 20 and 21). Therefore, the symbol lottery result (step S415 in FIG. 18) is any of the losses A to C.

Under the situation at the time of no lottery, for example, if the "variable pattern distribution table for normal lottery" FH17 to FH20 "" shown in FIG. However, the relatively long "probability change medium weak SP reach (variation time 30 seconds)" and "probability change medium strong SP reach (variation time 40 seconds)" are selected, leading to a game situation in which the progress of the game is unnecessarily delayed. In addition, in the situation where there is no lottery, the advance notice production that fuels the big hit (for example, high reliability production such as SP reach) is meaninglessly produced by simply fueling the expectation and tension of the player. There is little significance in making it appear.

In view of such circumstances, in the present embodiment, regarding the variable pattern distribution table selection table shown in FIG. 33, as in the case of the above-mentioned special figure 2, the special figure 1 is also in the normal lottery or in the non-lottery time. The configuration is such that a variable pattern distribution table can be selected according to the presence. For details, if the current game state is in a probable change state, and if the other special figure 2 is in the'big hit non-winning state (special figure 2 loss fluctuation)', then "at the time of normal lottery (special figure 1 big hit winning lottery)" The fluctuation pattern distribution table "FH17 to FH20" for (Yes) is selected, and in the case of "Big hit winning state (Special figure 2 Big hit fluctuation)", the fluctuation pattern with a long fluctuation time is not selected. The variable pattern distribution table "FH21 to FH24" for no lottery (no special figure 1 big hit winning lottery) is selected.

With reference to FIG. 35, the above-mentioned "variable pattern distribution table FH21 to FH24 for no lottery" according to the present embodiment is as follows, as compared with the above "variable pattern distribution table FH21 to FH24 for normal lottery". It has the characteristics like. This will be explained while paying attention to "variable pattern distribution table FH19, FH20 for non-lottery" and "variable pattern distribution table FH23, FH24 for non-lottery", which are typically selected at the time of loss B and C. To do.

The "variable pattern distribution table for no lottery FH23, FH24" is the same as the feature described in the above-mentioned "(22-X: Features of the variable pattern distribution table for no lottery)" (1). The reach fluctuation pattern is not selected, and (2) the selection rate of the short fluctuation pattern (here, normal fluctuation 1s) having a relatively short fluctuation time is high. (3) In the case of no lottery, the table configuration does not mean that "no reach fluctuation pattern is selected", but that the fluctuation pattern specified by N reach is selected but the fluctuation pattern specified by SP reach is not selected. May be.

In this embodiment, the "variable pattern distribution tables F17 and F18 for normal lottery" and "at the time of no lottery" are selected at the time of loss A (hold 0 loss A, hold 1-3 loss A) among the loss types. As shown in FIG. 35, the "variable pattern distribution tables F21 and FH22" have the same configuration, but the "variable pattern distribution tables F17 and F18 for normal lottery" also have the same configuration at the time of loss B and C. Similar to the selected FH19 and FH20, a variation pattern for designating the “7 symbols in the probable change” and the reach may be provided, and the selection rate can be appropriately determined. Further, in the present embodiment, a plurality of types of losses A to C are provided, but one type may be provided. In this case, for example, "F19" is used as a variable pattern distribution table for normal lottery, and no lottery is performed. “FH23” may be adopted as the hourly variation pattern distribution table. In this case as well, the above-mentioned characteristics of the variable pattern distribution table for non-lottery and the effects of the above can be exhibited.

(22-3. Selection of fluctuation pattern at the time of setting error error)
During the setting error, "loss" is always determined as described above. Specifically, any one of Loss A to C is determined on the special figure 1 side, and loss A is determined on the special figure 2 side. Therefore, in this case, the case is substantially forcibly lost, which is the same as the above-mentioned "under the situation at the time of no lottery" (see FIGS. 20 and 21). Therefore, at the time of a setting abnormality error (when the setting error flag is ON) during the probabilistic state or the latent probable state of the game state, the variation pattern distribution table for no lottery can be selected. ..

(Modification example of the selection form of the fluctuation pattern at the time of setting abnormality error)
It should be noted that a "variation pattern distribution table for setting errors" that is selected only when a setting error error may be provided may be provided. In this case, a variable pattern distribution table (for special figure 1 and special figure 2) for setting error according to the special symbol type can be provided. Here, since the setting error is forcibly lost during the setting error, the variable pattern distribution table for the setting error has a high degree of fanning as in the variable pattern distribution table for no lottery. It is preferable to have a table configuration in which a variation pattern that specifies an effect (high expectation notice effect, etc.) is not selected. In consideration of this point, for example, the following configurations (tsu) to (na) can be used.
(T) At least do not select the reach fluctuation pattern.
(N) At least do not select the reach fluctuation pattern and the fluctuation pattern with pseudo-ream.
(N) At least do not select the fluctuation pattern specified by SP reach. In this case, the reach variation and the normal variation pattern specified by N reach can be selected.
In the case of (tsu) or (ne) described above, a normal fluctuation pattern can be selected according to the number of operation holding balls (the number of operation holding balls after subtraction). For example, when the number of operation holding balls is 1, the normal fluctuation 12s, when the number of operation holding balls is 2, the normal fluctuation 8s, when the number of operation holding balls is 3, the normal fluctuation 4s, etc. can be selected. .. Further, it is possible to select only a specific normal fluctuation pattern regardless of the number of balls on hold. However, the specific normal fluctuation pattern is not particularly limited. For example, a fluctuation pattern with the longest fluctuation time (10-minute fluctuation) may be selected, or a fluctuation pattern with the shortest fluctuation time (for example, normal fluctuation 2s). May be selected, or another normal fluctuation pattern (for example, normal fluctuation 12s) may be selected. Further, as a specific normal fluctuation pattern, a normal fluctuation pattern dedicated to a setting abnormality error may be provided. It is preferable that the above-mentioned (1) to (3) are applied to any of the cases of loss A to C. Further, as already explained, a "loss D" that is selected only when a setting abnormality error is provided is provided, and when the loss D is selected, a fluctuation pattern distribution table dedicated to the setting abnormality error (variation pattern vibration for setting abnormality) is provided. Minute table) can be selected.

Further, it is preferable that the fluctuation pattern specification command during the setting abnormality error (hereinafter referred to as "setting abnormality fluctuation pattern specification command") includes information that can identify the fluctuation pattern for the setting abnormality error. .. The effect control unit 24 can grasp that a setting abnormality error has occurred by receiving the "setting value abnormality command" transmitted in step S064 of FIG. 27, but this command exclusively notifies the error. It is a command used for. Therefore, by including the information specifying that the command is selected at the time of the setting error error in the setting error pattern specification command, the effect control unit 24 sets the variation pattern specification command sent this time. It is possible to grasp that the fluctuation pattern is selected during the abnormality error, and execute the effect control related to the decorative symbol fluctuation display game dedicated to the setting abnormality error.

For example, it can be configured to execute a decorative symbol variation display game as shown in (c) to (ya) below.
(C) The notice effect itself is not displayed during the setting error. For example, as the image display effect, only the background image display (background image corresponding to the effect mode) and the variable display of the decorative pattern are performed regardless of the winning expectation.
(ヰ) The decorative pattern is not displayed in a variable manner. In this case, the variable display operation of the special symbol is executed, but the decorative symbol remains stopped. The fourth symbol 157 (decorative symbol 1 fourth symbol) and the fourth symbol 159 (decorative symbol 2 fourth symbol) in the dedicated display area 160 may be displayed in a variable manner or may be left in a stopped state. ..
(No) Performs a dedicated fluctuation display (variation display during RAM error) during a setting error error. For example, "sway fluctuation" is performed in which the decorative pattern is swung up and down without starting the normal fluctuation display. In this case, the shaking may be changed with a specific combination of symbols (for example, a lost symbol such as "2", "4", "0").
(A) Normal fluctuation display is performed, but when stop display is performed, stop display is performed with a specific combination of symbols (for example, lost symbols such as "2", "4", "0"), or normal fluctuation is displayed. After the display is performed, the shaking fluctuation (temporary stop state) is performed for a predetermined time with a specific combination of symbols.
(M) Change from a normal decorative design to a special decorative design during a setting error. For example, a normal decorative symbol is a symbol displaying numbers 1 to 9, but a decorative symbol dedicated to a setting error error is changed to a symbol displaying characters such as "e", "la", and "-".

<23. Processing during special symbol change: Fig. 23>
Next, the special symbol changing process (step S304 (corresponding to special figure 1), S309 (corresponding to special figure 2)) in the special symbol management process 1 in FIG. 15 will be described. FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing the details of the processing during the special symbol change of FIG.

In FIG. 23, the CPU 201 first determines whether the current special symbol operation confirmation data is 00H (special figure 1 is the processing target) or 01H (special drawing 2 is the processing target) (step S471). When the special symbol operation confirmation data is 00H (step S471: = 00H), then it is determined whether or not the "special symbol 1 operation timer 1" is zero (step S472). In the special symbol 1 operation timer here, the fluctuation time (residual fluctuation time) of the special figure 1 is set. If the special symbol 1 operation timer is not zero (step S472: ≠ 0), the fluctuation time of the special symbol 1 has not yet elapsed, that is, the special symbol 1 is changing, so this special symbol variation is performed without doing anything. The intermediate processing (here, special figure 1 is the process target step S304) is exited. On the other hand, when the special symbol 1 operation timer 1 becomes zero (step S472: = 0), the “special symbol 1 changing process” shown in FIG. 24, which will be described later, is executed (step S473).

In the determination process of step S471, if the special symbol operation confirmation data is 01H (special figure 2 is the processing target) (step S471: = 01H), then whether or not the "special symbol 2 operation timer 1" is zero. Is determined (step S474). In the special symbol 2 operation timer here, the fluctuation time (residual fluctuation time) of the special symbol 2 is set. If the special symbol 2 operation timer is not zero (step S474: ≠ 0), the fluctuation time of the special symbol 2 has not yet elapsed, that is, the special symbol 2 is changing, so this special symbol variation without doing anything. The intermediate processing (here, special figure 2 is the process target step S309) is exited. On the other hand, when the special symbol 2 operation timer 1 becomes zero (step S474: = 0), the “special symbol 2 changing process” shown in FIG. 25, which will be described later, is executed (step S475).

<24. Special symbol 1 During change Processing: Fig. 24>
Next, the special symbol 1 changing process (step S473) in FIG. 23 will be described. FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing the details of the special symbol 1 changing process of FIG. 23.

In FIG. 24, the CPU 201 first transmits the decorative symbol 1 fourth symbol stop command “BF01H” (special figure 1 normal fluctuation stop command) to the effect control unit 24 (step S481). Upon receiving this decorative symbol 1 fourth symbol stop command, the effect control unit 24 side grasps that the special symbol variation display game 1 has ended after the variation time of the special symbol 1 has elapsed, and is currently displaying the variation (table variation). The decorative symbol (decorative symbol 1) corresponding to the special figure 1 and the fourth symbol 157 of the dedicated display area 160 are stopped and displayed (confirmed display). As a result, the decorative symbol variation display game 1 also ends at the same time as the end of the special symbol variation display game 1. The decorative symbol 1 fourth symbol stop command "BF11H" transmitted in step S498 of FIG. 25, which will be described later, is a command having the same function as the above-mentioned decorative symbol 1 fourth symbol stop command "BF01H". The former is a command that acts as a "normal fluctuation stop command" that is transmitted when the special symbol 1 operation timer 1 becomes zero, and the latter is a decorative symbol 1 and a fourth symbol 157 that are changing at the time of forced loss. This is a command that works as a "special figure 1 forced stop command" for forcibly stopping and displaying.

Next, as the setting process when the fluctuation of the special symbol 1 is stopped, the special symbol 1 operation status is switched to "confirming (03H)" (03H is stored in the special symbol 1 operation status), and the confirmation is displayed on the special symbol 1 operation timer 2. The time (for example, 500 ms) is set, and the special symbol 1 changing flag is set to the OFF state (00H) (step S482). When the special symbol 1 changing flag is set to the OFF state, the stop display is started in the subsequent special symbol display data update process (step S335 in FIG. 16). Therefore, at this stage, to be exact, the control signal based on the display data is generated in the LED management process (step S098) through the special symbol display data update process, not in the stop display stage of the special symbol (here, special figure 1). It is output to the special symbol display device and the stop display is started, and the stop display is continued until the confirmed display time elapses.

Next, the state of the small hit determination flag is determined (step S483). Here, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 has won the small hit, but in the case of the present embodiment, since the small hit is excluded from the big hit lottery target on the special figure 1, the determination result in step S483. Is always'≠ 5AH'.

(Special symbol 2 forced loss setting process; steps S485 to S489)
Next, the state of the special symbol 1 jackpot determination flag is determined (step S485). When the special symbol 1 jackpot determination flag is not in the ON state (5AH) (step S485: ≠ 5AH), the special symbol 1 changing process is exited without doing anything.

When the special symbol 1 jackpot determination flag is ON (5AH) (step S485: = 5AH), the special symbol stop 1 flag is set to the ON state (5AH) (step S486).

Next, the state of the special symbol 2 changing flag is determined (step S487). When the special symbol 2 changing flag is not in the ON state (5AH) (step S487: ≠ 5AH), it is assumed that the special symbol 2 is not changing, and the special symbol 1 changing process is exited without doing anything. On the other hand, when the special symbol 2 changing flag is in the ON state (5AH) (step S487: = 5AH), the special symbol 2 forced loss setting process of steps S488 to S489 is performed in order to forcibly stop the changing special figure 2. Do.

In the special symbol 2 forced loss setting process, first, the decorative symbol 2 fourth symbol stop command "BF12H" is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 (step S488). Decorative symbol 2 The effect control unit 24 side that received the fourth symbol stop command grasps that the special symbol variation display game 2 has ended after the variation time of the special symbol 2 has elapsed, and is currently displaying the variation (in table variation). The decorative symbol (decorative symbol 2) corresponding to the special figure 2 (if any) and the fourth symbol 159 of the dedicated display area 160 are stopped and displayed (confirmed display). As a result, the decorative symbol variation display game 2 ends at the same time as the special symbol variation display game 2 ends. Therefore, the "decorative symbol 2 fourth symbol stop command" transmitted here acts as a "special symbol 2 forced stop command" for forcibly stopping and displaying the changing "decorative symbol 2 fourth symbol".

Next, various setting processes are performed at the time of forced loss of the special symbol 2 (step S489). Specifically, the special symbol 2 operation status is switched to "confirmed (03H)" (03H is stored in the special symbol 2 operation status), and the special symbol 2 operation timer 1 (special symbol 2 fluctuation time management timer) is cleared to zero. , The fixed display time (500 ms) is set in the special symbol 2 operation timer 2, the special symbol 2 changing flag is set to the OFF state (00H is stored), and the small hit judgment flag is set to the OFF state (00H is stored). Then, "200 (special stop symbol number corresponding to the loss A on the special symbol 2 side)" is set as the special symbol 2 stop symbol number.

When the process of step S489 is completed as described above, the process during the change of the special symbol 1 is exited. Then, the process exits the special symbol changing process (step S309) and proceeds to the process of step S306 of the special symbol management process 1 of FIG.

<25. Special symbol 2 During change Processing: Fig. 25>
Next, the special symbol 2 changing process (step S475) in FIG. 23 will be described. FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing the details of the process during the change of the special symbol 2 of FIG. 23. The special symbol 2 changing process (step S475) basically has the same processing contents except that the special symbol type to be processed in the above-mentioned special symbol 1 changing process (step S473) is different. .. Therefore, in FIG. 25, the description of substantially the same content as that described in FIG. 24 will be omitted as appropriate to avoid duplicate description.

In FIG. 25, the CPU 201 first transmits the decorative symbol 2 fourth symbol stop command “BF02H” (special figure 2 normal fluctuation stop command) to the effect control unit 24 (step S491). Upon receiving this decorative symbol 2 fourth symbol stop command, the effect control unit 24 side grasps that the special symbol variation display game 2 has ended after the variation time of the special symbol 2 has elapsed, and is currently displaying the variation (table variation). The decorative symbol (decorative symbol 2) corresponding to the special figure 2 and the fourth symbol 159 of the dedicated display area 160 are stopped and displayed (confirmed display). As a result, the decorative symbol variation display game 2 ends at the same time as the special symbol variation display game 2 ends. The decorative symbol 2 fourth symbol stop command "BF02H" transmitted in this process has the same function as the decorative symbol 2 fourth symbol stop command "BF12H" transmitted in step S488 of FIG. 24 described above. Although it is a command, the former is a command that acts as a "normal fluctuation stop command" that is transmitted when the special symbol 2 operation timer 1 becomes zero, and the latter is a decorative symbol 2 that is changing at the time of forced loss. This is a command that works as a "special figure 2 forced stop command" for forcibly stopping and displaying the fourth symbol 159.

Next, as the setting process when the fluctuation of the special symbol 2 is stopped, the special symbol 2 operation status is switched to "confirming (03H)" (03H is stored in the special symbol 2 operation status), and the confirmation is displayed on the special symbol 2 operation timer 2. The time (for example, 500 ms) is set, and the special symbol 2 changing flag is set to the OFF state (00H) (step S492).

Next, the state of the small hit determination flag is determined (step S493). If the small hit determination flag is not in the ON state (5AH) (step S493: ≠ 5AH), the process proceeds to the determination process in step S495. On the other hand, when the small hit determination flag is in the ON state (5AH) (step S493: = 5AH), it is assumed that the small hit symbol has stopped, and the special symbol stop 2 flag is set in the ON state (5AH) (step S494).

(Special symbol 1 forced loss setting process; steps S495-S499)
Next, the state of the special symbol 2 jackpot determination flag is determined (step S495). When the special symbol 2 jackpot determination flag is not in the ON state (5AH) (step S495: ≠ 5AH), the special symbol 2 changing process is exited without doing anything.

When the special symbol 2 jackpot determination flag is ON (5AH) (step S495: = 5AH), the special symbol stop 1 flag is set to the ON state (5AH) (step S496).

Next, the state of the special symbol 1 changing flag is determined (step S497). When the special symbol 1 changing flag is not in the ON state (5AH) (step S497: ≠ 5AH), it is assumed that the special symbol 1 is not changing, and the special symbol 2 changing process is exited without doing anything. On the other hand, when the special symbol 1 changing flag is in the ON state (5AH) (step S497: = 5AH), the special symbol 1 forced loss setting process of steps S498 to S499 is performed in order to forcibly stop the changing special figure 1. Do.

In the special symbol 1 forced loss setting process, first, the decorative symbol 1 fourth symbol stop command "BF11H" is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 (step S498).

Next, the setting at the time of forced loss of the special symbol 1 is performed (step S499). Here, as various setting processes when the special symbol 1 is forcibly lost, the special symbol 1 operation status is switched to "confirmed (03H)" (03H is stored in the special symbol 1 operation status), and the special symbol 1 operation timer 1 (special symbol 1 operation timer 1) is used. (Fig. 1 Fluctuation time management timer) is cleared to zero, the fixed display time (500ms) is set in the special symbol 1 operation timer 2, the special symbol 1 changing flag is set to the OFF state (00H is stored), and the special symbol 1 is stopped. A stop symbol number for designating the loss type (any of the losses A to C) determined in the special stop symbol creation process (step S415 in FIG. 18) is set in the symbol number.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the special symbols 1 and 2 are being displayed in a variable manner in parallel, and when the variable time of one of the special symbols ends first and the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed, the variable display is performed. Forced stop control is performed to forcibly terminate the fluctuation time of the other special symbol inside (set the fluctuation time to zero) and stop and display the other special symbol as a lost symbol. Further, when the fluctuation time of one special symbol ends first and the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, the measurement interruption control for interrupting the measurement of the fluctuation time of the other special symbol during the fluctuation display is performed. In addition, the changing flag is not turned off while the measurement is interrupted, that is, it is treated as "changing display".

Then, when performing "forced loss stop control" in which one of the special symbols 1 and 2 is stopped and displayed first with the jackpot symbol and the other changing special symbol is stopped with the lost symbol, it is confirmed. Before the start of the display time, that is, when the fluctuation time of one of the special symbols ends (when the special symbol 1 operation timer 1 becomes zero or the special symbol 2 operation timer 1 becomes zero), the other special symbol Is controlled to be forcibly stopped with a lost symbol. The reason for controlling in this way is as follows if the other special symbol is forcibly stopped with a lost symbol during the confirmed display time (from the start of the confirmed display time to the elapsed time of the confirmed display). This is because problems arise.

For example, if special figure 1 is currently displaying large hit fluctuations and special figure 2 is being displayed in parallel due to small hit fluctuations, special figure 1 is first stopped and displayed with a big hit symbol, and special figure 1 is displayed during the fixed display period of 500 ms. There may be a case where 2 is stopped and displayed with a small hit symbol. In this case, not only the overlapping period in which the big hit symbol and the small hit symbol are stopped and displayed at the same time occurs, but also the big hit game occurs after the confirmed display time elapses on the special figure 1 side that has stopped earlier, and during the big hit game. An inappropriate display state occurs in the special symbol display devices 38a and 38b in which the small hit symbol of the special figure 2 is stopped and displayed. Therefore, the process related to the forced loss stop is executed at the timing when the fluctuation time ends (the determination result of step S472 or S474 in FIG. 23 is'= 0', and the special symbols in FIGS. 24 to 25 are executed. (1) Processing during fluctuation, special symbol 2 Processing during fluctuation).

Further, in the present embodiment, one special symbol (here, special figure 2) is stopped and displayed first with a small hit symbol, and the fluctuation time of the other special symbol during fluctuation (here, special figure 1) is measured. When the measurement interruption control is performed, the "special symbol 2 operation timer 1 is set" when the fluctuation time of the special symbol 2 ends, instead of setting the "special symbol stop 2 flag" after the confirmation display time elapses. (When it becomes zero), the "special symbol stop 2 flag" is set (steps S493 to S494), and the timer management process of FIG. 14 executes the measurement interruption process for the special figure 1. (Processing route of'= 5AH'in step S535). The reason for controlling in this way is that if the configuration is such that the special symbol stop 2 flag is set between the start of the confirmed display time and the elapsed time of the confirmed display, the following problems occur.

For example, if special figure 2 is currently displaying small hit fluctuations and special figure 1 is displaying fluctuations in parallel due to large hit fluctuations, special figure 2 is first stopped and displayed with a small hit symbol, and during the final display period of 500 ms, special figure 2 is displayed. There may be a case where FIG. 1 is stopped and displayed with a big hit symbol. In this case, since the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 has already passed, the measurement interruption process for the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 can no longer be performed. Therefore, in this case as well, the problem of the same phenomenon as the above-mentioned "forced loss stop" case arises. That is, an overlapping period occurs in which the big hit symbol and the small hit symbol are stopped and displayed at the same time, and on the special figure 2 side that has stopped earlier, a small hit game occurs after the confirmed display time elapses, and the special hit game is performed during the small hit game. An inappropriate display state occurs in the special symbol display devices 38a and 38b, in which the jackpot symbol of FIG. 1 is stopped and displayed. Therefore, the process related to the measurement interruption at the time of a small hit is executed at the timing when the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 ends (the determination result of step S472 or S474 of FIG. 23 is'= 0', FIG. 25. Special symbol 2 (see the processing route of'= 5AH'in step S543 to S494 of the processing during fluctuation and step S535 of the timer management processing of FIG. 14).

In any case, when the above "forced loss stop control" or "measurement interruption control" is performed, it is not performed during the fixed display time, but at the timing when the fluctuation time of the special symbol ends (at the end of the fluctuation time). ), The necessary processing is performed. As a result, an inappropriate display state can be reliably prevented.

When the process of step S499 is completed as described above, the process during the change of the special symbol 2 is exited. Then, the process during the special symbol change (step S309) is exited, and the process of the special symbol management process 1 of FIG. 15 is exited.

<26. Processing during special symbol confirmation time: Fig. 26A, Fig. 26B>
Next, the processing during the special symbol confirmation time in FIG. 15 (step S305 (corresponding to special figure 1), S310 (corresponding to special figure 2)) will be described. 26A to 26B are flowcharts showing the details of the processing during the special symbol confirmation time.

In FIG. 26A, the CPU 201 first determines whether the current special symbol operation confirmation data is 00H (special figure 1 is the processing target) or 01H (special drawing 2 is the processing target) (step S501).

When the special symbol operation confirmation data is 00H (step S501: = 00H), then it is determined whether or not the special symbol 1 operation timer 2 is zero (step S502), and the special symbol 1 operation timer 2 is not zero. If (step S502: ≠ 0), it is assumed that the confirmed display time has not elapsed, and the process is exited during the special symbol confirmation time without doing anything. On the other hand, when the special symbol 1 operation timer 2 becomes zero (step S502: = 0), it is assumed that the confirmation display of the special symbol 1 is completed, and the special symbol 1 operation status is switched to "waiting (01H)" (step S502: = 0). 01H is stored in the special symbol 1 operation status) (step S503), and the process proceeds to the determination process of step S504.

On the other hand, when the special symbol operation confirmation data is 01H (step S501: = 01H), then it is determined whether or not the special symbol 2 operation timer 2 is zero (step S508), and the special symbol 2 operation timer 2 is set. If it is not zero (step S508: ≠ 0), it is assumed that the confirmed display time has not elapsed, and the process is exited during the special symbol confirmation time without doing anything. On the other hand, when the special symbol 2 operation timer 2 becomes zero (step S508: = 0), it is assumed that the confirmation display of the special symbol 2 is completed, and the special symbol 2 operation status is switched to "standby (01H)" ( 01H is stored in the special symbol 1 operation status) (step S509), and the process proceeds to the determination process of step S504.

Hereinafter, in the processes of steps S504 to S521, the processes based on the special figure operation confirmation data are performed, but the processing contents are basically the same except that the special symbol type to be processed is different. Therefore, in the following, the case where the processing target is the special figure 1 (the special figure operation confirmation data is 00H) will be typically described, and the description about the case where the processing target is the special figure 2 will be omitted as appropriate to avoid duplicate description.

Proceeding to step S504, the jackpot determination flag is acquired, and the jackpot determination flag on the processing target side this time (special symbol 1 jackpot determination flag in the case of special figure 1, special symbol 2 jackpot determination flag in the case of special figure 2) The state is determined (step S504). Here, since the case where the processing target is the special figure 1 (the special figure operation confirmation data is 00H) is described, the state of the special symbol 1 jackpot determination flag is determined.

(When the jackpot determination flag is ON: steps S505 to S507)
When it is determined in the determination of step S504 that the jackpot determination flag is in the "ON state (5AH)" (step S504: = 5AH), various setting processes are performed when the jackpot symbol is stopped (step S505). Here, as various setting processes (process before the start of the jackpot game) when the jackpot symbol is stopped, a process of designating the game state during the jackpot game is performed. Specifically, as shown in the figure, 5AH (ON state) is stored in the condition device operation flag. In addition, the jackpot determination flag for the test signal is set to the ON state (5AH). The jackpot determination flag for the test signal is a flag used when outputting the type test signal (test firing test signal terminal management process during the performance display monitor process described later (see steps S823 and 29 in FIG. 28). When the flag is in the ON state (= 5AH), it indicates that the jackpot game is in progress, and when the flag is in the OFF state (= 00H), it indicates that the jackpot game is not in progress. The jackpot determination flag includes a test signal special symbol 1 jackpot determination flag corresponding to the special figure 1 and a test signal special symbol 2 jackpot determination flag corresponding to the special figure 2. Here, the processing target. Is the special figure 1, so the special symbol 1 jackpot determination flag for the test signal is set to the ON state (5AH). Here, the jackpot determination flag and the flags of various functions are set to the OFF state (00H) to set the jackpot. The game state during the game is specified as "low probability, no electric support", and the special symbol time reduction count and the special symbol probability change counter are cleared to zero (00H is stored).

Next, 5000 ms is set in the special electric accessory operation timer as the effective waiting time of the combination gate (step S506). The active waiting time of the Fluxgate compass is an interval section from the time when the confirmation display time of the special symbol has elapsed and the big hit is confirmed until the detection of the game ball by the Fluxgate compass 57a is set to the effective state, and is the opening. Refers to the time width that defines the production section (big hit start production and right-handed instruction production). Therefore, the detection of the combination gate switch 57a is disabled until the waiting time for the combination gate is valid, and the round game is not started even if the game ball passes through the combination gate.

Next, the combination gate operation interval start command (ED01H) is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 (step S507). The combination gate operation interval start command includes information that can identify the current jackpot type and the game state at the time of winning the jackpot, and the effect control unit 24 side can perform the jackpot start effect according to the current jackpot type. It is used when starting a right-handed instruction effect. When the above processing is completed, the processing during the special symbol confirmation time is exited.

(When the jackpot determination flag is OFF: steps S510 to S521)
When it is determined in the determination of step S504 that the jackpot determination flag is in the "OFF state (00H)" (step S504: ≠ 5AH), the small hit determination flag is acquired and the small hit determination on the processing target side this time is performed. The state of the flag (special symbol 1 small hit determination flag in the case of special figure 1 and special symbol 2 small hit determination flag in the case of special figure 2) is determined (step S510). In the case of the present embodiment, since there is no small hit winning on the special figure 1 side, only the state of the special symbol 2 small hit determination flag (small hit determination flag) of the special figure 2 is actually determined.

When the small hit determination flag is in the OFF state (= 00H) (step S510: ≠ 5AH), the process proceeds to step S512. When the small hit determination flag is in the ON state (= 5AH) (step S510: = 5AH), various setting processes are performed when the small hit symbol is stopped (step S511). Here, 00H (OFF state) is stored in the small hit determination flag and 5AH (ON state) is stored in the small hit medium flag as the pre-start processing of the small hit game when the special symbol indicating the small hit is stopped. .. This small hit medium flag is a flag that specifies whether or not the small hit game is in progress. If the flag is in the ON state (= 5AH), it indicates that the small hit game is in progress, and the flag is OFF. When it is in the state (= 00H), it indicates that the small hit game is not in progress. Further, here, the small hit determination flag for the test signal is set to the ON state (5AH). The small hit determination flag for the test signal is a flag used when outputting the type test signal, like the above-mentioned large hit determination flag for the test signal (test firing test signal terminal management process in FIG. 28, which will be described later). (S823), see FIG. 29), when the flag is in the ON state (= 5AH), it indicates that the small hit game is in progress, and when the flag is in the OFF state (= 00H), the small hit game is in progress. Indicates that it is not inside. When the various setting processes at the time of stopping the small hit symbol are completed, the process proceeds to step S512.

Next, it is determined whether or not the special symbol time reduction counter (the remaining number of times in the special symbol time reduction state) is zero (step S512). When the special symbol time reduction counter is zero (step S512: = 0), the process proceeds to step S517 without doing anything.

If the special symbol time reduction counter is not zero (step S512: ≠ 0), the special symbol time reduction counter is subtracted by 1 (step S513) as the digestion of the fluctuation number this time, and the special symbol time reduction counter after subtraction is zero. (Step S514).

If the special symbol time reduction counter after subtraction is not zero (step S514: ≠ 0), the number of end times of the special symbol time reduction state has not been reached, so the process proceeds to step S517 without doing anything.

When the special symbol time reduction counter after subtraction is zero (step S514: = 0), the number of times the special symbol time reduction state ends (in this embodiment, 7 times (in the case of time reduction B) or 50 times (in the case of time reduction A)). ) Is reached, and the setting process at the end of the time reduction is performed (step S515). Here, as the setting process at the end of the time reduction, 00H (OFF state) is stored in each of the general electric accessory open extension state flag, the normal symbol time reduction state flag, the normal symbol probability change state flag, and the special symbol time reduction state flag. As a result, from the next game, it will be placed under the "no electric support state" where the electric chew support is not given.

When the setting process at the end of the time reduction in step S515 is completed, the game state information transmission process (FIG. 19) is executed (step S516). Since the state command transmitted in the game state information transmission process includes information on the number of remaining time reductions, the effect control unit 24 ends the time reduction state in the current symbol variation display game and shifts to the normal state from the next game. When the next game (the first game after the transition to the normal state) is started, the above-mentioned "result effect" is displayed, and the above-mentioned "launch position guidance effect (left-handed instruction effect)" is displayed in the second game. ) ”Is displayed (see (see FIGS. 31E (12) and (13)).

Next, when the process proceeds to step S517, it is determined whether or not the special symbol probability variation counter (remaining ST number) is zero (step S517).

When the special symbol probability variation counter is zero (step S517: = 0), the process is exited during the special symbol confirmation time. On the other hand, when the special symbol probability variation counter is not zero (step S517: ≠ 0), the special symbol probability variation counter is subtracted by 1 (step S518) as the number of fluctuations of the special symbol this time, and the special symbol after the subtraction is subtracted. It is determined whether or not the probability variation counter is zero (step S519).

If the special symbol probability variation counter after subtraction is not zero (step S519: ≠ 0), the ST specified number of times has not been reached, so the process is exited during this special symbol confirmation time. On the other hand, when the special symbol probability variation counter after subtraction is zero (step S519: = 0), it is assumed that the number of fluctuations of the special symbol has reached the ST specified number (65535 in this embodiment), and the setting at the end of probability variation is established. The process is performed (step S520). Here, as the transition setting process to the normal game state accompanying the end of the latent probability state or the end of the probability change state, the general electric accessory open extension state flag, the normal symbol time reduction state flag, the normal symbol probability change state flag, the special symbol time reduction state flag, And 00H (OFF state) is stored in each of the special symbol probability change state flags. As a result, from the next game, the jackpot lottery probability will be placed from the high probability state to the low probability state. In the case of this embodiment, since the ST specified number of times is 65535 times, the latent state or the probable change state is substantially continued until the next big hit winning.

When the setting process at the end of the probability change in step S520 is completed, the game state information transmission process (FIG. 19) is executed (step S521), and the special symbol confirmation time process is exited.

As described above, when the processing during the special symbol confirmation time is completed, the special symbol management process 1 (FIG. 15) of step S093 shown in FIG. 13 is exited, and then the special symbol management process 2 (FIG. 16) of step S094 of the same figure is performed. ) Is executed.

<28. Performance display monitor processing: Fig. 28>
Next, the performance display monitor process (step S101) in FIG. 13 will be described. FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing the details of the performance display monitor processing.

In the present embodiment, the operation program and the storage area of the processing related to the performance display are defined in the out-of-area memory (second memory area). Therefore, in FIG. 28, in order to execute the process related to the performance display, the CPU 201 first saves the stack pointer related to the intra-area RAM (step S821), and executes processing such as setting the stack pointer related to the out-of-area RAM. (Step S822).

Next, the test firing test signal terminal management process relating to the output processing of the test signal to the test firing test apparatus is executed (step S823). Details of this test firing test signal terminal management process will be described later with reference to FIG. 29.

Next, an out-of-area RAM check process for checking whether or not the stored data related to the performance display of the in-area RAM is damaged is executed (step S824). Details of this out-of-area RAM check process will be described later with reference to FIG. 30A.

Next, the area-external LED management process is executed (step S825). In the out-of-area LED management process, the output control of the control signal (dynamic lighting data) is controlled for the performance display 99 based on the display data created in step S831 described later. In the LED management process for outside the area, the data set in the output buffer for the identification display unit and the output buffer for the base display unit set in step S831 at the time of the previous interrupt is output to the performance display 99, and the identification display unit and the data display are displayed. Controls the display of the unit. The output buffer for the identification display unit and the output buffer for the base display unit are for storing the display pattern data of the identification display unit and the base display unit, and these are provided in the out-of-area RAM. The LED management process for external use of the region may be executed after the display update process (step S831) described later. Further, the LED management process (step S098) of FIG. 13 may be used to output the control signal to the performance display 99.

(Processing related to operation confirmation display: Processing route of steps S826 → S833)
Next, it is determined whether or not the operation confirmation timer is zero, that is, whether or not 5000 ms of the operation confirmation time at the time of turning on the power has elapsed (step S826). When the operation confirmation timer is not zero (step S826: ≠ 0), the operation confirmation process for displaying the operation confirmation display (all blinking) at the time of turning on the power is executed (step S833). As described above, the operation confirmation display is operated because the operation confirmation timer is set in the operation confirmation timer setting process (step S033 in FIG. 8B), which is a part of the process at the time of turning on the power. If the power is cut off during the check, the operation check is not restarted from the state at the time of the power cut, but the operation check timer is initially set when the power is restored, and the operation check time of 5000 ms elapses again. The operation confirmation display will be displayed until the timer is displayed. Details of this operation confirmation process will be described later with reference to FIG. 30B.

(Processing related to normal display: Processing route of steps S826 → S827)
On the other hand, when the operation confirmation timer is zero (step S826: = 0), it is assumed that the operation confirmation display is completed, and the normal display process (steps S828 to S831) for displaying the performance information on the performance indicator 99 is performed. I will go.

First, 00H is set in the normal state determination flag (step S827). This normal state determination flag is a flag for designating whether or not it is a "measurement target section" for measuring performance information (base value in the case of this embodiment). In the case of the present embodiment, when the flag is in the ON state (= 5AH), it indicates that the measurement target section (in the normal state), and when the flag is in the OFF state (= 00H), the measurement is not performed. Indicates that the target section (game state other than the normal state).

Next, it is determined whether or not the current gaming state is the normal state (step S828), and if it is the normal state (step S828: YES), the normal state determination flag is set to the ON state (5AH) (step S828). Step S829), thereby designating the measurement target section. However, if it is not in the normal state (step S828: NO), the process proceeds to step S830 without doing anything, that is, with the normal state determination flag set to the OFF state (00H). Therefore, in this case, the normal state determination flag is maintained in the OFF state, and it is specified that the current gaming state is the measurement non-target section.

By the way, in the out-of-area RAM, a storage area for managing the same data as the current game state information (corresponding to the game state number YJ in the present embodiment) managed by the in-area RAM is provided, and the out-of-area RAM is also provided. The game state number YJ may be managed, and when determining whether or not the game is in the normal state in step S828, the value of the YJ may be acquired and the determination process may be performed. However, in this case, even though the same data is managed by the RAM in the area, the duplicated same data is managed in the RAM 203, and the memory outside the area is unnecessarily pressed, which increases the control load. .. In particular, in the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, it is not prohibited to access the RAM in the area when executing the process related to the memory outside the area (process related to the performance display, etc.), and the RAM is requested by law. Since the used capacity of the machine is severely limited, it is preferable to have the memory capacity recommended as much as possible. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the game state number YJ on the RAM side in the area is acquired in the normal state without providing a storage area for managing the current game state information (game state number YJ) in the out-of-area RAM. It is designed to perform a determination process of whether or not there is.

Next, the switch input data setting process is executed (step S828). In the switch input data setting process, the switch input data acquired in step S082, specifically, the middle start port sensor 34a, the right start port sensor 33a, the lower right start port sensor 35a, the upper prize winning port sensor 42a, and the lower size Based on the input data of the winning opening sensor 52a, the general winning opening sensor 43a, and the OUT monitoring switch 49a, input data regarding the presence or absence of winning for each winning opening is created. The data created here is used in the performance display monitor aggregation division process (step S022) of FIG. 8 to count the number of payouts during normal operation, the number of outs during normal operation, the base value, and the number of outs in all states.

Next, the LED display data for displaying the base value obtained in the performance display monitor aggregation division process (step S040) of FIG. 8A on the performance display 99 is updated (step S829: display data update process). , Set to the LED output buffer such as the output buffer for the identification display unit and the output buffer for the data display unit. The data created here is output processed in the above-mentioned external LED management process (step S825) at the time of the next interrupt. As a result, the performance information of the performance display 99 is displayed.

Then, the contents of the saved register are restored and the performance display monitor processing is exited. As a result, the performance display 99 realizes real-time display of performance information (in this embodiment, the current base value (real-time base value) and the previous history information (history base value)). As described above, the process of FIG. 28 functions as an information display control means for controlling the performance display 99 based on the information display control program. In the present embodiment, the RAM in the area of the RAM 202 is provided with a game information storage area capable of storing game state data (in this embodiment, the game state number YJ) for specifying the current game state. The 2 RAMs outside the area of the RAM 202 are provided with a specific information storage area capable of storing specific data indicating that the player is in a specific gaming state (for example, a normal state) (step S829). In the information display control means, the current game state is a specific game state (in the present embodiment, the normal state) based on the game state data (game state number YJ) stored in the game information storage area of the RAM in the area. When the determination means (step S828) for determining whether or not (YJ = 00H) and the determination means determine that the game is in a specific gaming state, the specific data is stored in the specific information storage area. The information storage means (step S829), the calculation means (S040, S830 in FIG. 8B) for calculating the specific information (base value) regarding the game performance based on the specific data, and the calculated specific information of the calculation means. The display control means (S825, S831 in FIG. 28) for controlling the display of the information related to the performance display 99 is included.

<29. Test firing test signal terminal management process: Fig. 29>
Next, the test firing test signal terminal management process (step S822) in FIG. 28 will be described. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing the details of the test firing test signal terminal management process.

The gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment is an appropriate gaming machine by a third-party testing institution (designated testing institution based on the provisions of Article 20, Paragraph 5 of the Act on Regulation of Customs Business, etc. and Optimization of Business). Corresponding to the type test for determining whether or not, a "type test signal" capable of specifying the control state of the gaming machine can be output from the external terminal board 21 for the frame. The gaming machine provided for performing the type test is provided with a dedicated connection terminal (test firing test device information terminal) for connecting to the test device, and input / output of a test signal between the game machine and the test device. It is possible to carry out a type test. In addition, when installing a gaming machine that conforms to the type test in the pachinko hall, no change in the conforming control program is permitted. Therefore, even after installing the game machine in the pachinko hall, the test firing test signal terminal management process in step S822 is performed. Although it will be repeatedly executed for each interrupt, the above-mentioned dedicated connection terminal is not mounted on the mass-produced gaming machines, so that it cannot be used as an outer end signal for the data counter DT or the hall computer HC. It has become. Therefore, the type test signal is different from the outer end signal such as the big hit medium signal and the short time big hit medium signal.

In this test firing test signal terminal management process, the game information (test information) required for the type test is stored in a 1-byte length external output buffer (corresponding to the test firing test device information terminal ports 1 to 5) provided in the out-of-area RAM. It is acquired and the information (for example, flag ON / OFF information) is supplied to the 8-bit output port (test firing test device information terminal ports 1 to 5), and various test information is externally output as a type test signal. It has become like. In the present embodiment, the following game information of the first information to the fifth information can be acquired as test information, and these information can be output from the test firing test device information terminal (test firing test device information terminal ports 1 to 5). It has become. The CPU 201 acquires various data (flags and the like stored according to the processing state of normal game progress) stored in the RAM in the area, and transmits the game information necessary for the type test to the test device. ing.

In FIG. 29, the CPU 201 first executes the first information acquisition process for acquiring the first information (step S601). As shown in the figure, the first information includes a specific error type flag (b0), a normal symbol hit flag (b1), a normal symbol probability fluctuation flag (b2), a normal symbol time reduction state flag (b3), and a normal electric accessory. An operating flag (b4), a general electric accessory open extension state flag (b5), a normal symbol changing flag (b6), and a special symbol 2 small hit flag (b7) for a test signal. Note that b7 to b0 (most significant bit b7 to least significant bit b0) in parentheses indicate bit numbers corresponding to each information (the same applies to the second information to the fifth information described later).

In the first information acquisition process, first, it is determined whether or not a specific error has occurred. As a specific error, here, the state of the input port related to the state signal is checked, and if the above-mentioned ball jam signal, supply shortage signal, counting error signal, door open signal, etc. are generated, the least significant bit b0 is set to 1. Set to (H). Then, the normal symbol hit flag (b1), the normal symbol probability fluctuation flag (b2), the normal symbol time reduction state flag (b3), the normal electric accessory operating flag (b4), and the normal electric accessory open extension state flag (b5). , The normal symbol changing flag (b6) and the special symbol 2 small hit flag (b7) for the test signal are acquired, and those whose flag values are in the OFF state (00H) are 0 (L) in the corresponding bits and are in the ON state. For those having (5AH), 1 (H) is set in the corresponding bit (the same applies to the second information to the fifth information described later). For example, a specific error has not occurred, the probability change state (normal symbol probability fluctuation flag ON, normal symbol time reduction state flag ON, normal electric accessory open extension state flag ON), normal electric open game (normal symbol hit flag ON, normal electric) Game status of the accessory operating flag ON, the normal symbol changing flag OFF (normal symbol is stopped at the auxiliary hit symbol), and the special symbol 2 is in the small hit winning state (special symbol 2 for test signal 2 small hit flag ON). If so, the bit pattern related to the first information is "10111110". Then, the information regarding the ON / OFF state of the various flags related to the first information is output to the test firing test device information terminal port 1 (step S602). The transmission mode for the test apparatus may be a serial form or a parallel form (the same applies to steps S603 to S610 described later). As a result, various types of information belonging to the first information are output as type test signals. Therefore, the type of the type test signal output to the test device corresponding to each bit in this process is "Game machine error status signal (b0) to special symbol 2 small" listed in the column of the test firing test device information terminal port 1 shown in the figure. It becomes a hit signal (b7) ”.

Next, a second information acquisition process for acquiring the second information is performed (step S603). The second information includes the condition device operation flag (b0), the accessory continuous operation device operation flag (b1), the special symbol 1 jackpot flag for the test signal (b2), the special symbol probability fluctuation flag (b3), and the special symbol time reduction. The state flag (b4), the special symbol 1 changing flag (b5), and the special electric accessory 1 operation flag (b6), and the uppermost bit b7 is unused. The above-mentioned "special electric accessory 1 operation flag" is a flag used to determine whether or not the upper special variable winning device 42 (upper big winning opening 40 side for big hit) is operating, and the flag is When it is in the ON state (= 5AH), it indicates that the special variable winning device 42 is operating, and when the flag is in the OFF state (= 00H), the upper special variable winning device 42 is not operating. Indicates that it is inside. In the period during which the flag is ON (= 5AH) between round games, that is, during the period when the upper special variable winning device 42 is in operation, the large winning opening 40 is opened after the large winning opening 40 is opened. It is the period until the remaining ball discharge time (margin time for the game ball to be discharged from the big winning opening: 1980 ms) elapses after it is closed, and other than that, it is in the OFF state (= 00H). .. In addition to the above "special electric accessory 1 operation flag", a "special electric accessory 2 operation flag" is provided, and this "special electric accessory 2 operation flag" is the lower special variable winning device 52 (small). It is a flag used to determine whether or not the lower large winning opening 40 side for winning is operating. If the flag is in the ON state (= 5AH), the lower special variable winning device 52 is activated. When the flag is in the OFF state (= 00H), it indicates that the lower special variation winning device 52 is not operating.

Then, the ON / OFF states of the various flags related to the second information are output to the test firing test device information terminal port 2 of the external terminal board 21 for the frame (step S604). As a result, various types of information belonging to the second information are output as type test signals. The type test signal type in this process is the “condition device operating signal (b0) to special electric accessory 1 operating signal (b6) (most significant bit (b7)) listed in the column of the test firing test device information terminal port 2 shown in the figure. Is unused) ”.

Next, a third information acquisition process for acquiring the third information is performed (step S605). This third information includes the normal symbol number (b0 to b2), the special symbol 2 jackpot flag for the test signal (b3), the special symbol probability fluctuation flag (b4), the special symbol time reduction state flag (b5), and the special symbol 2 variation. The middle flag (b6) and the special electric accessory 2 operation flag (b7). The normal symbol number (normal stop symbol number) is data for designating a normal stop symbol mode to be stopped and displayed on the normal symbol display device 39a. Here, the lower 3 bits are used to specify the normal stop symbol number.

Then, the normal stop symbol number and the ON / OFF state of various flags related to the third information are output to the test firing test device information terminal port 3 of the frame external terminal board 21 (step S606). As a result, various types of information belonging to the third information are output as type test signals. The type test signal type in this process is "normal stop symbol number (b0 to b2) to special electric accessory 2 operating signal (b7)" listed in the column of the test firing test device information terminal port 3 shown in the figure. The special symbol changing flag (special symbol 1 changing flag or special symbol 2 changing flag) is of course in the ON state during the fluctuation display, and is maintained in the ON state even when the measurement of the fluctuation time is interrupted. (See FIGS. 24 and 25). Therefore, the output state of the special symbol 1 changing signal is maintained during the period when the special figure 1 is interrupted, and the output state of the special symbol 2 changing signal is maintained during the period when the special figure 2 is interrupting the measurement. However, in the case of this embodiment, since the small hit is won only on the special figure 2 side, the measurement is interrupted only on the special figure 1 side. Further, in the case of forced loss stop, since the stop is forcibly displayed with the lost symbol, the special symbol changing flag is turned off, and the output of the special symbol 2 changing signal is stopped.

Next, the fourth information acquisition process for acquiring the fourth information is performed (step S607). This fourth information is the special stop symbol number (special symbol 1 stop symbol number) (b0 to b7) of the special figure 1. Here, the special stop symbol number of the special figure 2 is specified by using 1 byte or less.

Then, the information that can identify the special symbol 1 stop symbol number related to the fourth information is output to the test firing test device information terminal port 4 of the frame external terminal board 21 (step S608). As a result, various types of information belonging to the fourth information are output as type test signals. The type test signal type in this process is the "special symbol 1 data (signal capable of specifying the special symbol 1 stop symbol number) (b0 to b7)" listed in the column of the test firing test device information terminal port 4 shown in the figure.

Next, a fifth information acquisition process for acquiring the fifth information is performed (step S609). This fifth information is the special stop symbol number (special symbol 2 stop symbol number) (b0 to b7) of the special figure 2. Here, the special stop symbol number of the special figure 2 is specified by using 1 byte or less.

Then, the information that can identify the special symbol 1 stop symbol number related to the fifth information is output to the test firing test device information terminal port 5 of the frame external terminal board 21 (step S610). As a result, various types of information belonging to the fifth information are output as type test signals. The type test signal type in this process is "special symbol 2 data (signal capable of specifying the special symbol 2 stop symbol number) (b0 to b7)" listed in the column of the test firing test device information terminal port 5 shown in the figure. Then, when the process of step S610 is completed, the test firing test signal terminal management process is exited.

It should be noted that how to combine the various information of the first information to the fifth information and output from which test firing test device information terminal port to the type test device can be appropriately determined. Further, the test information is not limited to the first information to the fifth information, and can be appropriately determined as needed.

<30A. Out-of-area RAM check processing: Fig. 30A>
Next, the out-of-area RAM check process (step S824) in FIG. 28 will be described. FIG. 30A (A) is a flowchart showing the details of the out-of-area RAM check process according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 30A (B) is a flowchart showing a modified example of the out-of-area RAM check process. This out-of-area RAM check process is a process (common process) that is executed not only during the performance display monitor process of FIG. 28 but also during the performance display monitor aggregation division process (step S040) of FIG. 8A.

In this out-of-area RAM check process, it is checked whether or not the process related to the performance display is correctly executed (step S841), and whether or not the data in the RAM area related to the performance display is damaged or not (step S842). ), If there is an abnormality, a data initialization process for clearing the measurement data is executed (step S843).

In FIG. 30, the CPU 201 first determines whether or not the check data is a normal value (AA55H) of the initial value (step S831). This check data is data monitored in a process of comparing and determining the total number of outs R and the normal out number S (out ball number confirmation process: not shown), and is, for example, from the total number of outs R. In the normal case, when the number of outs S is large (R <S), it is assumed that an abnormality has occurred, and "00H" is set as a value indicating an abnormality in the check data. If this check data is not a normal value (AA55H) (step S831: NO), the process proceeds to step S843, and the data initialization process described later is executed.

If the check data is a normal value (step S841: YES), then it is determined whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the count data (step S842). The case where an abnormality occurs in the count data is, for example, a case where the switch input data shows an abnormal value, or a case where the arithmetic processing required for calculating the performance information is not correctly executed. The case where the arithmetic processing is not executed correctly is typically a case where the arithmetic processing (ball count processing) for the sensor related to the calculation of the performance information is not correctly executed. The sensors to be counted in the present embodiment are the middle start opening sensor 33a, the right start opening sensor 34a, the lower right start opening sensor 35a, the general winning opening sensor 43a, and the lower large winning opening sensor 52a (upper large winning opening sensor 42a). Is excluded because it is a detection sensor related to the upper prize opening 40 for big hits), and there are six types of sensors, the OUT monitoring switch 49a. Therefore, was the "ball count processing" for all of these sensors, specifically, the prize ball number addition process (not shown) and the out ball number addition process (not shown) executed correctly? Whether or not it is determined.

As described above, the ball count process is executed in the performance display monitor aggregation division process (step S040) during the main process shown in FIG. In this ball count processing, first, five sensors, a middle start opening sensor 33a, a right start opening sensor 34a, a lower right starting opening sensor 35a, a general winning opening sensor 43a, and a lower large winning opening sensor 52a, are targeted to win a prize. The presence or absence of is checked in order, and when winning is confirmed, the number of prize balls is added, and the number of prize balls is added. Each time the process is completed, the number of times of processing is counted. 1 is added to (sensor detection count counter + 1). Specifically, when the prize ball number addition process related to the middle start port sensor 33a is completed, 1 is added to the sensor detection count counter, the value is updated to "01H", and then the right start port sensor 34a is related. When the prize ball number addition process is completed, the value of the sensor detection count counter is incremented by 1 and updated to "02H". The number of times counter is updated to "05H". Finally, the out-ball number addition process for the OUT monitoring switch 49a is performed, and when the out-ball number addition process is completed, the sensor detection number counter is cleared to zero (00H). Therefore, when the above ball number counting process (prize ball number addition process, out ball number addition process) is completed, the range of values that the sensor detection number counter can take is "00H" to "05H", and the ball number counting process. When (the last out-ball number addition process) is completed correctly, "00H" should be set in the sensor detection count counter. However, if this value becomes a value other than "00H" to "05H" due to some trouble, or if it is other than "00H" when starting the prize ball number addition process for the middle start port sensor 33a, etc. Assuming that the count data is invalid (abnormal) (step S842: = out of range), the data initialization process is executed (step S843). On the other hand, if the count data is valid (step S832: within the range), it is regarded as normal, the data initialization process in step S843 is skipped, and the out-of-area RAM check process is exited.

In the data initialization process of step S843, the initial value (normal value) "AA55H" is set in the check data, the RAM area related to the performance display (performance display storage area, measurement information storage area, etc.) is cleared, and the present Clear the displayed data being displayed. However, of the RAM area related to the performance display, only the measurement information storage area may be cleared. The reason is that the data saved in the performance display storage area usually stores the previous base value data (when this time is the first measurement, the specific value for the test section is saved (data). (The value that specifies none is saved), because it is considered that the result of the previous correct processing is saved. Also, the operation check timer may be cleared. Even if the data initialization process is executed, a new base value is calculated by simply displaying an error on the performance display 99 without executing special error processing such as stopping the game or not measuring a new base value. Subsequent processing for this (steps S824 to S829 in FIG. 28) is advanced.

When the data initialization process of step S843 is executed, the error notification (base value count error notification) may be executed for a predetermined time (for example, 10 minutes). In this case, the performance indicator 99 can be displayed in an error-only display mode. Further, even during the error display, a new base value is measured (normal payout number, normal out number, total state out number count, base value calculation). The error display period may be a predetermined time, and a predetermined game period, for example, the number of payouts during normal operation, the number of outs during normal operation, or the number of outs in all states is a predetermined number (error cancellation number: for example, 100). It may be the period until the time is reached or the period until a new normal state arrives (the period until a new measurement target section arrives). Of course, a new measurement may be started without starting a new measurement during the error display period, and a new measurement may be started after the error display is completed. The power supply may be turned on again as an error resolution condition.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the RAM area related to the performance display is checked in the performance display monitor aggregation / division process (step S040 in FIG. 8B) and the performance display monitor process (step S101 in FIG. 13), and there is a problem. At least, after initializing the out-of-area RAM area (measurement information storage area) that stores the measurement data necessary for calculating the performance information, the measurement is started from the initial state. Further, the out-of-area RAM area related to the performance display is not the target of the RAM check at the time of turning on the power, that is, the target of the RAM initialization processing of step S021 of FIG. 8A and step S028 of FIG. 8B. Therefore, even if a problem occurs in the contents of the RAM in the area, the data related to the performance display will not be initialized (cleared) together, and only the data related to the normal game progress will be initialized independently. .. Therefore, as long as the backup function operates normally and the gaming machine operates normally as long as there is no problem with the stored contents of the RAM area related to the performance display, it will be permanent for several days or years. The data can be retained, and performance information can be retained and displayed for a long period of time.

(Modified example of out-of-area RAM check processing: FIG. 30A (B))
The out-of-area RAM check process of FIG. 30A (A) can have the following configuration.

In FIG. 30A (B), in the configuration of the out-of-area RAM check process of FIG. 30A (A), the data initialization process of step S843, the process of clearing the operation confirmation timer to zero, and the operation confirmation timer of step S844 are set to 5000 ms. This is the addition of the processing to be performed. Other processing contents are the same as those in FIG. 30A (A).

In the configuration of FIG. 30A (B), as shown in the figure, when the determination result in step S841 is determined to be NO and the determination result in step S842 is determined to be out of range due to a defect in data or the like, a check is made as the data initialization process in step S843. The RAM area (performance display storage area, measurement information storage area, etc.) related to data and performance display is cleared, the display data currently being displayed is cleared, and the operation confirmation timer is cleared. Then, 5000 ms is reset to the operation confirmation timer (step S844). Therefore, in the case of this modification, if an abnormality occurs in the contents of the RAM outside the area, the operation confirmation display is executed again for 5 seconds after the RAM is initialized. This point is different from the configuration of FIG. 30A (A) in which the operation confirmation display is executed only when the power is restored. If the operation confirmation timer is not reset in this modification, the display will be forcibly terminated when the operation confirmation display is being executed when the data initialization process is executed. After that, the performance display 99 displays the real-time base value and the history base value.

<30B. Out-of-area RAM check processing: Fig. 30B>
Next, the operation confirmation process (step S833) in FIG. 28 will be described. FIG. 30B is a flowchart showing the details of the operation confirmation process.

In FIG. 30B, the CPU 201 first subtracts 1 from the operation confirmation timer and adds 1 to the lighting timer (steps S851 and S852).

Next, it is determined whether or not the blinking switching timing has arrived (step S853). In the present embodiment, during the operation confirmation display, the extinguishing period and the lighting period are repeated at a predetermined cycle of, for example, 300 ms. This blinking switching timing is managed by the lighting timer. In the present embodiment, the lighting timer is incremented by 1 for each interrupt of 4 ms. If the switching timing has a cycle of 300 ms, it can be determined that the blinking switching timing has arrived depending on whether or not the value of the lighting timer is "75". If the blinking switching timing has not arrived (step S853: NO), the operation confirmation process is exited without doing anything, that is, while maintaining the current lighting or extinguishing state.

On the other hand, when the blinking switching timing arrives (step S853: YES), the lighting timer is cleared (step 854), and the update cycle counter is updated (step S856). The update cycle counter is used as a counter for determining whether the counter is lit or blinking. For example, when the update cycle counter is an 8-bit counter that circulates in the range of 0 to 255 by increment processing (corresponding to step S856), lighting control is performed when the least significant bit of the update cycle counter value is '0'. However, if it is '1', it is possible to perform blinking control such as turning off the light.

Next, with reference to the update cycle counter, it is determined whether the value is "0" or "1" (step S856). In the case of the present embodiment, at the start of the operation confirmation display, the update cycle counter is controlled to zero, and the performance indicator 99 is controlled to be fully lit. Therefore, when this process is first passed, the value of the update cycle counter is updated to "1" in the process of step S856, so the process proceeds to step S857 (step S856: = 1), and the identification display is performed. The extinguished data, that is, "0000H" is set in the output buffer for the unit and the output buffer for the base display, respectively (steps S857 and S858). These extinguished data are written directly to each output buffer without referring to the data table or the like. As a result, the lighting period ends and the extinguishing period occurs.

On the other hand, when the next blinking switching timing arrives (step S853: YES) and the update cycle counter is "0" (step S856: = 0), the process proceeds to step S859, and the output buffer for the identification display unit is used. Lighting data, that is, "FFFFH" is set in the output buffer for the base display unit, respectively (steps S859 and S860). These lighting data are also written directly to each output buffer without referring to the data table or the like. As a result, the lighting period ends and the extinguishing period occurs. As a result, the extinguishing period ends and the lighting period occurs. In the present embodiment, when the operation check display is performed, for example, a predetermined data value is simply set in each output buffer without referring to the LED data table as shown in FIG. 37 used for the display control in the normal state. Therefore, it is possible to realize an operation confirmation display (all blinking) by a simple process.

By the above operation check process, the performance indicator 99 is repeatedly turned on and off repeatedly (operation check display) for a predetermined time (for 5000 ms), and the operation of the performance indicator 99 can be visually checked. .. If the performance display 99 does not display a normal operation confirmation display, for example, if a part of the 7-segment display remains off due to disconnection or the like, appropriate measures such as parts replacement may be taken.

Even during the operation check process, the performance display monitor total division process (S040 in FIG. 8B) is executed, and at least the count process necessary for calculating the base value is performed. As a result, it is possible to accurately reflect the winning ball and the out ball during the operation confirmation in the base value displayed after the operation confirmation display. However, since the base value is not displayed during the operation confirmation display, the base value may or may not be calculated during the 5000 ms period during the operation confirmation display. Further, during the operation confirmation process, a determination process for determining whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the performance display 99 is provided, and if an abnormality occurs, a dedicated error command (operation confirmation display error command) is issued to the effect control unit. A process of transmitting to 24 may be provided. When the effect control unit 24 receives the operation confirmation display error command, it is possible to notify the performance display 99 that an abnormality has occurred by using the effect means. For example, along with the alarm sound, an effect image such as "an abnormality has occurred in the performance display 99" is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36. As a result, for example, there is no risk of overlooking defects such as the decimal point DP, which is difficult to visually confirm.

<30C. Display data update process: Fig. 30C>
Next, the display data update process (step S831) in FIG. 28 will be described. FIG. 30C is a flowchart showing the details of the display data update process.

In FIG. 30, the CPU 201 first determines whether the display period of the base value is the test section, the first measurement section (N = 1), or the subsequent measurement section (N ≧ 2), based on real time. Identification display unit display pattern data is acquired from the identification display unit LED data table according to any of a plurality of display sections, such as whether it is a value display section or a history-based value display section (step S871), and identification is performed. It is set in the output buffer for the display unit (step S872). In the present embodiment, two types of base value output periods, a first base value output period for displaying the real-time base value and a second base value output period for displaying the history base value, are provided, and these are switched every 5000 ms. It has become. Further, as shown in FIG. 38A, the identification display unit LED data table contains display pattern data (upper "01111100B" ('b' display) corresponding to the identification display of "bL." Showing the real-time base value. Display pattern data (upper "01111100B" ('b) corresponding to the display of the identification display unit of "b6." Indicating the history base value of "10111000B" (for 7-segment display) and lower "10111000B" (for 7-segment display). 'For 7-segment display) and lower level "11111101B" (for 7-segment display '6.')) Are stored.

Further, according to the base value at that time (base value during real-time measurement), the display pattern data for the base display unit is acquired from the decimal value LED data table (step S873) and set in the output buffer for the base display unit. (Step S874). As shown in FIG. 38B, the decimal value LED data table stores display pattern data having a length of 1 byte each corresponding to 10 types of numerical values 0 to 9. For example, in the first base value output period for displaying the real-time base value, if the first base value at that time is "35", the display data of the tens place from the decimal value LED data table is "3". '01001111B' corresponding to "" is acquired, and "01101101B" corresponding to "5" is acquired as the display data of the ones digit, and is set in the output buffer for the base display unit.

By the above display update process, the performance display 99 after all blinking (operation check) is periodically switched and displayed between the real-time base value and the previous history base value (for example, every 5000 ms). The display can be realized.

(Specific example of the display mode of the performance indicator 99 after the power is turned on: FIG. 38)
FIG. 38 shows the performance during various periods at the time of RAM initialization (RAM clear), setting change, RAM abnormality (setting value data abnormality, backup flag abnormality), setting confirmation, and backup restoration. It shows the display mode of the display 99. However, FIG. 38 illustrates a display mode in which one of the four 7-segment indicators of the performance indicator 99 is configured to function as the setting indicator 97.

In the present embodiment, except when a RAM is abnormal, an in-region RAM initialization process (step S028 in FIG. 8B), a setting change process (step S022 in FIG. 8B, FIG. 11), and a setting confirmation process (step S026 in FIG. 8B, FIG. 12) or after the backup restoration process (step S027 in FIG. 8B) is completed, the timer interrupt process (FIG. 13) on the main control unit side is activated to start the operation check period, and the performance indicator 99 is used for 5 seconds. After all blinking (confirmation display) is performed, the base value is displayed (steps S032 to S035 in FIG. 8B and step S833 in FIG. 28). Therefore, as shown in FIG. 38, during the RAM clear notification effect such as "RAM clearing" at the time of RAM clearing, and during the setting changing effect such as "setting change" at the time of setting change (during the setting change operation period). ), "RAM error Please turn on the power again and change the set value", etc., during the power re-on instruction production (during the power re-on waiting period), it is before the start of the operation check period. Therefore, the display of the performance indicator 99 is completely turned off or hidden. However, during the setting confirmation effect (during the setting confirmation period) and during the setting change effect (during the setting change operation period), one of the four 7-segment LEDs of the performance indicator 99 functions as the setting indicator 97. Therefore, the setting value information is displayed (see the notation column of "setting value display" in the figure). In the case of a RAM abnormality, the player is placed in a state of waiting for the power to be turned on again (step S019 in FIG. 8A, FIG. 10B), and the game operation is stopped until the power is turned on again. Remains all off (hidden) (see the power cycle indication column in the figure).

In any case of clearing RAM, changing settings, confirming settings, or restoring backup, 5 seconds related to the operation confirmation display during the customer waiting standby production after each process (during the customer waiting demo screen display). When all blinking of is finished, the display of the base value is started after that. Also, when the setting is changed, all blinking starts for 5 seconds when the setting change operation is completed. Therefore, if the setting change completion effect such as "setting has been changed" continues for 5 seconds or more, the setting change. During the completion effect, all blinking for 5 seconds ends, and the display of the base value is started. Therefore, in this case, there will be an overlapping display period between the setting change completion effect and the base value display. Similarly, if other effects (not shown) such as the restoration completion effect (not shown) that displays "Recovered from power failure, please restart the game" when the backup is restored are continued for 5 seconds or more, the restoration is performed. During the completion effect, all blinking for 5 seconds ends, and the display of the base value is started.

Note that the RAM error notification related to the RAM clear is executed with the highest priority over other notification effects, and even if an effect control command is transmitted from the main control unit 20 during the execution of the RAM error notification, the RAM error notification is performed. Is not executed (after 30 seconds of the RAM clear notification timer), no other effect is executed. Further, if the configuration is such that the processing does not proceed any further unless the RAM clear notification timer (see step S030 in FIG. 8B) has elapsed, all the lights are turned off (hidden) during the RAM error notification. However, if the RAM clear notification timer is configured to proceed with subsequent processing simply by counting the RAM error notification time, it will blink all for 5 seconds from the start of the RAM error notification, and then the base value display will start. become.

In each of the above-described embodiments, a pachinko gaming machine using a gaming ball as a gaming medium has been described, but the pachinko gaming machine is not particularly limited as long as it can achieve the object of the present invention. For example, a gaming machine that uses a gaming medal as a gaming medium, a gaming machine that uses a gaming medium that uses electromagnetic recording (a gaming machine such as a so-called "enclosed gaming machine (managed gaming machine)"), or a pachinko machine. It may be a pachinko / pachislot machine. Further, as long as it achieves the object of the present invention and exerts an action effect, it is naturally not limited to the simultaneous fluctuation type, but also a gaming machine of a type that does not change the other special symbol when one special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner. Can be applied.

The present invention is useful for gaming machines.

1 Pachinko machine,
2 front frame,
3 game board,
3a Game area,
4 outer frame,
6 glass door,
9 Upper saucer,
15 Launch operation handle,
19 Game ball payout device,
20 Main control unit (main control board),
24 Production control unit (Production control board, LCD control board)
28 Launch control board,
29 Payout control board,
32 launcher,
34, 34a Upper start port, upper start port sensor 35, 35a Lower start port, lower start port sensor,
36 Liquid crystal display device,
37, 37a Normal symbol start port, normal symbol start port sensor,
38a, 38b special symbol display device,
39a Ordinary symbol display device,
50, 52a Large winning opening, large winning opening sensor 41 Ordinary variable winning device,
41c Ordinary electric accessory solenoid,
52 Special variable prize device,
52c Grand prize opening solenoid,
43 General winning opening,
43a General winning opening sensor,
45 decorative lamps,
46 speakers,
47 Movable wing pieces,
49 out mouth,
60 full detection sensor,
61 Front door open sensor,
94 setting key switch,
95 setting change switch,
96 Setting change completion switch,
97 Setting indicator,
98 RAM clear switch,
99 Performance indicator,
201 Main control CPU,
202 main control ROM,
203 Main control RAM,
241 production control CPU,
242 production control ROM,
243 Production control RAM.

Claims (1)

Based on the establishment of the starting conditions, a lottery means to execute a lottery regarding winning, and
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a win, the winning game control means for controlling the winning game and the winning game control means
Information display means capable of displaying predetermined information that is display-controlled based on predetermined display pattern data and calculated based on game performance, and
An information display control means that controls the information display means and
A data table in which a plurality of types of display pattern data that can be displayed on the information display means are stored, and
It is a gaming machine equipped with
A first storage area in which the game information is stored, and
It has a second storage area in which the predetermined information is stored, and has.
The information display control means
After power-on, the confirmation display processing for displaying pre SL information displayed for a predetermined time a confirmation display for operation confirmation means, after the confirmation display is performed for a predetermined period of time, predetermined information for displaying the predetermined information on said information display means Display processing and can be executed,
During the confirmation display, the abnormality check process of the second storage area can be executed.
In the predetermined information display process, the information display means is displayed and controlled using the display pattern data corresponding to the predetermined information, and in the confirmation display process, the information display means is displayed using the display pattern data corresponding to the confirmation display. Control and
Of the predetermined information display process and the confirmation display process, the display pattern data is configured to be acquired from the data table only in the case of the predetermined information display process.
A gaming machine that features that.

Images